Home

HP StorageWorks 9030 Virtual Library System User's Manual

1. ltem Specification Maximum heat dissipation 68 BTU hr Voltage 100 127 VAC 200 240 VAC Current 0 75 A 0 4 A Power 20 W Frequency 50 60 Hz Ethernet Switch 2810 24G ltem Specification Dimensions 12 7 x 17 4 x 1 7 in 32 26 x 44 2 x 4 32 cm 1U height Weight 7 21 Ib 3 27 kg fully loaded Ports 20 auto sensing 10 100 1000 ports IEEE 802 3 Type 10Base T IEEE 802 3u Type 100Base TX IEEE 802 3ab Type 1000Base T 1 RJ 45 serial console port 4 dual personality ports each of which can be used as either an RJ 45 10 100 1000 port or an open mini GBIC slot for use with mini GBIC transceivers Processor MIPS 264 MHz Flash capacity 16 MB SDRAM 64 MB Packet buffer size 0 75 MB Latency lt 5 6 ps FIFO 64 byte packets Throughput up to 35 7 million pps 64 byte packets Switching capacity 48 Gbps MAC address table size 8000 entries Maximum heat dissipation 164 BTU hr Voltage 100 127 VAC 200 240 VAC Current 1 25 A 0 75 A Power 60 W Frequency 50 60 Hz Ethernet Switch 6600 24G Item Specification Dimensions 21 5 x 17 4 x 1 7 in 54 61 x 44 2 x 4 32 cm 1U height Weight 17 2 lb 7 8 kg fully loaded Ports 20 auto sensing 10 100 1000 ports IEEE 802 3 Type 10Base T IEEE 802 3u Type 100Base TX IEEE 802 3ab Type 1000Base T 1 RJ 45 serial console port 4 dual personality ports each of which can be used as either an RJ 45 10 100 1000 port or an open mini GBIC slot f
2. VLS9000 Disk Array Components LEDs and Buttons 205 Rear Panel Components Base Disk Array Enclosure 11735 Item Description 1 Power module O RAID controller O RAID controller 1 Fibre Channel port O Fibre Channel port 1 not used Service port for service only CLI port not used Ethernet port O MIN A AJAJ OJN SAS output port Power module 1 Expansion Disk Array Enclosure 1173 ltem Description 1 Power module O 2 Expansion controller 0 3 Expansion controller 1 4 SAS port O input port 5 Service port for service only 206 Component Identification tem Deseo S O 6 SAS port 1 output port 7 Power module 1 Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons Base Disk Array Enclosure 11737 ltem Description Status 1 Power switch Toggle where O is Off 2 AC Power Good LED Green AC power is on and input voltage is normal Off AC power is off or input voltage is below the minimum threshold 3 DC Fan Fault Service Yellow DC output voltage is out of range or a fan is operating below the minimum Required LED required RPM Off DC output voltage is normal 4 FC link status L LED Green The port link is connected Off The port is empty or the link is down 5 FC link speed S LED Green The data transfer rate is 4 Gbps Off The data transfer rate is 2 Gbps 6 Unit
3. Command getCartTypes Usage Returns a list of available cartridge emulation types Displays each cartridge emulation s name type and capacity information Where the options are 1 List only licensed types optional h Displays command usage information optional getCartTypesByTape Returns a list of available cartridge emulation types for the tape drive specified Displays each cartridge emulation s name type and capacity information Where the options are a lt s gt Name of tape drive type required h Displays command usage information optional createCartridge Creates the specified number of cartridges with the specified barcode and associated with the specified library Note If you specify more cartridges than slots defined for the library this command only creates enough cartridges for the slots available That is if your library has 100 slots and you specify 125 total cartridges this command creates 100 cartridges Likewise if 50 cartridges were already created for this library this command would create only 50 more cartridges even though 125 are specitied by the command Where the options are a lt s gt Cartridge name DIT required b lt s gt Barcode prefix required c lt n gt Capacity in gigabytes required 1 lt s gt Library name Library_0 required n lt n gt Number of cartridges required ov lt n gt Oversubscribe 0 or 1 requir
4. Setting the Network Settings using the CLI Command Set To set the network settings using the CLI command set set either the e DHCP usage and host name or e Fully qualified host name or host name and DNS domain name separately DNS server address IP address gateway and netmask To set the network settings using the CLI command set 1 Open a serial session and log in to the administrator account See Opening a Serial Session page 102 106 Configuration 2 To see the current configuration settings at the prompt enter showConfig 3 Set each desired configuration value by entering setConfigValue lt tag gt value where lt tag gt can be any of the following Tag Description host Host name such as vilsexamp unqualified domain DNS domain name such as xyz com fullhost Fully qualified name such as vilsexamp xyz com dnsaddr DNS server address replaces all addresses with one line dnsaddr1i First DNS server address cannot use with dnsaddr dnsaddr2 Second DNS server address cannot use with dnsaddr dhep Has no value indicates you want to configure the public Ethernet connection using DHCP reset is dhcp false ipaddr IP address of public Ethernet connection gate Gateway to network xx xx xx x mask Netmask Default is 255 255 255 0 ntpPrimary First NTP Server Address ntpSecondary Second NTP Server Address NOTE More than
5. 2 Select Unmanage from the task bar 3 Select OK from the dialog box The Destination Libraries window displays and provides the message The library library name was unmanaged successtully Unmanage the library from the Destination Libraries window 1 Select Destination Libraries from the navigation tree 54 Automigration Replication 2 From the task bar select Unmanage Library The Unmanage Destination Library screen displays showing all managed libraries If there are no managed libraries the system will return the message There are no managed libraries 3 If the library you wish to unmanage is not already selected select it now NOTE You can only select one library to unmanage at a time To unmanage additional libraries repeat the procedure for each library to unmanage 4 Select Submit The Destination Library Details screen displays with the message The library library name was unmanaged successtully Echo Copy Pool Operations Echo copy acts as a transparent disk cache to the physical library so that the backup application writes to virtual cartridges in the virtual library Automigration then automatically schedules the copies from virtual cartridges to their matching physical cartridges with the same barcodes based on the automigration policies For creating echo copies automigration supports the following backup software on the physical libraries e CA ARCserve Bac
6. VLS9200 High Performance Node Shipping Carton Item Description 1 VLS9200 high performance node 1 2 2U rack mounting hardware kit 1 and documentation 3 Loopback plugs for FC ports 4 4 8 Gb Fibre Channel transceivers 2 5 Power cords 2 6 Quick Restore CD 1 18 Hardware Installation tem Deseript on S O Printed VLS node installation poster 1 Ethernet cables 2 and Fibre Channel cables 2 not shown shipped separately VLS9000 40 port Connectivity Kit Shipping Carton Description Ethernet switches 2 20 port FC switches 2 1U rack mount kits 4 and documentation Power cords 8 Printed VLS connectivity kit installation poster 1 Air plenums for the Ethernet switches 2 not shown Ethernet cables 3 not shown shipped separately VLS9000 Entry level Connectivity Kit Shipping Carton ltem Description Ethernet switch 2510 24 1 Ethernet cables 2 Power cord 1 KR wl rm Printed VLS connectivity kit installation poster 1 Identifying the VLS Shipping Carton Contents 19 VLS Assembly Overview HP recommends you install the VLS9000 and VLS9200 components in the following order eC eta Tern pear lle Creare Oh Install base and capacity disk array enclosures using HP 9200 Virtual Library System 10 TB and 20 TB SAS Base Enclosure Installation I
7. e Online Not Fault Tolerant The virtual disk is online and does not have fault tolerant attributes e Unknown The state of the virtual disk is not known Possible background activity running on the virtual disks e Disks Scrubbing Disks within the virtual disk are being scrubbed e Expanding The virtual disk is being expanded e Initializing The virtual disk is initializing e Low level formatting A low level format is in progress 124 Management Reconstructing The virtual disk is being reconstructed Verifying The virtual disk is being veritied VDisk Scrubbing The virtual disk is being scrubbed Deleting Unused Virtual Disks On the Manage Virtual Disks screen you can delete an unused virtual disk By default it lists the virtual disks in all of the disk arrays l 2 3 4 Select the virtual disks you want to delete To narrow the list of disks displayed use the Select Disk Array list then select Update Select Delete Unused VDisk from the Select Operation list Select Submit A warning screen displays Select Continue The screen displays the status of the deletion NOTE You can only delete virtual disks that are currently not in use or that have two or fewer disks Clearing the Leftover Disks The Clear Lettover Disks screen displays details about the disks including the disk array number and IP address enclosure number disk slot number serial number disk s
8. Editing a LAN WAN Replication Target To edit the LAN WAN replication target settings Deleting a 78 l 2 3 4 5 Select the Automigration Replication tab Expand LAN WAN Replication Targets on the navigation tree and then select the target of interest The LAN WAN Replication Target Details screen displays Select Edit from the task bar On the Edit LAN WAN Replication Target Settings screen edit the target settings as needed For an explanation of the settings see Creating a LAN WAN Replication Target Select Submit To edit the slot mapping see Changing the Slot Mapping for a LAN WAN Library page 63 To edit the availability window 1 2 By 2 3 4 Follow steps 1 through 3 above Select Edit Availability Windows from the task bar to open that screen The Edit Availability Windows screen displays To delete a availability window select Delete in the row of that policy window in the Current Availability Windows section of the screen To add a availability window enter the information in the Add Availability Window section of the screen and then select Add Repeat this step for as many availability windows as you need NOTE When adding multiple availability windows you must select Add for each new availability window or the system will not record it Select Submit LAN WAN Replication Target Select the Automigration Replication tab Expand LAN WAN Replication Targets on
9. Green Switch logic circuitry is receiving the proper DC voltages Off Switch is in maintenance mode Heartbeat LED Green Switch is in maintenance mode Blinking green constant 1 Hz Switch passed the POST and the internal switch processor is running 2 blinks Internal firmware failure 3 blinks System error 4 blinks Configuration file system error 5 blinks Over temperature See Heartbeat LED Blink Patterns for more information System fault LED Amber A fault exists in the switch firmware or hardware Fault conditions include POST errors and over temperature conditions Off Switch is operating normally Ethernet port activity LED Green Data is being transmitted or received over the Ethernet connection Off No data being transmitted or received Ethernet port link status LED Green Ethernet connection has been established Off No connection Port logged In LED Green A device is logged in to the port Flashing green constant 1 Hz A device is logging in to the port Flashing green constant 2 Hz The port is down offline or an error has occurred Port activity LED 194 Component Identification Green Data is passing through the port Each frame that the port transmits or receives causes LED to illuminate for 50 milliseconds Rear Panel Components Power supply O Power supply 1 ltem Description Status 1 Power supply s
10. Select SNMP Setup in the task bar The SNMP Setup window opens To add management consoles a Enter the host name of a management console that you want to receive VLS SNMP traps in the Hostname box b Enter the string name that is passed with the set to get commands from the management console in the Community String box This value is typically set to Public c Select the Event Source from the drop down list to determine which types of notifications to receive All Nodes Disk Arrays or Deduplication d Select the appropriate trap version for the management application that will receive the SNMP traps in the Trap Version box Select 1 for the trap version if your management application is HP Systems Insight Manager e Select the Severity of notifications to receive Errors Warnings or All from the drop down list f Select the Chassis of interest All Discovered Chassis or a specific chassis from the drop down list g Click Add h To add another management console repeat these steps You can add up to eight management consoles To delete a management console from the list click the Remove button for the management console Editing the SNMP Community String To change the SNMP community string aARWN gt 138 Monitoring Click the Notifications tab Select SNMP Setup in the task bar Select Change Community String in the task bar In the dialog box enter the new Read and Read Write community strings Cli
11. Used Capacity The physical storage capacity consumed in the cartridge Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity Viewing Additional Information about a Cartridge To view additional capacity information about a cartridge 144 Monitoring e On the information screen click the Barcode name field link The Cartridge Capacity screen displays capacity information for this cartridge and a graphical representation showing the Logical and Used storage capacity Figure 22 Cartridge Capacity Screen Expand Collapse Refresh E amp Chassis vis300n0 usa hp com E amp Capacity gt Storage Pools Virtual Libraries lt gt Cartridges 70 E Deduplication 60 E Nodes B LUN Mapping m Virtual Libraries 8 40 B If Storage Pools Storage LUNs Cartridges 20 E tgs Disk Arrays 10 Barcode DA0018 Allocated Capacity 45 00 GB Barcode DA0018 Ratio is estimated DA0018 Capacity Logical Data amp Used Capacity Logical Data 77 94 GB Used Capacity Ratio Policy Backup Time Type Ratio 8194 POL5 8194 POL4 The Cartridge Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 20 Cartridge Capacity Table Allocated Capacity Total storage capacity allocated to the Cartridge Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage capacity consumed in t
12. e Expansion enclosure 271 W operating Heat dissipation e Controller enclosure 1286 BTU operating e Expansion enclosure 925 BTU operating VLS9200 Disk Array Enclosure Item Specification Processor Intel Xeon Processor E5640 2 66 GHz 12MB L3 Cache 80 Watts DDR3 1066 HT Turbo 1 1 2 2 Cache Memory 12MB 1 x 12MB Level 3 cache Chipset Intel 5520 Chipset Network Controller Two HP NC382i Dual Port Multifunction Gigabit Server Adapters four ports total with TCP IP Offload Engine including support for Accelerated iSCSI Server Power Cords All Standard Model BTO servers ship with a high voltage server to PDU power cord Localized cables may be included with geographic specitic models in other world regions System Fans 4 fan modules fan redundancy standard with all modules 248 Specifications ltem Fibre Channel ports Fibre Channel Switch 4 10q Specification 20 universal device ports 4 stacking ISL ports 10 Gbps Fibre Channel upgradeable to 20 Gbps Performance e 8 Gbps line speed full duplex e 10 Gbps and 20 Gbps stacking ISL port line speed full duplex Switch core Non blocking Fabric latency lt 0 2y sec cut through routing Maximum frame size 2148 bytes 2112 byte payload Classes of service Class 2 Class 3 Class F inter switch frames connectionless Fibre Channel protocol support Port types e 8 Gbps FL
13. e Paused contains cartridges that have been paused e Waiting for policy window contains cartridges that are waiting for the policy window to open for replication to begin e Mirror Active contains cartridges that are currently copying to the destination library e Mirror Complete contains cartridges that have completed copying to the destination library e Waiting for first backup contains cartridges that do not yet have a stored backup e Initializing contains cartridges that are currently initializing Target Copy Pool Summary e Mirror Active contains cartridges that are currently copying to the mirror e Mirror Complete contains cartridges that have completed copying to the mirror Use the Group By menu to filter the status list or click a particular status to view the summary list of cartridges that it contains Summary of Cartridges by Status Selecting a particular status from the Cartridge Status screen opens the Summary of lt category gt Cartridges screen The summary screen displays the cartridge barcodes and other information such as the local library and destination library for each cartridge There are a number of tasks available in the task bar of the cartridge summary screens and the tasks displayed depend on the Cartridge Status category in which the cartridges belong e Copy Now see Forcing a Replication Job page 69 e Non Deduplicated Copy see Copying the Whole Cartridge Outside
14. 16 configuration required h Displays command usage information optional addSnmpServer Specifies an SNMP management console to receive SNMP traps from the VLS Where the options are a lt s gt SNMP server IP address required c lt s gt VLS node IP address required m lt s gt Community Public required v lt s gt Trap version required s lt n gt Severity l Error 2 Warning 4 Info or 8 Unknown required Table 29 CLI Monitoring Commands continued 1 Command Usage h Displays command usage information optional getSnmp Returns the SNMP management console configuration settings for notification alerts deleteSnmpServer Deletes the specified SNMP management console from the SNMP notification alert settings Where the options are a lt s gt SNMP server IP address required c lt s gt VLS node IP address required Force This parameter is ignored and is present only for backward compatibility optional h Displays command usage information optional lt s gt string lt n gt number lt f gt filename VLS Commands 173 13 Component Identification This section provides illustrations and descriptions of the node disk array enclosure Fibre Channel FC switch and Ethernet switch components LEDs and buttons NOTE For lights that blink or flash the frequency of Hz is about the same number of blinks or flashes per seco
15. 20 17 18 A WARNING Do not connect cables to unused ports on Ethernet switch 1 or 2 Doing so could result in data loss NOTE Do not secure the Ethernet cables at this time You will secure them with the Fibre Channel cables Installing the Ethernet Switch 2510 24 into a Rack VLS9200 Entry level systems use the Ethernet Switch 2510 24 No other switches are required NOTE There are no rails associated with this switch Installing the Ethernet Switch 2510 24 into a Rack 35 1 If the metal mounting brackets are not attached to the switch attach them as follows a Align the brackets so that the four screw holes are against the side of the switch The side of the bracket with two screw holes extends from the switch and aligns with the front of the bezel 12007 b Adjust alignment so that the holes in the side of the mounting bracket line up with the holes in the switch c Use a Phillips cross head screwdriver and the eight M4 screws included to attach the mounting brackets to the switch d Attach cap nuts to the vertical posts where the mounting brackets attach to the rack 2 Immediately above the node on each side of the switch secure the mounting bracket to the vertical posts with a Phillips screw 3 Attach a power cable to the switch s power supply 4 Plug the power cable into an AC power source 5 Route the power cable through the right side of the rack and plug it into a PDM
16. 255 HP Networking products 255 HP ProLiant and X86 Servers and Options 255 HP Storage products 255 warranty serial number 109 web sites HP Subscriber s choice 238 websites customer self repair 239 HP documentation 236 HP Storage 236 whole cartridge replication 52 Window Duration 58 workload assessment 152 running 152 workload assessment simulation 152 workload assessment template adding 153 deleting 153 editing 153 world wide port numbers 133 WWPNs 133 X XPAK transponders installing 41
17. 47 Rebuild Storage Pool 47 Reclaim Space 111 Restart Emulations in Maintenance Mode 47 Run Pool Policy 48 Set RAID Mode 126 Stop Tape Export 74 View Log 81 technical support 238 telco racks 215 text symbols 237 thresholds for notifications 152 tools installation 14 trace log files creating a support ticket 161 saving to individual files 161 viewing 161 troubleshooting 241 automigration 244 common issues 241 deduplication 245 replication 244 with iLO 241 TSM VLS emulation 116 Turkey RoHS material content declaration 255 U Ukraine RoHS material content declaration 255 unmanaging a SAN or LAN WAN library 54 unpacking 15 unused virtual disks deleting 125 Upload Firmware 71 USB LAN adapter components 204 user interface Command View VLS 98 descriptions 98 requirements 98 secure shell connection 101 serial connection 101 user preferences setting 108 V View Log 81 virtual disk deleting 125 viewing status 124 virtual library creating 116 editing 118 virtual tapes creating 58 VLS 268 Index introduction 12 VLS Critical Diagnostics Services 103 VLS device emulations with Netbackup 116 with TSM 116 VLS device emulations restarting 131 171 VLS system powering off 96 powering on 94 rebooting 95 W Waiting for first backup 80 Waiting for policy window 80 warm failover defined 230 warning rack stability 238 warranty information HP Enterprise servers
18. 6 Attach a power cable to the switch s power supply Cabling Ethernet Switch 2510 24 36 Table 8 Cabling the Ethernet Switch ltem Description Connects to 1 Port 1 NIC 3 of node via Ethernet cable 2 Port 2 NIC 4 of node via Ethernet cable 3 Port 15 Ethernet port of RAID controller 2 of base array enclosure via Ethernet cable 4 Port 16 Ethernet port of RAID controller 1 of base array enclosure via Ethernet cable 1 Connect the Ethernet switch to the node using Table 8 page 36 2 Connect the Ethernet switch to the base array enclosure working backwards from port 16 on the Ethernet switch Hardware Installation 3 Secure Ethernet cables with a Velcro tie to the right side of the rack Installing the Fibre Channel Switches into a Rack Installing the switches into the rack involves attaching rails to the Fibre Channel switches and then mounting them into the rack Install the switches immediately above the nodes previously installed 1 Locate the following items and set them aside on a stable work surface e Two Fibre Channel switches and two AC power cords e 1U rails adjustable mounting flanges two 1U cover plates and hardware to secure the rails to the rack e Screws to secure rails to the switch 2 Connect the two AC power cords to the two power supplies on the rear of both Fibre Channel switches 3 Attach the rails to the sides of the switches using screws provided 11753
19. Additional base enclosures connects to the next available port on Fibre Channel switch 1 FC SW1 via FC cable Cable additional base enclosures to the switch ports in this order 19 8 18 7 17 6 16 FC port 1 Array 1 base enclosure connects to port 9 of Fibre Channel switch 2 FC SW2 via FC cable Additional base enclosures connects to the next available port on Fibre Channel switch 2 FC SW2 via FC cable Cable additional base enclosures to the switch ports in this order 19 8 18 7 17 6 16 Ethernet port Array 1 base enclosure connects to port 19 of Ethernet switch 2 SW2 Additional base enclosures connects to the next available port on Ethernet switch 2 SW 2 via Ethernet cable Cable additional base enclosures to the switch ports in this order 20 17 18 15 16 13 14 Ethernet port Array 1 base enclosure connects to port 19 of Ethernet switch 1 SW1 Additional base enclosures connects to the next available port on Ethernet switch 1 SW1 via Ethernet cable Cable additional base enclosures to the switch ports in this order 20 17 18 15 16 13 14 If you are installing a single base enclosure cable it to the Fibre Channel and Ethernet switches as indicated in Table 1 page 27 and the installation is complete Otherwise continue to Table 2 page 27 and the procedure that follows it Table 2 Cabling Capacity Enclosures ltem Description Connects
20. DVD 1 Save your configuration settings See Saving Configuration Settings page 133 2 Download the VLS Firmware and Quick Restore CD Image appropriate for your VLS system from the HP website 3 Burn the image to CD to create your own Quick Restore DVD 4 Follow the Recovering from Operating System Failure page 230 procedure for re installing the operating system including the instructions specific to restoring primary nodes NOTE You must install the Quick Restore DVD on each node of the VLS Installing the Deduplication Licenses The deduplication feature is a licensed option The number of deduplication licenses must match or exceed the number of capacity licenses based on LTU on the VLS device See Installing Additional Licenses page 48 for installation instructions After installing the required deduplication licenses the VLS automatically reboots When the system is back up it first checks the standard capacity licenses and then the deduplication licenses Once the deduplication licenses are verified the deduplication feature is automatically enabled for all supported backup types No further setup is required When the next backup begins the deduplication process begins mapping the content of that backup After the second backup the system delta differences compares the two backups and the deduplication proceeds You may choose to disable some backup types see Configuring Deduplication Options page 86 f
21. IMPORTANT Adding or removing tape drives may cause an older driver inf file to be reread which can re enable RSM polling If tape drives are added or removed check the registry for proper configuration If necessary repeat step 2 and 3 above To disable polling in the HP SDLT driver v3 0 2 0 or later 1 Open the Device Manager on the server connected to the tape drive 2 Double click an SDLT tape drive 3 Click the DLT tab VLS Common Issues 243 Symptom Possible causes Solution 4 Check Increase performance by disabling support for Microsoft Backup Utility 5 Repeat this procedure for each server visible to each SDLT tape drive At reboot there are spurious critical FC port failures reported as notification alerts usually on every port Later Info notification alerts for each FC host port are generated indicating the FC ports are operating normally This is expected behavior and does not indicate a problem None The Identity tab of Command View VLS reports Total Usable Capacity of O GB even though there are working disk arrays available to the VLS system Whenever the VLS detects more arrays than there are correctly installed licenses the VLS system will disable ALL array storage and report O GB of Total Usable Capacity In Command View VLS go to the License Summary screen System gt Chassis on the navigation tree gt Licensing The screen lists all of the licenses
22. If you are troubleshooting the VLS especially if the system is down you may find these features helpful e Power on the VLS e Power off the VLS Under normal conditions you should use Command View VLS to power off the system e Determine if the master node is powered on or off e Turn on or off the UID LED e Check the Integrated Management Log to see past node hardware failures e Check the hardware health and basic hardware configuration if the VLS is down or you have reason to suspect the reporting is incorrect e Check the master node s Serial Number Product ID BIOS firmware version and iLO firmware version There are many other useful iLO features see your iLO user guide for details VLS Common Issues Symptom Some of the virtual devices are not detected by the operating system when it scans the SAN for new hardware Possible causes There are more LUNs on the FC host ports than the operating system is configured to see Once the maximum number of LUNs on a device is detected the operating system stops looking for more LUNs In the case of the VLS the operating system considers each FC host port to be one device So if the maximum number of LUNs an operating system is configured to see is eight the operating system will only see LUNO LUN1 LUN7Z and will not see LUN8 LUN and up on each FC host port By default Windows and HP UX hosts can see a maximum of 8 LUNs
23. Required LED required RPM Off DC output voltage is normal 4 Unit locator LED Blinking white Expansion controller is selected for identification purposes only Off Not active 5 SAS port 0 input port Green The port link is connected status LED Off The port is empty or the link is down 6 OK to remove LED Blue Not implemented 7 Fault Service required Yellow A fault has been detected or a service action is required LED Blinking yellow A hardware controlled power on or a cache flush or restore error occurred 8 Power On OK LED _ Green Expansion controller is operating normally Off Expansion controller is not OK 9 SAS port 1 output Green The port link is connected port status LED Off The port is empty or the link is down Some power supply models do not have a power switch In this case power down the enclosure by unplugging the power cords from the enclosure VLS9200 Disk Array Enclosure Components LEDs and Buttons 213 14 Component Replacement This section provides detailed instructions for replacing customer replaceable VLS components See Customer Self Repair for details A CAUTION Always replace components with the same make size and type of component Changing the hardware configuration voids the warranty Safety Considerations Before performing component replacement procedures review all the safety information in this guide Preventing Electrostatic Discharg
24. Select the library of interest Select Assess Workload 2 3 On the pop up window select OK to use a template or Cancel to enter all of the criteria values 4 If you opted to use a template select the template and then select Run Simulation If you opted not to use a template enter the criteria values and then select Run Simulation You can add edit and delete templates see Using the Workload Assessment Templates 5 Enter the size of the full backup in GB at the top of the screen 6 Select Run Simulation Scroll to the bottom of the screen if necessary to view the simulation results Each tested threshold receives either a green threshold is fine or red threshold is exceeded icon 152 Monitoring Using the Workload Assessment Templates Deleting a workload assessment template 1 Select the template from the template summary screen 2 Select Delete Template The template is removed from the template summary list Adding a new workload assessment template 1 Select Add New Template 2 Enter the template name and all other values 3 For each day of the week select the backup type and the start time and duration in 24 hour time 4 Select Create Template The screen displays the template summary list which now includes the one you just created Editing a workload assessment template 1 Select the template from the template summary screen 2 Select Edit Template 3 Change the values as necessary 4 Select
25. Storage controller Smart Array P410i Controller VLS9200 High Performance Node Specification Physical Value Dimensions HxWxD 8 59 x 44 55 x 69 22 cm 3 38 x 17 54 x 27 25 in Weight maximum all hard drives power supply and processor installed 27 27 kg 60 00 Ib Weight minimum one hard drive power supply and processor installed 21 45 kg 47 18 lb Processor and memory Number of processors 2 Processors supported Intel Xeon 5600 series Cache 8 MB L3 Memory type DDR3 RDIMM Standard memory DDR3 Maximum memory 192 GB Memory slots 18 DIMM Storage Maximum internal storage 4 TB Maximum internal drive bays 8 Expansion slots 6 PCle x8 Gen 2 mezzanine Storage controller Smart Array P410i Controller VLS9200 High Performance Node 247 VLS9000 Disk Array Enclosure ltem Specification Dimensions 59 7 x 44 7 x 8 8 cm 23 5 x 17 6 x 3 5 in Weight e Controller enclosure with drives 33 6 kg 74 lb e Expansion enclosure with drives 31 3 kg 69 lb Input frequency 50 60 Hz Input voltage 208 to 264 VAC Input current requirement e Controller enclosure Spin up 2 7 A at 220 V 60 Hz Operating 1 7 A at 220 V 60 Hz e Expansion enclosure Spin up 2 2 A at 220 V 60 Hz Operating 1 2 A at 220 V 60 Hz Steady state maximum input power e Controller enclosure 377 W operating
26. The CREATE ECHO COPY POOL screen displays Enter a start slot number and an end slot number for the copy pool from within the available slot range shown Select the local library where your echoed virtual cartridges will be placed from the Local Library list Select the storage pool where your echoed virtual cartridges will be stored from the Storage Pool list For LAN WAN echo copy pools select whether your replication is for deduplicated or non deduplicated backups For LAN WAN echo copy pools select Initialize via Tape Transport only if you intend to use this echo copy pool for the one time process of tape initialization See Tape Initialization page 52 Select Next Step to set the policies Type the desired policy settings in the corresponding fields The policy settings differ for SAN libraries and LAN WAN libraries and are as follows SAN libraries e Retention days the number of days information is kept in the firesafe before it is deleted The default is two days e Sizing factor the percentage of space compared to the actual size of a disk allocated on the virtual tape for the copy job For example if the sizing factor is set to 90 and the physical tape is 100 GB the allocated space for the virtual tape will be 90 GB 56 Automigration Replication NOTE The sizing factor is crucial to creating the right size virtual tapes When determining the sizing factor of the virtual tapes keep in m
27. continue to the next step If the Destination Slot Number for each mailslot displays None the copy pool you selected is full Select another copy pool and the Destination Slot Number column will show the automatic assignment Click Clear All to clear the automatic assignments Hover over the first Select Slot link to display a list of the available destination slots Select a slot number from the list After you select a slot from the available destination slots that slot no longer appears in the list Hover over each Select Slot link until you have selected a destination slot for each mailslot Click Next Step A confirmation screen displays Click Load The Media Move History screen displays the current status of the move The possible status messages are Moving Waiting Successful and Failed If the status of the move is still Waiting you can click Cancel to stop the move NOTE Using Load Media for Restore will create a virtual tape if one does not already exist Echo Copy Pool Operations 59 Restoring from a LAN WAN Virtual Cartridge From Command View VLS On ee Click the Automigration Replication tab Under Destination Libraries in the navigation tree expand the library you want to restore From the navigation tree select Slots On the task bar select Restore Media Select the slot numbers you wish to restore Click Submit The Restore Media screen refreshes with a message that indicates the rest
28. editing 71 manually restoring the system 231 media ejecting from a drive into empty mailslot 70 ejecting from a slot into empty mailslot 70 loading into an echo copy pool 60 moving to another slot 69 mirror restarting broken 61 Mirror Active 80 Mirror Complete 80 Mirror failed corrective action needed 80 monitoring destination library automigration 65 system status 171 Move Media 69 moving cartridges 128 N Netbackup library requirement 116 VLS emulation 116 netmask setting 107 164 network settings setting 105 164 viewing 105 164 node access panel installing 216 access panel removing 216 components 214 configure primary node 44 configure secondary node 44 extending from the rack 215 fan locations 181 front panel components 174 182 188 front panel LEDs and buttons 174 182 189 hard drive LED combinations 181 hard drive LEDs 180 HP Systems Insight Display and LEDs 179 186 HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal health LED combinations 179 187 numbering 44 powering off 96 rear panel components 183 190 rear panel LEDs and buttons 184 191 rebooting 171 recovering from failure using cold spare 233 recovering from RAID volume failure 232 removing from the rack 216 shipping carton contents 18 specifications 246 system board component 177 185 using cold spare 233 Non Deduplicated Copy 75 Not migrated in Copy Pools threshold limit 79 Not migrated in Dedupli
29. enter the number of days to include in the report and select Export See Exporting CSV Data page 147 for more information To change the information displayed in the graphs follow Step 1 Step 2 and Step 4 in Logical Capacity page 151 The final two graphs allow you to view the physical capacity for a specific storage pool or library You can also change the graph type from stacked to line Use the lists to make your selections and then select Update Graphs Workload Assessment The Workload Assessment tab features a workload assessment simulation to ensure that a planned new backup will fit on the system with the existing backups before actually running the backup The simulation tests the physical capacity and logical capacity thresholds it also tests the Fibre Channel performance for each day of the week that runs an existing backup In addition you can quickly see whether or not a particular library has notification alerts enabled and the alert threshold values A threshold is a percentage or ratio value that when reached triggers the system to send a notification For example if you set the critical notification for the logical capacity to 90 the system will send a critical notification when the logical capacity exceeds 90 used You can edit the notification alerts for specific libraries and for the entire VLS system on this screen See Editing the Notification Alerts page 153 Running a Workload Assessment Simulation 1
30. required Table 27 CLI Configuration Commands continued Command Usage 1 p lt s gt Product DIT7000 SDIT320 required pm lt n gt FC port to which this tape drive is mapped required r lt s gt Revision R138 required t lt s gt Tape drive type name required v lt s gt Vendor Quantum HP required y lt n gt Tape drive type 3 4 required h Displays command usage information optional getTapeDrives Returns a list of all tape drives defined in the VLS Where the options are a lt s gt Library name Library_0 required h Displays command usage information optional getTapeDrive Returns the configuration information for the specified tape drive Where the options are a lt s gt Name of desired tape drive TapeDrive_ required h Displays command usage information optional getTapeDriveStats Returns the R W statistics of the specitied tape drives getAllTapeDriveStats Returns the R W statistics of all existing tape drives destroyTapeDrive Deletes the specitied tape drive from the VLS Where the options are a lt n gt Node number on which the tape drive resides 0 to 3 optional f Force This parameter is ignored and is present only for backward compatibility optional 1 lt n gt LUN number of the tape drive to delete 1 2 required la lt n gt Number of the node
31. total capacity free capacity owning controller RAID level status background array activity and percentage complete and the serial number You can access the Clear Leftover Disks Update Firmware Reset Array Information and Set RAID Mode screens from the task bar Viewing the Virtual Disk Status The Manage Virtual Disks screen displays details about the virtual disks in the disk arrays By default it lists all of the virtual disks in the arrays You can narrow the list by using the Select Disk Arrays list and then selecting Update The status of the disk array is one of the following e Online Not Fault Tolerant some disks down The virtual disk is online However some drives are down and the virtual disk is not fault tolerant e Online Fault Tolerant some disks down The virtual disk is online and fault tolerant However some of the drives are down e Online Fault Tolerant The virtual disk is online and fault tolerant e Offline either due to initialization or because disks are down and data may be lost The virtual disk is offline either because of initialization or because drives are down and data may be lost e Critical Quarantined due to missing disks The virtual disk is in a critical state and has been quarantined because three or more drives are missing e Offline Quarantined due to missing disks The virtual disk is offline and has been quarantined because three or more drives are missing
32. unchecked by default With this option the deduplication algorithm compares data sets based on the backup policy job name and then compares them based on the client name before deduplicating Leave this unchecked to have the deduplication engine match the data sets based on the client name only Click Update The screen refreshes and updates the information NOTE You can set the backup algorithm at the individual backup job level On the Configuration screen select a specific data type to display all the backup jobs of that type then follow Step 3 through Step 5 above Editing the Data Protector Configuration Data Protector adds one suffix to the backup job names of full backups and a different suffix to the backup job names of incremental backups Because the job names are not identical full backups will not deduplicate against incremental backups However you can set up deduplication to strip off the suffixes so the two types of jobs will deduplicate From Command View VLS l 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Select the System tab In the navigation tree select Chassis The chassis details screen opens Under the Maintenance Tasks list select System Maintenance From the task bar select Edit Data Protector Configuration Enter the suffix of the full backup job names in the text box Select Submit The suffix appears in a list beneath the text box Enter the suffix of the incremental backup job names in the text bo
33. vfs etka Barcode Allocated Capacity Logical Data Used Capacity Ratio Cartridges E gt Deduplication DA0111 45 00 GB 77 95 GB 1 01 GB 774 I gt Nodes 45 00 GB 2GB 973 08 MB 81 1 E LUN Mapping amp Gp Virtual Libraries 101 1 I Storage Pools 771 75 MB 102 1 Storage LUNs Cartridges 671 09 MB 117 1 B Disk Arrays 603 98 MB 130 1 x The Cartridges Capacity table lists the following capacity values 146 Monitoring Table 23 Cartridges Capacity Table The barcode of the cartridges in the library The barcode name is a link to display the capacity information about Barcode the cartridge Allocated Capacity Total storage capacity allocated to the Cartridge Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage capacity consumed in the cartridge Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity NOTE The Used Capacity value for some cartridges may be greater than the Logical Data This can be due to relabeling of a cartridge that consumes 32 MB of physical space The Extent Size of a relabeled cartridge is fixed at 32 MB This is added to the Used Capacity value of the relabeled cartridge even when the cartridge has no data See Viewing Additional Information about a Cartridge page 144 for detailed cartridge capacity utilization Performance and Storage Use Reports You can customize an
34. 1 Click the System tab 2 Select the tape drive in the navigation tree The tape drive details window opens 3 Click Destroy Tape Drive in the task bar Click Yes to confirm 5 Click Finish gt Destroying a Tape Drive 121 10 Management This section details the VLS management procedures such as changing the account passwords managing high availability and saving configuration settings Changing the Account Passwords To change the administrator and or user account password from Command View VLS Click the System tab Select Chassis from the navigation tree Click Edit Accounts under Maintenance Tasks The Edit Accounts window opens Enter the current password in the Old Password box The password is case sensitive Enter a new password in the New Password box Enter the new password again in the Retype New Password box Click Apply Settings NOOR WN gt Command View VLS restarts automatically NOTE You can change the user or administrator account password separately or change both at the same time NOTE The password can also be changed from the VLS CLI See CLI Management commands page 170 Managing High Availability This section describes the methods to maintain high availability with your VLS Array Dual Pathing The VLS system supports dual pathing to the arrays which provides path balancing and transparent path failover on the VLS Having followed the setup recommendations
35. 122 for more information You can set a global default so that either the VLS allows all hosts connected to the VLS through the SAN to access all virtual devices configured on the VLS or the VLS prevents all hosts from viewing any virtual devices until they are explicitly mapped to the host Each time you add a new host to the VLS it takes the global default you have set The VLS firmware also manages the LUN numbering so that the virtual device LUN assignments always meet operating system requirements and restrictions See Default LIN Numbering page 111 and Operating System LUN Requirements and Restrictions page 112 Port mapping is required and allows you to assign each virtual device to one of the Fibre Channel host ports or a pair of Fibre Channel host ports if your backup solution supports this Default LUN Numbering The VLS automatically assigns a logical unit number LUN to each virtual library and tape drive created on the VLS in the order in which they are created by you starting with LUNO and increasing incrementally by one as each new virtual library or tape drive is created on an Fibre Channel host port LUN1 LUN2 and so on The first virtual device port mapped to any of the Fibre Channel host ports is assigned the LUN number LUNO The second virtual device port mapped to an Fibre Channel host port is assigned the LUN number LUN and so on The default LUN numbers are changed by the VLS firmware when the VLS
36. 20 TB 3 1 Library_2000 22 50 TB 32 06 TB 9 82 TB 12 68 TB 3 3 1 The Libraries Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 22 Libraries Capacity Table Library The name of the library or FireSafe This is a link to display capacity information about the library or FireSafe Allocated Capacity Total storage capacity allocated to the Library This is the product of the number and size of the cartridges in the Library This value might be oversubscribed Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage used for data whether or not it is deduplicated Available Capacity The physical storage currently available for additional backup data This is the total Allocated Capacity less the Used Capacity Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity See Viewing Additional Information about a Library page 143 for detailed library capacity utilization Cartridges View To navigate to the Cartridges link e On the navigation tree select System gt Chassis gt Capacity gt Cartridges The Cartridges Capacity screen displays the list of cartridges in your VLS Figure 24 Cartridges Capacity Screen Expand Collapse Refresh amp B Chassis vis300n0 usa hp com Cartridges All E Capacity gt Storage Pools 1201 1220 of 1220 First Page Previous 100
37. 3 With the latch in the center position slide the XPAK into the port until it clicks into place NOTE Install XPAKs into ports 20 and 22 with the heat sink facing up Install XPAKs into ports 21 and 23 with the heat sink facing down Move the latch to the locked position as indicated on the latch 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each Fibre Channel switch with the remaining XPAKs gt Installing the VLS9000 Interswitch Link Kit 4 Applying ISL Kit Labels Locate the labels supplied in the interswitch link kit contents As you install each cable in the following sections apply the appropriate label to each cable end NOTE The labels for interlinking the switches use A to indicate rack 1 and B to indicate rack 3 For example an Ethernet cable label will read SW6600 24A port 22 TO SW6600 24B port 22 Installing Interswitch Fibre Channel Cables 1 Locate the Fibre Channel cables included in the interswitch link kit contents 2 Remove the black cover from each XPAK 3 Connect the Fibre Channel cables from the switches in rack 1 to the switches in rack 4 To identify individual ports in the image above see Installing XPAK Transponders page 41 From Rack 1 Switch 1 port 20 Switch 1 port 21 To Rack 4 Switch 1 port 20 Switch 1 port 21 Swit
38. 37 Fibre Channel transceiver replacing 225 firesafe 121 automigration 62 firmware updating 132 Forced Non Deduplicated Copy 75 fully qualified name setting 107 164 G gateway to network setting 107 164 Global LAN WAN Replication Target Settings 78 glossary 256 grounding methods 214 H hard drive replacing 225 help obtaining 238 host name setting 107 164 hot spare adding 126 HP contacting 238 document conventions 236 storage documents 236 storage web site 236 Subscriber s choice web site 238 icon cancel job 76 navigation tree 135 Notification alert 135 pause job 76 resume job 76 status banner 134 Identity tab Contact 108 Contact Phone 108 E mail 108 IP address 105 Location 108 VLS IP address 164 VLS serial number 133 Warranty Serial Number 109 iLo troubleshooting with 241 iLO 2 Advanced installing license 48 importing tapes 75 In Use Deduplicating 80 Initializing 80 264 Index Initiate Tape Transport 74 Insight Remote Support 239 installation 14 ESD precautions 14 grounding methods 14 identifying shipping carton contents 16 overview 20 rack requirements 16 rack warnings 16 racking planning resources 15 removing packing materials 15 tools 14 unpacking 15 installing Ethernet cables for ISL kit 42 FC cables for ISL kit 42 interswitch link kit 40 PDUs 20 XPAK transponders 41 interswitch link kit installing 40 installing Ethernet cables
39. 42 installing FC cables 42 IP address setting 107 164 L LAN WAN cartridge restoring data from 60 LAN WAN destination library operations 74 LAN WAN library editing availability windows 64 editing the policy 64 unmanaging 54 LAN WAN replication library managing 53 re managing 54 LAN WAN replication target changing the password 79 clearing the source VLS 79 defined 76 deleting 78 editing 78 global configuration 78 operations 76 LED identification disk array enclosure front 209 rear 211 Fibre Channel Switch 4 10q 192 leftover disks clearing 125 defined 125 library creating 166 destroying 120 166 167 Netbackup requirement 116 placing offline 69 placing online 69 Library Assessment Test 72 library policy editing 64 licenses capacity 48 deduplication 48 iLO 2 Advanced 48 installing 48 re installing 231 replication 48 Secure Erasure 48 load balancing 122 Load Blank Media echo copy pool 60 Load Media for Overwrite echo copy pool 60 Load Media for Restore 59 logical capacity report 151 LUN management 11 default LUN numbering 111 LUN mapping 112 LUN masking 112 operating system LUN requirements and restrictions 112 LUNs dual pathing on a private LAN 123 path failover 123 M mailslot details 68 maintenance mode defined 47 Manage LAN WAN Replication Library 53 Manage SAN Automigration Library 53 Manage Virtual Disks 124 management 122 170 management URL
40. 75 TES 5 canes Fas sadetalnseosnigndd abiy tam esndainad a etindensis boosie iesise rosae neiise Sekier ieosdri siis 135 C mmand View VLS 555s jensaiedaaicensentehiniaiesd E E 136 Email Notification sssini a a a 136 Editing the Email Server Settings ccccccccseesseceeeeeeeseneeeeeceeesseeeeeeceeeesnseeeeeeessssseaeees 136 Edit the Email Se iiGS icisdscsicaust ice cosenank akae ir a aE asians oie E N 137 SNMP IN GHIA CIR 5 cscchcwsscesusein taecdlrenasinsandeieaetnnpnsnnsseteledrewdickim haseanadetea tate pacras dat aidean ap opusadiee 138 Editing the SNMP SetingS irusisssrsirieina siirsin E aa nyeuieunateteedadsestoonaicds 138 Editing the SNMP Community String sseeeeeeneseseseorsssessenesssssrrersssssserrsrssrrererrsssseeree 138 SMES Supports eaa EE AA nE EA a n NE EREE EEEE 139 Monitoring Storage Capacity eessssesseeeseeereeeesssstrreressstrtresssssrrrtsssstetetssssssetttssssreeerssetereee 139 Accessing the Capacity IVGINGG EN fd chaact cients lad idan cteaandecdedideutcaned taal ledecerteealanacncbnaecatatics 140 Capacity Usage VisW6 siesisanieisnisassaanieantavsiinaesdonlaaeviaeiinstineabianuldiniweniuimlecantaniernianeeadsidants 140 system Capacity VIEW dexccisasssuiverimciaakeasnesinpanesrinieadiveniaiees aasdianissdoeauastinnioetnenaee 140 Storage Pol Wasa eses eeseict Seace eeet estes payee cota eae to E aeiae Ea Er iE E aN 141 Viewing Additional Information about a Storage Pool ccceccscceeeessesetseeees
41. Automigration Replication Help Device View Device View Library_0 Choose a Library Library_O x Select Device Type Hode Id Port Total Mapped Hosts Library_0 HP_VLS 0 0 0 TapeDrive 1 HP_LTO3 0 0 TapeDrive 2 HP_LTO3 0 0 0 Gp Library_0 HP VLS Gp Library_3 HP VLS E Storage Pools Managing Virtual Device LUNs 113 5 Select a library from the Choose a Library list to view its mapped devices The window refreshes to show the appropriate list 6 Use the View By list to narrow the list of devices based on the node 7 Select the devices you want to map to a particular host 8 Select the host in the Choose hosts list at the bottom of the window These hosts currently do not have any of the devices shown mapped to them You can select multiple hosts using Ctrl elick 9 Select Map next to Choose hosts The window refreshes and the host appears in the device list for the appropriate devices The selected devices are now visible to the new hosts To unmap LUNs by device 1 Navigate to the Device View window See the mapping procedure above 2 Select the appropriate library from the Choose a Library list 3 Select the devices to unmap 4 Select Unmap next to the Choose hosts list The window refreshes and the newly unmapped devices disappear from the device list They are no longer visible to the hosts NOTE After you map or unmap the vir
42. Cae ene a 45 Removing VSS GOGCILY leisisvancdanpasondidusnendavendwedeadesbiuseanctneisedusvanenraeheeintd e aiea a 46 Configuring the Storage Pool POW Gye cceiteenechtsecietesdnecantvedeniedabiecennivicentdicninatecsebirenialieelscioen 46 Viewing the Storage FOO side idancduwedseatexsasoiescaesdldetewnauseteadluaataieeeuwesdheeesanennaesetetsbwete 47 Rebuilding all Storage Pools icsnce cot eansiosscnensindadavind oumentuundads vind sbawndndecs diese dntmenunvadepnddciniwent 47 Rebuilding a Single Storage POG a2 occ ccteececetausnuansiucandecctcve wa vadousdaatauatatecciaasentoutensdilays 47 Adding New Arrays to the Storage Pool cccccccessseeeeeeseeseneeeeeseeesseeeeeeeseessesseeeeseeeaaes 48 Installing Additional lisenises 2 ias5sieesiouseceneieiendeere ada euai eee 48 5 Auiomigraton Replica Onsiris eai aai ia iE E EER EN 50 Understanding Automigration Coneeots ncccciscets cretecerceleceanssantprdaceiascenseinpeaea neni ouneaes 50 Ech Copy Conce ils ccictieweaasssveteu dtuanedensveasehee evista a E aea i aE aa a 50 Replication SO CNS asic ceasiereen de asc tticuerndzceida niacin endedecena sans t tte ertr NEEESE SEEE EEren nErenn neeese ee neenon 51 Tepe Initialization 2 1 cccscesccetcecopiresicoberdevedaucerivenwidiennericomacatanetensvincysheilds EE 52 Connecting a Destinations libtary icincjsccicaveciesossincusin svay nas canwndntndsddenad shaun dninesdienudecsimcnensidwsnetseanntan 52 Supported Destination Library Conmiqurations
43. LAN WAN replication libraries VLS hardware environmental and virtual device library tape drive cartridge status is constantly monitored by the VLS software and displayed on the VLS web user interface Command View VLS Monitoring All Libraries While the device status icon in the Command View VLS status banner indicates the overall VLS device health on other tabs the icon on the Automigration Replication tab indicates the status of the destination libraries A destination library status icon can be one of five states e Error An error occurred while the system was determining the status of the destination libraries e Unknown A destination library s operating condition is unknown Contact HP Technical Support e Normal All destination libraries are operating normally e Warning At least one destination library is in a good state while at least one destination library is any state other than good e El Warning for All All destination libraries are in any state other than good Monitoring a Specific Library A notification alert is generated by the VLS software when a hardware or environmental failure is detected or predicted VLS notification alerts are displayed on the Notifications screen of Command View VLS and can also be sent as mail to the addresses you specify and or as SNMP traps to the management consoles you specify Status is also provided where appropriate on some screens under the Automigrati
44. Notification Generation Options the notifications displayed on the Notifications tab Choose to generate notifications per time period in hours and minutes or per number of job iterations The notifications provide links to detailed information about the jobs performed This configuration option is only available for some VLS firmware versions 6 Click Save as Default The Storage Exerciser uses this information throughout the operation If you encounter problems with the Storage Exerciser select Restart Storage Exerciser Service from the task bar All jobs currently in progress will stop and report a status of Complete Exerciser CLI Commands If you have root access to the VLS you can configure the jobs at the command line You can also retrieve reports from var log hp exerciser exericser report log see Log File Fields page 159 for an explanation of the report fields The command options are start stop and status Examples S2100 hp exerciser sbin start t readonly p all s 3 S2100 hp exerciser sbin start t background p 1 s 4 c 3 D 10 T 01 30 S2100 hp exerciser sbin stop t readonly S2100 hp exerciser sbin status t readonly Where t test type readonly or background p storage pools a11 or use the number of the individual storage pool s concurrent streams 1 to 6 the default is 1 c compressibility 1 to 4 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 4 1 Only applicable to a Background test D
45. Off The switch is not receiving power Temperature Green The switch temperature is normal Blinking orange blinks every 1 6 seconds An over temperature condition has been detected This is a Fault condition indicating elevated internal temperatures The Fault LED will blink simultaneously Blinking orange blinks every 0 8 seconds This indicates an alert condition indicating critical internal temperatures The Fault LED will blink simultaneously Fan Green All fans are operating normally Blinking orange blinks every 1 6 seconds One of the unit s fans has failed The switch Fault LED will be blinking simultaneously Blinking orange blinks every 0 8 seconds One of the unit s fans has failed and the switch is in an overtemp condition The switch Fault LED will be blinking simultaneously Test Status Green The switch self test and initialization are in progress after the switch has been power cycled or reset The switch is not operational until this LED goes off The Self Test LED also comes on briefly when you hot swap a transceiver into the switch the transceiver is self tested when it is hot swapped Blinking orange A component of the switch has failed its self test The status LED for that component for example an RJ 45 port and the switch Fault LED will blink simultaneously Off The normal operational state the switch is not undergoing self test 4 Port LED Mode select
46. PDU Installing PDUs 21 Figure 1 PDU and PDM locations 11851 Installing the Disk Array Enclosures into a Rack This section describes how to install the disk array enclosures into a rack Installing Cage Nuts l 2 6 Locate the cage nuts from the rack mounting hardware kit contents Start at rack positions 3 and 4 when installing full arrays Leave rack space for future expansion for any partial array being installed See Mounting the Disk Array Enclosures into the Rack page 25 for the placement of the enclosures Install a cage nut in the middle hole of each position on the front vertical posts for a total of two on each side On the left front post between the two cage nuts just installed install a cage nut in the bottom hole On the right front post between the two cage nuts just installed install a cage nut in the top hole 1875 Repeat this procedure on the front vertical posts for each 2U enclosure to be installed 22 Hardware Installation 7 On the rear vertical posts starting at the same rack positions as in the front install a cage nut in the middle hole of each position for each 2U enclosure to be installed Attaching Side Brackets to Enclosures NOTE The right and left enclosure side brackets are identical Install the brackets with the beveled slots facing away from the disk array enclosures To attach enclosure side brackets to each side of a disk array enclosure u
47. SAN Health Tab and Notifications For the SAN Health tab you can customize e The number of SRRs Sequence Retransmission Requests for an item above which a notification is generated e The number of SRRs for an item below which the item does not display in the report e The number of Aborts for an item above which a notification is generated e The number of Aborts for an item below which the item does not display in the report Physical Capacity Notifications You can determine when the system sends notifications related to the physical capacity Set up notifications for when the physical capacity exceeds a chosen percentage Logical Capacity Notifications You can determine when the system sends notifications related to the logical capacity Set up notifications for when e The logical capacity usage exceeds a chosen percentage e The system ratio falls below a chosen percentage e The deduplication ratio falls below a chosen percentage Current Status The Current Status tab displays the overall performance and storage capacity information of the VLS in gauges at the top of the page You can also select specific devices to display either the performance or the storage capacity used 148 Monitoring Show the performance of e All Nodes e Pre defined Views Select one of the views from the list You can create these views on the Configuration tab e Most Active node library and tape drive Show the storage capacity total and use
48. Storage Pools destroys all current virtual tape cartridges in the system HP recommends only changing this mode on a new installation before creating any virtual cartridges To change the RAID mode in Command View VLS 1 Navigate to the Manage Virtual Disks screen see Managing Disk Arrays page 124 2 Select Set RAID Mode from the task bar 126 Management Select the RAID Mode e Default No Hot spare the system uses a 10 2 configuration where ten disks are part of the available virtual disks and two are parity disks e Hot spare the system uses a 9 2 1 configuration where nine disks are part of the available virtual disks two are parity disks and one is a hot spare disk NOTE Using the hot spare mode reduces the VLS capacity and performance by 10 Click Submit The screen displays a warning Click Submit The screen displays a confirmation that the mode was changed For all existing arrays the change is made only when you use the Rebuild All Storage Pools operation see Rebuilding all Storage Pools page 47 After the global change is made any new disk array enclosures added to the configuration will use the selected mode If you change the mode and do not rebuild all the storage pools the system will continue to use the mode selected before your change Setting the Disk Beaconing Disk beaconing allows you to turn on the identification LED for any disk on a disk array enclosure You can als
49. Storage under Product Category Customer Self Repair HP customer self repair CSR programs allow you to repair your Storage product If a CSR part needs replacing HP ships the part directly to you so that you can install it at your convenience Some parts do not qualify for CSR Your HP authorized service provider will determine whether a repair can be accomplished by CSR For more information about CSR contact your local service provider For North America see the CSR website htto www hp com qo selfrepair HP Insight Remote Support Software HP strongly recommends that you install HP Insight Remote Support software to complete the installation or upgrade of your product and to enable enhanced delivery of your HP Warranty HP Care Pack Service or HP contractual support agreement HP Insight Remote Support supplements your monitoring 24x7 to ensure maximum system availability by providing intelligent event diagnosis and automatic secure submission of hardware event notifications to HP which will initiate a fast and accurate resolution based on your product s service level Notifications may be sent to your authorized HP Channel Partner for on site service if configured and available in your country The software is available in two variants e HP Insight Remote Support Standard This software supports server and storage devices and is optimized for environments with 1 50 servers Ideal for customers who can benefit from proa
50. This action clears any temporary error conditions that may have occurred and executes the switch self test When pressed with the Clear button in a specific pattern any configuration changes you may have made through the switch console the Web browser interface and SNMP management are removed and the factory default configuration is restored to the switch 10 Locator LED Blinking blue Locate function is active Firmware controlled can be set to on or blinking Off Locate function is disabled USB LAN Adapter Components This section provides an image and description of the USB LAN adapter 11191 ltem Description 1 USB LAN adapter 2 LAN cable 3 USB cable VLS9000 Disk Array Components LEDs and Buttons This section provides images and descriptions of the front and rear panels of the VLS9000 disk array enclosures Front Panel Components 11733 Drives O 1 and 2 numbered from top to bottom 2 Drives 3 4 and 5 204 Component Identification tem Description 3 Drives 6 7 and 8 4 Drives 9 10 and 11 Front Panel LEDs o p CE CL Ls T E 11734 ltem Description Status 1 Enclosure ID LED A hex LED shows the enclosure ID which enables you to correlate an enclosure F for 3 4 seconds with logical views presented by Command View VLS The enclosur
51. WAN replication target i al ae a Once the tape initialization process is complete the automatic migration of deduplicated data from the source site to the target site over the LAN WAN begins See Exporting Data to Physical tapes for Tape Initialization page 74 and Importing Data from Physical Tapes for Tape Initialization page 75 for the specific procedures Connecting a Destination Library Automigration requires one or more dedicated destination libraries to be connected to the VLS device Supported Destination Library Configurations 52 Automigration is supported on e HP MSL series tape libraries e HP EML series tape libraries or library partitions e HP ESL E series tape libraries or library partitions e HP ESL G3 tape libraries or library partitions e HP VLS virtual libraries Automigration Replication Using automigration you can share a single destination library across multiple virtual libraries maximum of 20 drives on the physical libraries or configure multiple destination libraries to be used in a single virtual library A CAUTION Automigration only supports destination libraries that have homogeneous drive types for example all drives are LTO 2 A mixture of drive types in the destination library such as LTO 3 and LTO 2 is not supported NOTE Automigration allows you to use a VLS as a destination library Because of this feature it can also be used as a device to device local replication sch
52. all Windows backup server nodes See the Netbackup web site to determine if the six character limit can be changed If the shortening of the cartridge barcode numbers removes characters from the barcode numbers making them no longer unique the barcode numbers cannot be used with Netbackup You must create new cartridges with no more than six character barcode numbers Netbackup on HP UX cannot build a device file for a VLS library Netbackup on HP UX cannot see virtual devices on a VLS Manually create the device file for the virtual library See the Veritas Netbackup manual 242 Troubleshooting Symptom Netbackup does not display the cartridge barcodes for Autoloader library emulations on the VLS Possible causes Real autoloader libraries do not support barcodes Solution This is normal and will not cause problems HP Data Protector 5 1 does not display the VLS cartridge barcodes By default the barcode reader support is turned off in Data Protector 5 1 To turn on barcode reader support in Data Protector 1 Click Device amp Media 2 Right click the VLS library name and select Properties 3 Click the Control tab A Click the Barcode reader support box to select it VLS performance is being reduced by test unit ready TURs from a Windows host with access to the VLS The Removable Storage Manager or Removable Storage program on a Windows host is submittin
53. and reconfigure as needed Recovering from a Primary Node Failure using a Cold Spare Primary Node 235 16 Support and Other Resources Related Information Documents HP provides the following documentation to support this product e HP Virtual Library System release notes e HP VLS Solutions Guide e HP VLS9000 Virtual Library System User Guide e HP Virtual Library System installation posters See the media kit provided with the VLS and our website for related documentation Websites e HP website http www hp com HP VLS Support http hp com support vls HP VLS Manuals http www hp com support vis manuals HP Storage Sizer http www hp com go storageworks sizer HP Enterprise Backup Solutions Overview and Features htto www hp com go ebs e HP Data Storage htto www hp com qgo storage e HP Drivers and Software htto www hp com support downloads HP Partner Locator http www hp com service_ locator Document Conventions and Symbols Table 30 Document Conventions Convention Element Blue text Table 30 page 236 Cross reference links and e mail addresses Blue underlined text htto www hp com Web site addresses Bold text e Keys that are pressed e Text typed into a GUI element such as a box e GUI elements that are clicked or selected such as menu and list items buttons tabs and check boxes Italic text Text emphasis 236 Support and Other Reso
54. and provides an error message at the bottom of the screen Failure to create the pool most often occurs because the slot numbers chosen are outside the available slot range The start slot is not in a free range of slots displays if only the start slot or both the start and end slots are out of range The end slot is not in a free range of slots displays if only the end slot is out of range 17 If the new pool is not created due to a slot range error repeat this procedure and select slots within an available range Creating Virtual Tapes Virtual tapes are created automatically when e A pool is created that includes physical tapes e A Load Media for Restore Load Blank Media or Load Media for Overwrite is performed e A tape is moved into an echo copy pool by some means other than automigration 58 Automigration Replication NOTE The tape is only created if a header exists and is legible by the system Restoring from a SAN Physical Cartridge If the destination tape is still loaded in the destination library then its matching virtual cartridge will still be present in the virtual library In this case you can simply restore from the virtual cartridge using the backup application If the destination tape has been ejected from the destination library you must use one of the following options 1 If the automigration virtual cartridge still exists in the firesafe for example if the policy defined retention period
55. as eth2 in the error notification If the LAN switch associated with the USB LAN cable fails the Notifications tab will display all et h2 failures e If both paths fail the critical alert will identify bond o as the combined failed path If both paths from the private LAN to a secondary node fails the node is off line but if both paths to a primary node fails the whole device is off line Managing High Availability 123 When a failure occurs repair the failure In most cases the system will automatically recognize that the repair is complete and restore the path or paths without having to reboot the system however you may need to reboot the system if the repair includes installing a new USB LAN adapter Managing Disk Arrays Some VLS firmware versions allow you to manage the disk arrays The disk array management screens allow you to view the status and other details of a virtual disk delete unused virtual disks and clear the metadata on leftover disks To access the disk array management screens from Command View VLS 1 Select the System tab 2 In the navigation tree expand Chassis 3 In the navigation tree select Disk Arrays 4 In the task bar select Service The screen provides a caution about using the Disk Array Management service 5 Click Accept The screen opens to the Manage Virtual Disks screen and displays details about the virtual disk array including the disk array number and IP address virtual disk name
56. box displays to confirm the selection From the dialog box select OK The Library Assessment Test Results window displays To view the results of the assessment select Download Library Assessment Test Results Select Finish to return to the Destination Library Details window Place the library online see Placing a Library Offline or Online page 69 Running a SAN Destination Library Drive Assessment Test To run a drive assessment test l 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 Place the appropriate library offline see Placing a Library Offline or Online page 69 In the navigation tree select the drive to be tested From the task bar select Drive Assessment Test A dialog box displays warning that the test will erase all data on a cartridge if there is a cartridge on that drive Select OK The DRIVE ASSESSMENT TEST screen displays and asks for a mailslot containing a known good cartridge to use for the test Enter the appropriate mailslot Select Submit The Drive Test Results screen displays with a message indicating a successful test Select Download drive assessment results to view the command sent to the drive Select Finish 10 Place the library online see Placing a Library Offline or Online page 69 Replacing a Library When a library fails or when the library robotics card must be changed the replacement will have a different serial number from the original To assign it the same pools mapping etc as the
57. button and indicator LED 202 Component Identification Mode select button Press the button to step from one mode to the next The current mode setting is indicated by the Mode select LEDs near the button Mode select LED Link Indicates that the port LEDs are displaying link information If the port LED is on the port is enabled and receiving a link indication from the connected device If the port LED is off the port has no active network cable connected or is not receiving link beat or sufficient light Otherwise the port may have been disabled through the switch console the Web browser interface If the port LED is blinking 1 simultaneously with the Fault LED the corresponding port has failed its self test Act Indicates that the port LEDs are displaying network activity information FDx Indicates that the port LEDs are lit for ports that are in fullduplex mode Off indicates half duplex ltem Description Status Spd Indicates that the port LEDs are displaying the connection speed at which each port is operating If the port LED is off the port is operating at 10 Mb s If the port LED is flashing the port is operating at 100 Mb s and if the port LED is on continuously the port is operating at 1000 Mb s Usr Indicates the port is displaying customer specified information Auxiliary LED Blinking green Data transfer between the switch and a USB device is occurring Green The U
58. by its parent objects for example Node 0 Nodes and Chassis Figure 15 Navigation tree icon Expand Collapse Refresh E 9 Chassis vlsexamp xyz com B g Hodes 9 Hode 0 9 Fibre Channel Hard Disk 0 Hard Disk 1 Notification Alerts If a VLS hardware component or an environmental condition degrades or fails the VLS generates a notification alert Notification alerts are displayed on Command View VLS in the notification pane and on the Notification tab Click the View Details link to view the details of a notification alert Notification alerts are also e mailed to the addresses you specify and sent as SNMP traps to the management consoles you specify Figure 16 Notification alert examples Administrator O Command View VLS fo Notifications Tasks Notifications Setup Mail Server Setup Report Setup SNMP Setup GetSMI S Users s Delete Selected NOTIFICATIONS 01 12 11 14 57 43 Could not connect to SMTP host hp com Error message Connection timed out vistst05 gr hp com 04 10 11 08 31 42 Initialization for nodeO completed vistst05 gr hp com gt Initialization 01 10 11 08 31 36 Number of lom FW updates required 0 Mon Jan 10 08 28 57 2011 vistst05 ar hp com gt array config 01 10 11 08 31 27 amp Number of Controller FW updates required 0 Mon Jan 10 08 28 47 2011 vis
59. currently on the system The summary at the top indicates the number of LTUs on the system and how many are licensed Install additional licenses as needed After replacing drive O in a node the system will not boot A blank drive was installed in drive bay O If a blank drive is installed in drive bay O the system will not boot To remedy this switch the drive located in bay 0 with the drive located in bay 1 When oversubscription is enabled and you create enough cartridges in a storage pool to put your free storage capacity below the threshold the pool may reach critical status If you then disable oversubscription your storage pool will remain in critical status and will not return to good status even after reboot When you disable oversubscription the system does not monitor the storage pool s capacity even to check that it is no longer at a critical level The status will not change Automigration and Replication Issues Re enable oversubscription set the alert threshold so that the storage pool is within the capacity threshold then wait for the pool to return to good green status Disable oversubscription and the storage pool will maintain good status Although automigration is configured and managed through the Automigration Replication tab on Command View VLS errors and events are reported through the usual notification alerts See Notification Alerts IMPORTANT If a destin
60. data limit in GB Only applicable to a Background test T time limit HH MM Only applicable to a Background test Starting and Reviewing Read only Jobs To run a Background job from the Configuration tab 1 Make changes to the default configuration if necessary see Configuring the Storage Exerciser page 155 2 Select the Read Only Job tab This tab displays information for all previous and current Read only jobs The Storage Pool and Number of Concurrent Jobs fields contain the default information entered in the Configuration tab 156 Monitoring J If you want to choose which nodes will be tested follow the steps below Otherwise all available nodes are selected by default a Click the Select Nodes link b Select the nodes you want to test c Click Done If you want to choose by barcodes which cartridges to read follow the steps below Otherwise all cartridges are read by default a Select Read by BarCode b Enter a search pattern in the empty field A search pattern filters the barcodes to just those you want to the Storage Exerciser to read You can use the following characters to enter a regular expression e zero or more characters standard wildcard For example enter AB to include all cartridges whose barcode contains the string AB anywhere in the barcode or enter AB to include all cartridges whose barcode begins with AB e any single character For example
61. declaration O6nagHauna signosinae BUMOTaM TexHiYHOro pernameHTy LOFO COMEXxEHHA BUKOpPHCTOAHHA AEIKNX He6e3NeYHNX PEYOBUH B ENEKTPHYHOMY TA ENEKTPOHHOMY O6NAAHOHH 3ATBEPAKEHOTO NOCTAHOBOIO Ka6inety Minictpis Ykpainn Big 3 rpyaHa 2008 Ne 1057 Warranty information HP Proliant and X86 Servers and Options htto www hp com support ProLiantServers Warranties HP Enterprise Servers htto www hp com support EnterpriseServers Warranties HP Storage Products htto www hp com support Storage Warranties HP Networking Products htto www hp com support Networking Warranties Turkey RoHS material content declaration 255 Glossary A Accelerated deduplication appliance array automigration B backup application bandwidth C cartridge chassis CLI D data backup data compression data migration data restore data retention period data striping 256 Glossary This glossary defines terms used in this guide or related to this product and is not a comprehensive glossary of computer terms A method of deduplication that uses object level differencing technology See also deduplication An intelligent device programmed to perform a single well defined function Appliances differ from general purpose computers in that their software is normally customized for the function they perform pre loaded by a vendor and not alterable by the user A synonym of storage array storage system and virtual a
62. disconnect the cables Remove the node from the front of the chassis See Replacing a Primary Node page 222 for details Install the replacement VLS9200 node into the rack Reconnect the cables to the new node The VLS9200 master node does not need the USB dongle The Ethernet switch cables should now connect to NIC ports 3 and 4 Reconnect the power cords to the node Power up the node Insert the Quick Restore DVD into the drive and start the Quick Restore process When the Quick Restore is complete the node will automatically reboot Repeat Step 4 through Step 11 for all secondary nodes When the master node comes up after the reboot configure it as you would configure a new VLS installation See Configuring the Primary Node O page 44 for details The node will reboot after the configuration is set After the master node comes up after the reboot configure each secondary node as you would configure a new VLS installation See Configuring the Secondary Nodes page 44 for details Log into Command View VLS to ensure that all secondary nodes have come up It does not matter if they show a degraded state Install the hp_6 1 0_reboot_3053 patch to the system this will adjust the new backend Ethernet configuration on each node See the HP Virtual Library System hp_6 1 0_reboot_3053 Patch Release Notes for details After the automatic reboot from the patch log back into Command View VLS If any
63. disk array cables or powering off a disk array enclosure to prevent the appliance from erroneously detecting a disk array RAID volume failure 96 Operation NOTE Itis not necessary to power off a disk array enclosure when replacing a power module hard drive RAID controller or expansion controller To power off a VLS array 1 Power off the system See Powering Off the System page 96 2 Turn both power switches on the rear of each disk array enclosure off Some power supply models do not have a power switch in this case power down the enclosure by unplugging the power cord from the enclosure Always power off the base enclosure first Then power off the capacity enclosures starting with the capacity enclosure at the beginning of the SAS chain and working away from the base enclosure Powering Off VLS Arrays 97 8 User Interfaces This section describes the three user interfaces Uls that can be used to configure manage and monitor the VLS over the web remotely over the LAN or through a serial connection It also provides instructions on how to open and close a connection to the VLS for each type of user interface User Interface Requirements VLS user interfaces lists the VLS user interfaces and their requirements Of the three user interfaces Command View VLS should be used in most circumstances It is the most intuitive and easiest to Command View VLS 98 learn and use Multiple user interface
64. disk is no longer spinning remove the drive from the disk array To replace the component l 2 3 4 5 Pull out the latch handle on the drive as far as it can go Slide the replacement drive into the bay until it can go no further About 1 cm 0 5 inch of the drive protrudes from the bay Push the release lever all the way in This action installs the drive completely in the bay and seats it firmly against the connector in the disk array Firmly close the latch handle to lock the drive in the drive bay Observe the drive status LEDs to confirm that the replacement drive is functioning correctly See Front Panel LEDs Power Module A CAUTION Before removing a power module from the disk array enclosure ensure that a replacement power module is immediately available Removing a power module causes a significant change in the airflow within the disk array enclosure and the disk array enclosure could overheat if a replacement power module is not installed within two minutes NOTE When a power supply fails the fans of the power module continue to operate because they draw power from the power bus located on the midplane 1 2 3 If the defective power module has a power switch set it the Off position Disconnect the AC power cord from the defective power module Turn the thumbscrew at the top of the latch counterclockwise until the thumbscrew is disengaged from the power module Do not remove the t
65. each secondary node a In Command View VLS select the System tab b Select Nodes from the navigation tree c Select Add Node from the task bar in the main window This will bring up the Add Node Wizard d Verify that the node name in the Node Name field is the next available number that you configured previously For example the primary node previously configured as Node O is identified as Node O in the list of nodes on the navigation tree The first secondary node added should be Node 1 The next secondary node added should be Node 2 e Select Finish to add the node Select Chassis in the navigation tree Click Restore Config under Maintenance Tasks The Restore Config window opens Click Browse Locate and select the desired configuration file Click Open NOOK Recovering from Operating System Failure 231 Click Next Step A message displays indicating that the file was uploaded successtully 9 Click Next to start loading the configuration file After the configuration file is loaded the system automatically applies the configuration and reboots Manually Rebuilding the Virtual Library Configuration If you are unable to manually restore the system from the configuration file you must manually reconfigure the network settings and rebuild the virtual library configuration 1 Set the network settings so you can open a Command View VLS session See Setting the Network Settings 2 Rebuild the virtual library and v
66. eieaeeeeete 195 Front Panel LEDs and Buon Secoscutccesevsncssenfesavcheutsedestuveberereeanaednbacensstsayduonastaeeducsaaudivenalecds 196 Ethernet Switch 2510 24 Components LEDs and Butfons c cccccsceeseeeeeceeeeteeeeeeeeesstseeeeeeeees 197 Front Panel Components ig asian torct ecco cee vptreciencal ads iiA EE ETERS 197 Front Panel LEDs and Batten oassiiiaticctace nioueddaotie bade tacwonnce added etn niments ainddasiesncasmanuaanceetpentuanceeees 197 Ethernet Switch 2810 24G Components LEDs and BUttons cccccccceeseeeeeceeeeneeeeeeeeesseseeeeeeeees 199 Front Panel Conmpanetitsss 2 scucnntecdecaamsensuateriaatednenauenacesiudedatlethodshdzesateatenancuadecendaeaueangereeded 199 Front Panel LEDs and BURON S aiiininssiieiririnesni n aE E E RER 199 Ethernet Switch E6600 Components LEDs and Buttons cccccceeesesreeceeceeseteeeeeeeseeesteeeeeeeees 201 Front Panel COMPOSI eced ad pe aedintalesentine ccatrealencuieds Gea tuseledecertaenas ieedi sdtunttamediuetledeindoriwetia 201 Front Panel LEDs and Bui zsioiencccisecesansesperdesesieseoeseuedidects ateu adda tee bisehenesundpadekdcehaansemmeeieets 201 USB LAN Adapter Component sesceesctcierets seneutindashe adi veceweddeatenrcivedvaldldiavandeeremediaenieueieetelins 204 VLS9000 Disk Array Components LEDs and BUNONSs c conasececheseiouensusecselisasavewortdsueslereiauesrsdens 204 Front Panel Components teccceteseieaideetgued brerediarailicehccreeediusalcnecetestued ecote
67. empty or the link is down Some power supply models do not have a power switch In this case power down the enclosure by unplugging the power cords from the enclosure Expansion Disk Array Enclosure ltem Description Power switch 11738 Status Toggle where O is Off AC Power Good LED Green AC power is on and input voltage is normal Off AC power is off or input voltage is below the minimum threshold DC Fan Fault Service Required LED Unit locator LED Yellow DC output voltage is out of range or a fan is operating below the minimum required RPM Off DC output voltage is normal Blinking white Expansion controller is selected for identification purposes only Off Not active SAS port O input port status LED Green The port link is connected Off The port is empty or the link is down OK to remove LED Blue Not implemented Fault Service required LED Power On OK LED Yellow A fault has been detected or a service action is required Blinking yellow A hardware controlled power on or a cache flush or restore error occurred Green Expansion controller is operating normally Off Expansion controller is not OK SAS port 1 output port status LED 208 Component Identification Green The port link is connected Off The port is empty or the link is down Some power supply models do not have a power switch
68. emulation program such as Windows Hyperterminal Enter administrator or emergency for username Both logins gives you full privileges to all VLS functions available through the CLI command set Enter the administrator or emergency password The default administrator password is admin The emergency password is repair Closing a Serial Session To close a serial session click Logout at the top of the Console Manager window This logs you out of the Console Manager and displays the Logon window 102 User Interfaces VLS Critical Diagnostics Services VLS Critical Diagnostics Services is a mini HTTP service built into VLS to provide the status and details of the hardware console access and a support ticket service so you can check the VLS vitals before the main GUI is running You can also use it to examine the VLS if it hangs during a bootup and does not come all the way up However you cannot use it to diagnose master node hardware issues or network connectivity issues because this service relies on those to operate To access the Diagnostic Services 1 Go to https hostname 8008 2 Log in using the Command View VLS user name and password At the initial installation the login default is administrator user name and admin password You must change this password within Command View VLS you cannot change it in the diagnostic services 3 Wait until all of the hardware components are populated this can take up to 1
69. enter AB CD to include all cartridges whose barcode begins with AB ends with CD and has any single character between AB and CD c Click Find If you are not satisfied with the list of barcodes to read enter a new search pattern in the Barcode Regular Expression field at the top of the screen and click Re Query to try again Click Start The new job appears in the status table Click Cancel in the appropriate row to cancel a Read only job The status table displays Start Time the date and time the job began End Time the date and time the job ended Total Number of Cartridges the number of cartridges the job will read Cartridges Read the number of cartridges read so far Cartridge Read Errors the number of read operations that failed If the value in this column is red select it to view a detailed list of the failed operations Data Read the amount of data in bytes read so far Status the state of the jobs can be In Progress Cancelling Cancelled Complete or Complete with Errors The Complete with Errors status signifies that one or more read operations failed this may mean the job uncovered a disk error If a disk error has occurred the Log Monitor Summary page 158 on the Background Job tab displays a sum of errors and presents a link to view error detail and drive recommendations Complete the percentage of cartridges read so far Click Cancel in the approp
70. guidance NS fun ao O D W ma Ke ea 4 1 N q h 1 N q q q i i i q i 7 q 1 BO E CSS oE OC ES o ES OES o ES q O ES oE o ES o EI 11756 2 Slide the switch fully into the rack 3 Tighten the washer and nut on both sides of the rack to secure the switch rails to the mounting flanges From the back of the rack on each side of the switch insert an M5 screw through the holes in the rail and into the holes in the rack Tighten the M5 screws to secure the switch to the rack Attach a power cable to the switch s power supply Plug the power cable into an AC power source Route the power cable through the left side of the rack and plug it into a PDM Attach a 1U cover plate to the front of the rack gt OONN 11752 10 Install the second Ethernet switch in rack position 40 Installing the Ethernet Switches 6600 into a Rack 33 Cabling Ethernet Switches Table 4 Cabling Ethernet Switch 1 SW1 ltem Description Connects to 1 Port 1 NIC 3 of primary node via Ethernet cable 2 8 Ports 2 8 NIC 3 of secondary nodes if present via Ethernet cable 9 18 20 Ports 9 18 20 Ethernet port of RAID controller 2 of additional base array enclosures if present via Ethernet cable 19 Port 19 Ethernet port of RAID controller 2 of first base array enclosures via Ethernet cable 21 Port 21 Port 21 of Ethernet switch 2 SW2 in a
71. has not expired use Command View VLS to manually move the cartridge back into the virtual library You can then restore from the virtual cartridge using the backup application and then move the cartridge back to the firesafe If the automigration virtual cartridge has been deleted from the firesafe retrieve the physical cartridge by one of the following methods e Load the physical cartridge into any compatible physical drive or library that is visible to the backup application and restore from that tape using the backup application e Load the physical cartridge into the destination library and perform a Load Media for Restore which copies the entire destination tape back into a virtual cartridge You can then restore from the virtual cartridge using the backup application To perform Load Media for Restore aARWN gt c N 10 11 Select the Automigration Replication tab In the navigation tree expand Destination Libraries and then the library of interest Select Mailslot to display the list of mailslots on that library From the task bar select Load Media for Restore to open the Load Media for Restore screen From the drop down box select the copy pool you want to load the media into You can choose among the echo copy pools For all mailslots the destination slots are automatically populated with the first available slots To keep the automatic assignment skip to Step 10 To assign the destination slots manually
72. holes three on each front vertical post and two on each rear vertical post that will be used by the rail flanges Then from the inside of each vertical post insert a cage nut into each marked hole i e m o m o m o ml o ml noe ml I j i ppp BooED ssbb eADE TF 11749 2 From the front of the rack secure the mounting flanges to the marked holes using screws shipped with the rails 3 Attach a washer and nut to the posts at the end of each mounting flange Leave them loose and towards the open edge of the post Attaching Rails to the Ethernet Switch 6600 24G 1 Align the rail with the switch The two holes at the front of the rail must align with the two holes at the front of the switch The bracket end of the rail is towards the front of the switch 11193 2 Insert two of the pan head screws through the rail and into the switch at the front of the switch Tighten the screws 3 Insert two of the pan head screws through the appropriate holes in the rail and into the switch at the back of the switch Tighten the screws 4 Perform these steps again to install the other rail on the other side of the switch 32 Hardware Installation Mounting Ethernet Switch 6600 24G into the Rack 1 At rack position 39 from the back of the rack align the grooved ends of the switch rails with the posts on the mounting flanges Placing the grooved ends between the mounting flange and the loose washer and nut provides
73. iiom _ Doseription S 1 Latches 2 Thumbscrews Press both latches downward to disconnect the module from the midplane Pull outward on the latches to slide the controller out of the disk array enclosure Loosen the thumbscrews on the latches of the new controller and press the latches downward Position the controller with the latches toward the top and slide the controller into a slot as far as it will go ee A CAUTION When replacing a controller ensure that less than 10 seconds elapse between inserting the controller into a slot and fully latching it in place Failing to do so might cause the controller to fail If it is not latched within 10 seconds remove the controller from the slot and repeat the process 228 Component Replacement 11728 7 Press the latches upward until they are flush with the top edge of the controller then turn the thumbscrew on each latch clockwise until they are finger tight The controller begins initializing The Power On OK LED illuminates green when the controller completes initializing and is online 8 Connect the disconnected cables to the new controller in reverse order of Step 1 9 If you are replacing a RAID controller restore the failed path In Command View VLS access the System tab Select Storage LUNs from the navigation tree Select View to display the storage LUN details Select Fix Primary Paths from the task bar to display the Fix Primary Paths Wizard Select
74. illuminate on the front and rear panels of the node b Go to the back of the rack and locate the node by identifying the illuminated rear UID LED button c Unplug the node AC power cords from the power source The node is now without power From Command View VLS 1 Verify that any backup or restore operation has completed and that the VLS is idle 2 Under the System tab select Chassis in the navigation tree 3 Under Maintenance Tasks select System Maintenance 4 Select Shutdown All Nodes from the task bar Shutdown Head Wizard displays Click Yes to shut down all nodes 6 If removing the access panel from a node wait until the VLS has completed its shutdown operation then press the UID LED button on the front of the node Blue LEDs illuminate on the front and rear panels of the node Amber system power LEDs indicate that nodes are in standby mode 7 Press the Power On Standby button on any nodes that are not in standby mode 8 If removing the access panel from a node a Go to the back of the rack and locate the node by identifying the illuminated rear UID LED button b Unplug the node AC power cords from the power source The node is now without power NOTE Under problem conditions you can use iLO Standard non licensed to power off the system You can also use it to determine if the nodes are powered on or off Powering Off VLS Arrays A CAUTION Always power off the system before disconnecting
75. in the drive bay Figure 28 Preparing the Node Hard Drive 11466 11467 NOTE The replacement drive is automatically configured to RAID 1 no administrator action is required VLS Node Component Replacement 217 DVD CD Drive A CAUTION To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage do not operate the node unless all bays are populated with either a component or a blank 1 Power off the node NOTE The ejector button for the CD ROM drive is recessed to prevent accidental ejection it may be helpful to use a small flat blunt object such as a key or pen to push the ejector button 2 Press the ejector button in firmly until the DVD CD drive ejects 1 11468 3 Pull the DVD CD drive out of the node 2 To replace the component 1 Carefully align the connector on the rear of the drive with the connector on the DVD CD drive interface board 2 Slide the drive into the bay until it clicks 11469 Power Supply A CAUTION To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage do not operate the node unless all bays are populated with either a component or a blank 1 Disconnect the power cord from the power supply 218 Component Replacement 2 Press the power supply release lever 1 and then pull the power supply from the node To replace the component WARNING To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment do not connect the power cord to the power supp
76. indicate system status HP Systems Internal health LED System power Status Insight Display color LED LED and color Processor amber Red Amber One or more of the following conditions may exist e Processor in socket X has failed e Processor X is required yet not installed in the socket e Processor X is unsupported e ROM detects a failed processor during POST Amber Green Processor in socket X is in a pre failure condition DIMM amber Red Green One or more DIMMs have failed Amber Green DIMM in slot X is in a pre failure condition Overtemperature Amber Green The Health Driver has detected a cautionary temperature amber level Red Green The server has detected a hardware critical temperature level Interlock amber Red Green The PCI riser board assembly is not seated properly Fan amber Amber Green One fan is failed or removed Red Green Two or more fans have failed or are removed Power supply Red Amber e Only one power supply is installed and that power supply amber is in standby e Power supply fault e System board fault Amber Green e Redundant power supply is installed and only one power supply is functional e AC power cord is not plugged into redundant power supply e Redundant power supply fault e Power supply mismatch at POST or power supply mismatch through hotplug addition Power cap off Amber Standby Power cap Flashing green Waiting for power gre
77. initialization are in progress after the switch has been power cycled or reset The switch is not operational until this LED goes off Blinking green A component of the switch has failed its self test The status LED for that component and the switch Fault LED will blink simultaneously Off The switch is not undergoing self test 7 Mode select button Press the button to step from one mode to the next The current mode setting is indicated by the Mode select LEDs near the button 8 Mode select LEDs Link Indicates that the port LEDs are displaying link information If the port LED is on the port is enabled and receiving a link indication from the connected device If the port LED is off the port has no active network cable connected or is not receiving link beat or sufficient light Otherwise the port may have been disabled through the switch console the Web browser interface If the port LED is blinking 1 simultaneously with the Fault LED the corresponding port has failed its self test Act Indicates that the port LEDs are displaying network activity information FDx Indicates that the port LEDs are lit for ports that are in fullduplex mode Off indicates half duplex Spd Indicates that the port LEDs are displaying the connection speed at which each port is operating If the port LED is off the port is operating at 10 Mb s If the port LED is flashing2 the port is operating at 100 Mb s and if the port LED is on
78. injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching A WARNING tn Power supplies or systems marked with these symbols indicate the presence of multiple sources of power WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock remove all power cords to completely disconnect power from the power supplies and systems WARNING AA Any product or assembly marked with these symbols indicates that the component exceeds the recommended weight for one individual to handle safely WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the equipment observe local occupational health and safety requirements and guidelines for manually handling material Document Conventions and Symbols 237 Rack Stability Rack stability protects personnel and equipment A WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment Extend leveling jacks to the floor Ensure that the full weight of the rack rests on the leveling jacks Install stabilizing feet on the rack In multiple rack installations fasten racks together securely Extend only one rack component at a time Racks can become unstable if more than one component is extended Contacting HP Before you Contact HP Be sure to have the following information available before calling HP Technical support registration number if applicable Product serial numbers Product model names and numbers Applicable error messages Operat
79. its occasional status checks To change the default Fibre Channel host port settings from Command View VLS 1 Click the System tab 2 Expand Chassis in the navigation tree 3 Expand the Node to modify in the navigation tree 4 Select Fibre Channel in the navigation tree The Fibre Channel Host Ports window opens 5 Enter a value for the Loop ID in the Loop ID Preferred box for each Fibre Channel host port to use for prioritizing communication requests with the VLS If the Fibre Channel host port s topology is Fabric the Loop ID value is ignored 6 Select the Fibre Channel host port s topology in the Topology Preferred box for each Fibre Channel host port Auto Allows the VLS to determine the Fibre Channel port s topology Loop Sets the topology type to an arbitrated loop Fabric Sets the topology type to fabric 7 Select a link speed in the Link Speed Preferred box for each Fibre Channel host port Auto Allows the VLS to determine the Fibre Channel port s link speed 1 1 Gb per second 2 2 Gb per second 4 4Gb per second When you are finished configuring the Fibre Channel ports click Apply Settings 9 Restart the VLS device emulations to make the changes take effect See Restarting VLS Device Emulations page 131 a Managing Oversubscription Because the VLS dynamically allocates storage space as data is written to virtual media the VLS allows you to allocate more cartridge capacity than i
80. library slots are to be echoed into a specified virtual library Automigration then monitors the echo copy pool slots to detect cartridge loads ejects in the destination library and automatically synchronizes the virtual cartridges to the destination cartridges creating the matching virtual cartridges as needed This means that when new destination tapes are loaded automigration will automatically scan them read the backup application headers and then automatically create matching virtual cartridges in the virtual library specitied for that echo copy pool NOTE The automatic scanning of new cartridges can take a long time if all the tape drives in the destination library are busy with higher priority operations such as copies Therefore it is best to load new tapes when copies are not running Data written to echoed virtual cartridges will be automatically copied onto matching destination tapes based on the echo copy policy An echo copy policy defines for each source virtual library the copy window start and end times the copy on eject option and the time in days for expiration after eject If destination tapes are ejected the matching virtual tapes are automatically moved to the firesafe and are deleted at the policy defined expiration time This ensures the device does not fill up its disk space with older cartridges See Creating an Echo Copy Pool page 56 to create a policy If virtual tapes are ejected by a backup application t
81. locator LED Blinking white RAID controller is selected for identification purposes only Off Not active 7 OK to remove LED Blue The RAID controller can be removed Off The RAID controller is not prepared for removal 8 Fault Service required Yellow A fault has been detected or a service action is required ED Blinking yellow A hardware controlled power on or a cache flush or restore error occurred 9 Power On OK LED Green RAID controller is operating normally Off RAID controller is not OK 10 Cache status LED Green Cache is dirty contains unwritten data and operation is normal Blinking green 1 Hz A Compact Flash flush is in progress Blinking green 10 Hz A cache selfrefresh is in progress Valid data will remain until supercaps have drained approximately 15 minutes Off Cache is clean contains no unwritten data VLS9000 Disk Array Components LEDs and Buttons 207 Description Fibre Channel port activity LED Status Blinking green At least one FC port has I O activity Off The FC ports have no I O activity Ethernet link status LED Green The Ethernet link is up Off The Ethernet port is not connected or the link is down Ethernet activity LED Blinking green The Ethernet link has I O activity Off The Ethernet link has no I O activity 14 SAS port status LED Green The port link is connected Off The port is
82. number from the entitlement certificate Enter the VLS serial number You will receive a license key immediately onscreen and via email Copy the license key In Command View VLS select the System tab Select Chassis on the navigation tree Select Licensing from the task bar The Manage Upgrade Licenses screen displays all of the existing licenses Select Add License In the empty field that displays paste the license key Select OK The screen returns to the Manage Upgrade Licenses list and includes the newly installed licenses NOTE When installing deduplication or Secure Erasure licenses the VLS system will automatically reboot This may take a few minutes to begin when it does you will see a message on the Notifications tab Installing Additional Licenses 49 5 Automigration Replication Instead of the preferred method of copying virtual media to physical media via the backup application another option is to perform transparent tape migration via the VLS device using automigration Automigration describes the feature in which the Virtual Library System acts as a tape copy engine that transfers data from virtual cartridges on disk to a physical tape library connected to the VLS device The VLS automigration feature uses Echo copy which automatically synchronizes the physical cartridges to matching virtual cartridges with the same barcodes based on user defined policies and is totally transparent to the backup app
83. o J Oo No module cciss found for kernel 2 6 38 2 j aborting Failed to run mkdumprd Mounting other filesystems Generating SS R host key Generating 4 host key Generat ing S ISA host key Starting sshd WARNING initlog is deprecated and will be east Starting xinetd starting SMmoniter S99SMmeniter star Configuring VLS_6 1 15 on HP StorageWorks 9288 4Gb Virtual Library Sy Determining the status of the Management LAN Verify eth2 link Uerifu eth3 link Determining the status of backend storage por WAPN 21660624FF663906 Determining the status of backend storage port 1 LPN 21888624FF 683987 HP StorageWorks 4Gb Virtual Library System Please specify the node type for this multi node device Enter m for a master node or s for a slave node or if you would like to shutdown the system enter shutdown m s Shutdown 4 Record the backend Fibre Channel WWPN from the console and configure them for the automigration tape libraries The Fibre Channel host port WWPNs on the spare primary node will be set to the same as the original primary node when the VLS configuration is restored The Fibre Channel storage port WWPNs are not set to the same as the original primary node when the VLS configuration is restored so the Fibre Channel storage port WWPNs must be added to the EVA storage presentation and any configured automigration tape library storage presentations 5 Ente
84. on and power off the VLS nodes and arrays Powering On VLS Arrays The order in which you power up the disk array enclosures in an array is important Power on the base enclosure last in order to ensure that the disks in the capacity enclosures have enough time to spin completely before being scanned by the RAID controllers in the base enclosure A CAUTION Power on only one array enclosure at a time to avoid overloading the AC power source To power on an array 1 Turn both power switches on the rear of each array enclosure to On Some power supply models do not have a power switch in this case the power cords were unplugged from the enclosure to power it down Plug the cords back into the enclosure Start with the capacity enclosure farthest from the base enclosure and working toward the base enclosure Then power on the base enclosure If you just replaced a capacity enclosure check the enclosure ID displayed on the front of the enclosures Each array contains a base enclosure with an enclosure ID of 0 The capacity enclosure installed just below the base enclosure should have an enclosure ID of 1 The next capacity enclosure down in the rack should have an enclosure ID of 2 and the next should have an enclosure ID of 3 The numbering works the same way regardless of the number of enclosures in your system If the enclosure IDs displayed are not correct after replacing a capacity enclosure you must rescan the enclosures a
85. on the library using replication You can also unmanage the library at any time See Unmanaging a SAN or LAN WAN Library page 54 for instructions Re managing a LAN WAN Replication Library You must re manage a LAN WAN replication target if you change the password for security reasons To re manage a LAN WAN replication target Select the Automigration Replication tab Expand Destination Libraries in the navigation tree Select the library of interest to open the Destination Library Details screen From the task bar select Re manage LAN WAN Replication Target Enter the host name of the LAN WAN replication target only if the LAN WAN replication target s host name has changed Enter the LAN WAN replication target password 7 Select Submit The LAN WAN replication target is now re managed with the source using the new password aARWN gt o You can now create pools for the library and manage your data on the library using replication You can also unmanage the library at any time See Unmanaging a SAN or LAN WAN Library page 54 for instructions Unmanaging a SAN or LAN WAN Library Use one of the following two ways to unmanage a library Unmanage a library from the Destination Library Details window 1 From the navigation tree select the specific library to unmanage NOTE You can only select one library to unmanage at a time To unmanage additional libraries repeat the procedure for each library to unmanage
86. original NOTE While the virtual tapes are in the firesafe scheduled backups for those tapes will not occur 1 Make a note of all pool configuration information for pools associated with the library to be replaced 2 Delete all pools associated with the library see Deleting a Copy Pool NOTE Deleting the pools automatically moves all virtual cartridges from within the pool to the firesafe 3 Unmanage the physical library to be replaced see Managing and Unmanaging a Destination Library 4 Replace the library or robotics card 5 Manage the new physical library see Managing and Unmanaging a Destination Library 6 Manually recreate the storage pools associated with the new library using the information written down at the beginning of this procedure The virtual tapes that were moved into the firesafe will automatically return to their previous locations SAN Destination Library Operations 73 LAN WAN Destination Library Operations The following sections describe the destination library operations for LAN WAN libraries available to the user Several operations also apply to SAN destination libraries and are explained in SAN Destination Library Operations Monitoring Destination Library Status page 65 Placing a Library Offline or Online page 69 Forcing a Replication Job page 69 Exporting Data to Physical tapes for Tape Initialization NOTE Before beginning the export process verify that the
87. per FC host port Solution Increase the maximum number of LUNs per device the operating system is configured to see To change the maximum LUN per device setting For Microsoft Windows See hito support microsoft com default aspx scid kb 3ben us 3b310072 e For HP UX The value can only be changed for HP UX versions 11 31 and later Increase the number of LUNs per bus on the HP UX server by entering scsimgr set_attr a max_lunid 32 You can view the connected IO by entering ioscan m lun You cannot create legacy DSFs for LUN IDs above 7 use persistent device special files instead See the HP UX documentation for more information e For other operating systems See the operating system web site Use the VLS s LUN masking feature to restrict the number of virtual devices the host sees on the VLS FC host ports so it only sees the virtual devices it needs to see Then use the VLS s LUN mapping feature to assign LUNs to the Using iLO 24 Symptom The virtual tape drive devices either disappear or move to a different operating system path name TapeO on a Windows host node but the Windows Device Manager still shows these virtual tape drive devices as being enabled and at the original BusNumber TargetID LUN Location The VLS cartridge barcode numbers displayed on Veritas Netbackup do not match the actual VLS cartridge barcode numbers Possible causes Solution virtual d
88. present a LAN WAN replication target that is visible to the source VLS The source VLS performs normal backups during the regular backup window and during the availability window the source virtual cartridges automatically migrate to matching virtual cartridges on the destination VLS The same configuration is also used in the other direction so there is a backup library and a LAN WAN replication target library on both devices e Branch office to a main data center Divide a single destination target into multiple slot ranges to allow a many to one configuration without needing a separate replication library for each branch office In this way the VLS replication can scale to hundreds of branch offices all replicating to a single large device Understanding Automigration Concepts 51 Replication can be configured to operate in one of two modes e Deduplication enabled replication known simply as replication the virtual cartridge on the source VLS is deduplicated against the virtual cartridge on the target VLS In this manner only data that has changed is transmitted over the network to the target VLS This mode requires that deduplication is licensed and enabled on both the source and the target VLS e Whole cartridge replication the entire virtual cartridge is copied from the source VLS to the target VLS NOTE All of the information on automigration also applies to replication except where specifically dealing with physical tap
89. second connectivity kit if present via Ethernet cable 22 Port 22 Port 22 of Ethernet switch 1 SW1 in a second connectivity kit if present via Ethernet cable 23 Port 23 Ethernet port of FC switch 1 FC SW1 via Ethernet cable 24 Port 24 Port 24 of Ethernet switch 2 via Ethernet cable Table 5 Cabling Ethernet Switch 2 SW2 ltem Description Connects to 1 Port 1 NIC 4 of primary node via Ethernet cable 2 8 Ports 2 8 NIC 4 of secondary nodes if present via Ethernet cable 9 18 20 Ports 9 18 20 Ethernet port of RAID controller 1 of additional base array enclosures if present via Ethernet cable 19 Port 19 Ethernet port of RAID controller 1 of first base array enclosures via Ethernet cable 21 Port 21 Port 21 of Ethernet switch 1 SW1 in a second connectivity kit if present via Ethernet cable 22 Port 22 Port 22 of Ethernet switch 2 SW2 in a second connectivity kit if present via Ethernet cable 34 Hardware Installation Table 5 Cabling Ethernet Switch 2 SW2 continued ltem Description Connects to 23 Port 23 Ethernet port of FC switch 2 FC SW2 via Ethernet cable 24 Port 24 Port 24 of Ethernet switch 1 SW1 via Ethernet cable Table 6 Cabling Ethernet Switch 3 if present SW1 of a second kit ltem Description Connects to 17 20 Ports 17 20 Ethernet port of RAID Controller 2 of additional base array enclosures via Ethernet cable Table 7 Cabling Ethe
90. sessions may be open at once Table 13 VLS user interface requirements User interface Command View VLS Requirements PC or workstation network attached to the VLS node 0 running Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher or Netscape Navigator 4 7 or higher Configuration 10 100 1000 BaseT Ethernet port configured with an appropriate IP address host name domain name subnet mask and gateway Can login as Administrator or User For more information See Command View VLS page 98 Secure shell ssh Secure shell client such as PuTTY network attached to the VLS node O 10 100 1000 BaseT Ethernet port configured with an appropriate IP address subnet mask and gateway Can login as Administrator only See Secure Shell and Serial User Interfaces page 101 Serial Null modem cable attached to the VLS node O and terminal emulation program such as Windows Hyperterminal configured to 115200 baud Only one serial connection at a time is permissible Can login as Administrator or Emergency user See Secure Shell and Serial User Interfaces page 101 Command View VLS is a web browser based GUI that you can use to configure manage and monitor your VLS through a LAN Command View VLS provides the following e Configuration and management of VLS virtual devices libraries and tape drives and cartridges including LUN masking and LUN mapping e Changing o
91. siccdewnincninvenvedaecuncncainyaaved snawsertanaudenedsanteiantari dessa satmeneaeleadacnstnexs 170 Monitoring Co OUIIMC INS ite cca Scnrrececdiariacecetgaiwedbecudrdereidaiceslevsendaeetdeieeslernieretetua ncaa 171 13 Component Identificado sssrini secpnces seventies cede cieeeee ce ees 174 VLS9000 Node Components LEDs and BUtons ccccccsscceeeceeeeteeceeeeesseeseeeeecenseeeeeeeeseeeaaes 174 Front Panel Componenisivucciincuten ities nun E 174 Front Panel LEDs and Battarisia svensstncevesiae vpencavuce vavudeelndneneune ssevesd nenantunceies ddddnenenndavesier sindae 174 Rear Panel ComponeniS sessirnir n i E E EE E ia 175 Rear Panel LEDs and BUN ONS te ccsscaedueraessoacecventdwesaetcactacensde ode eetendeidacatdearcenidanetensdeademebtee cas 176 System Board COMPONGNIS tes caine dest daeernciru uit cce aciepatatiite penetrate ease aes 177 Accessing the HP Systems Insight DisalOy scsi ussasdacdssedonsnsiveeseeedoeseeumvommracieccseenusaaineuiectduets 178 HP Systems Insight Display and LEDS scss c2tescvnt cecocesecessuntecieaviesucsanendyereiasaunnessvnasaleaieeeeets 178 HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations ccceeseesreeeeeens 179 Hard Drive TEDS ceee E E G ramaneica anime aane 180 Hard Drive LED Coimiintnens jxiccsocsxcenicecacertereetaneneeaeiarnema ean 181 Fan Locations ax as et sasieaciscay ed ned vnyensyessiu sins a anaa E a aa E a 181 VLS9200 Node Components LEDs and BURGMMS wietciccaiesav
92. sme aeiwemianeneenens 123 Private LAN Dyal Pt iG since zesrsnsticureataysestemsiicaiaketic ens 2esiaeetahaeratSaGishadia etary E A a 123 Managing Disk PS Svc acetate fe csaancmtenecelag ciate aculledaesiedencenaslebaiemadendaetteandicadecnanp aie naneduadeebeateus 124 Viewing the Virtual Disk StS 25 se cosie cae caeeieon ca cveexdaesesten contentious eae reeeeuieeee ues 124 6 Contents Deleting Unused Virtual Disks cee vaicicecoresitacrseainibisicant Askelouscunanabeaadamateeaaects 125 Clearing the Leftover TS WS eos pdece dunce Srapasracbnudescedimareracetasenassyoaey tevtaucestdeysesyaacnaaatiardepnaatbene 125 Updating the Disk Witti Wor eentacnntets te schrancnctetliaiducdvecexseldrtecncietantiewaninacnieteuiecteese 125 Resetting the Disk Array IMO GU ON cisiesvesceseliassanceornderedleeedauienndecedvesdvasconsseceetleawvaneusadees 126 Setting the RAID Wee ose te cess cccaseckc dh tate hecadevcuntsi nen daca legen torhecctusaiecersteneurducedpieabheiadets 126 Setting the Disk BECOMING sox corm ccasscttesnrncnrsachsciederavansstcestueesuanguve tdeuasboivenvsaskasedsseaussuenddecks 127 Managing ANA oct se eens ai oair E EE R EEE EER EET EAE 127 Accessing the Cartridge Parameters Window ccccseecceeeceeenneeceeeeeesseneeeeeeceseneeseeeessenaes 127 Changing Cartridge OAC IEY cso nate ntinsdaice iad szeize intnsersicatnaesed w antenna goes ofesncwuncnbd gadealoesemmncedees 128 Changing Cartridge Read and Write Acces6 ce cicanestoncics caesieca
93. status e Compression yes or no The performance graph maps the MB per second against the time it took the jobs to complete To change the jobs included in the job history report select a View previously created on the Configuration screen If you haven t set up any views 1 Select a location category The options are SAN LAN WAN All locations and predefined Views 2 Select the specific locations of interest from the Available Locations box You can select multiple devices by using Ctrl click 3 Using the gt gt button or by double clicking move the locations of interest into the Selected Locations box These are the locations that will display in the report You can use lt lt button to remove locations from the Selected Locations box 4 Enter the number of days the report should include NOTE Changing the number of days here does not affect the default number set on the Configuration screen 5 Select a new location type the default is Both You can change the report to include only the jobs where the selected devices acted as e Target the selected device receives the data e Source the selected device sends the data 6 Select Update The job history table and performance graph update to include jobs based on the new criteria Exporting the Job History to a CSV File The CSV export file is a text file delivered as a zip Each line is the record for one device and the data fields are separated b
94. that is not deduplicated will free up more storage space than erasing from cartridges with deduplicated data e Reclaim space see Reclaiming Storage Space page 111 e Add more storage NOTE You cannot hot add storage while the VLS is deduplicating data T10 Configuration Reclaiming Storage Space The Reclaim Space task appears on the Chassis status screen when the storage capacity consumed reaches the user defined threshold or the default of 90 This allows you to schedule reclamation of the additional storage you make available by erasing cartridges First erase cartridges from your backup application then follow the procedure below From Command View VLS 1 On the System tab select Chassis from the navigation screen to open the Chassis status screen 2 Select Reclaim Space in the task bar The VLS system initiates space reclamation and the Notifications screen displays a notification of the scheduled reclamation Managing Virtual Device LUNs The VLS has a LUN masking a LUN mapping and a port mapping feature that allows you to restrict host access to the LUNs virtual libraries and tape drives configured on the VLS and assign each virtual device to a specific Fibre Channel host port These features allow you to allocate the virtual devices to individual hosts and distribute the virtual tape drives across the Fibre Channel host ports to achieve maximum bandwidth See Managing high availability page
95. the chassis you want to monitor in the Chassis box c Select the type of notification alerts to send in the Alerts box e All Sends all notifications e Errors Sends only errors e Warnings Sends only warnings e None Sends no notifications d Select a notification alert format in the Format box e Short Sends short mail messages e Long Sends detailed mail messages e Long Attachment Sends detailed mail messages and relevant log files e Configuration Saves the VLS configuration and emails it at midnight after any configuration change e Click Add f To add another email address repeat these steps 5 To delete an email address click the Remove button for the email address Notification Alerts 137 6 To test an email address entry click Test Email SNMP Not If the test message is not received at the email address check the email server settings ification To receive VLS notification alerts on a management consoles you must edit the SNMP settings to specify the management consoles you want to receive VLS SNMP traps Editing the SNMP Settings NOTE To display VLS notification alerts on a management console the management console must VLS be running HP Systems Insight Manager and be configured to receive SNMP traps from the To add a management consoles to the SNMP alert distribution list from Command View VLS 1 Click the Notifications tab The Notifications window displays
96. the echo copy pool does not move the source cartridge e Moving a target cartridge from its existing library to a different library or to a new slot in the same library within a new echo copy pool results in the source cartridge disappearing from the echo copy pool but not moving from its existing library To move cartridges from Command View VLS 1 Click the System tab 2 Select Cartridges in the navigation tree The cartridges details window opens 3 Select the number of cartridges to display from the menu beside the category of cartridges you wish to move The options are 10 50 100 default 500 or 1024 cartridges 4 Click View beside the category The cartridges parameters window opens 5 Select the Select box next to each cartridge that you want to delete or use Select All to delete all the cartridges listed 6 Select the destination from the Move Selected To menu 7 Click Go to the right of the Move Selected To menu NOTE If you have moved a large number of cartridges allow approximately 20 30 minutes for the VLS system to fully free up the resources from the move before making changes based on the move Deleting Cartridges You can delete one or more cartridges at a time from the VLS The delete cartridge operation removes the specified cartridges from the VLS freeing the storage space previously consumed by those cartridges for new data For more security you can use the licensed Secure Erasure feature
97. the message The destination library was successfully placed offline In addition the Offline option in the task bar is replaced with Online NOTE When placing the library offline from the Automigration Replication tab the library is not truly offline Instead it is offline for automigration or replication jobs only Place the library online to resume scheduled automigration or replication l 2 From the navigation tree under Destination Libraries select the library to place online From the task bar select Online A dialog box opens to confirm the selection and warn that placing the library online will allow jobs to resume Select OK from the dialog box The Destination Library Details screen refreshes and displays the message The destination library was successfully placed online In addition the Online option in the task bar is replaced with Offline Moving Media from One Slot to Another From Command View VLS 2 3 4 Select the Automigration Replication tab In the navigation tree expand Destination Libraries and then the library of interest Select Slots to display the list of slots on that library From the task bar select Move Media The screen displays a list of slots and the copy pools to which they currently belong SAN Destination Library Operations 69 N Hover over the Select Slot link for the first slot you want to edit The screen displays a list of the available destinat
98. the policy when the echo copy pool is created A successful mirror is a cartridge that transitions from the Backup Postprocessing state to the Up to Date state with several intermediate states A notification is sent once a day that identifies the number of cartridges that have not successfully mirrored within the threshold time Automigration Replication Reporting 79 Cartridges in this category can also be listed in the following categories Mirror Failed Pending Mirror Active In Use Deduplicating and Waiting for Policy Window This category displays a green no cartridges in this category or red one or more cartridges in this category icon e Mirror failed Corrective action needed contains cartridges for which the copy to the mirror has failed This category displays a green no cartridges in this category or red one or more cartridges in this category icon e Not migrated in Deduplication timeout limit Forced Copies contains cartridges that have not successfully migrated in the deduplication timeout limit and cartridges currently being forced into a whole cartridge non deduplicated copy e In Use Deduplicating contains cartridges that are currently being used by the system e Pending contains cartridges that are ready for copy but have not started for example because the system does not have enough resources available or because they are waiting for the dependent cartridges to replicate
99. the type of cartridge emulated ON XA If there are multiple storage pools on your system you must select the pool in which to create cartridges from the gt Available capacity list The system calculates and displays the amount of required storage If the required storage exceeds what is available the overage appears in red You can allow the oversubscription of storage capacity see Enabling and Disabling Oversubscription page 110 or you can change either the number of cartridges or the cartridge size or both to correct the overage condition Figure 13 Create Virtual Library Wizard window 10 of 12 Administrator i O Command View VLS Identity Notifications Automigration Replication Help fo Create Virtual Library Wizard Step 10 of 12 CARTRIDGE PARAMETERS 9 Click Next Step A summary window opens and displays details about the cartridges you created 10 Click Next 11 Click Return The System tab window opens You can now select the new library tape drives and cartridges in the navigation tree to view their configuration information such as their default LUN numbers Destroying a Virtual Library NOTE Destroying a virtual library may create a gap in the default LUN numbering on the Fibre Channel host port to which it was mapped If a gap is created restart the VLS device emulations to remove the gap See Restarting VLS Device Emulations page 131 Most operating systems wi
100. to 5 SAS cable connected to SAS port O of RAID controller SAS port O input port of capacity controller 1 of 1 of base enclosure capacity enclosure O 6 SAS cable connected to SAS port O of RAID controller SAS port O input port of capacity controller 2 of 2 of base enclosure capacity enclosure O 7 SAS cable connected to SAS port 1 output port of SAS port O input port of capacity controller 1 of capacity controller 1 of capacity enclosure O capacity enclosure 1 if available 8 SAS cable connected to SAS port 1 output port of SAS port O input port of capacity controller 2 of capacity controller 2 of capacity enclosure O capacity enclosure 1 if available 9 SAS cable connected to SAS port 1 output port of SAS port O input port of capacity controller 1 of capacity controller 1 of capacity enclosure 1 capacity enclosure 2 if available 10 SAS cable connected to SAS port 1 output port of SAS port O input port of capacity controller 2 of capacity controller 2 of capacity enclosure 1 capacity enclosure 2 if available NOTE The base enclosure is on the top of the stack of capacity enclosures From the top to the bottom they are base enclosure capacity enclosure O capacity enclosure 1 capacity enclosure 2 One base enclosure and three capacity enclosures make up an array RwWN gt Locate the SAS cables included in the capacity enclosure kit contents Remove the tape and end caps from the SAS
101. to continue The screen displays a success message Creating Tape Drives NOTE If you add a virtual tape drive to a library after another library has been created the default LUN number assigned to the tape drive will not be consecutive with the other virtual tape drives in the same library To correct this restart the VLS device emulations See Restarting VLS Device Emulations page 131 The VLS firmware will change the virtual device LUN numbers on the VLS so that all the default tape drive LUNs in a library are consecutive NOTE A virtual library may only contain one type of tape drive To add tape drives to a virtual library l If you are already in the Create Library Wizard window click Create Tape Drives The Tape Drive Parameters window opens If not a Click the System tab b Select the library in the navigation tree to which you want to add tape drives c Click Create Tape Drive in the task bar The Tape Drive Parameters window opens Select the type of physical tape drive to emulate Enter the Fibre Channel host port and node on which to present the tape drives in the Port Mapping box Only one port or port pair may be selected Click Next Step The next Tape Drive Parameters window opens Enter the number of tape drives you want to create in the library at this time in the Tape Drives box if different from the default value You can add more tape drives to the library later The Ta
102. under Maintenance Tasks The Support Ticket screen opens The screen displays the date and size of the last ticket you ran Click New Ticket Select one of the following options to determine the modules included in the support ticket e Basic includes Automigration Replicaton Configuration Monitoring VLS Command View and System e Full includes all modules in the basic ticket plus Array and Core Files e Custom includes only the modules you select Clicking Select All runs a full ticket Click Create Ticket The screen displays the progress of the support ticket for each module and each node The more complex your VLS system the longer the support ticket takes to generate You can leave the support ticket screen and return later to check on the progress The support ticket is complete when the Download button appears Trace Log Files 161 7 Right click Download 8 Select Save Target As The name of a zip file is displayed in the File name box Do not change the generated file name 9 Click Save 10 Click Close V1 Click Finish NOTE Some versions of Internet Explorer will not download support tickets with a file size greater than 2 GB VLS systems that are large or have been running a long time may generate larger support tickets If you try to create a support ticket in Internet Explorer and it displays a blank page use another browser such as Firefox Firefox will download larger support tickets but ma
103. you wish to edit Options are 10 50 100 default 500 or 1024 cartridges Click the View button beside the group of cartridges you want to edit If viewing by barcode enter a cartridge range to view a specific cartridges or leave the default values to view all the cartridges with the barcode The Cartridges Parameters window opens This displays information about the cartridge such as the barcodes on it the type of cartridge the total capacity and the read write access Changing Cartridge Capacity To change a cartridge s total capacity from Command View VLS l 2 3 NOOR Click the System tab Select Cartridges in the navigation tree The Cartridge Details screen opens Select the number of cartridges to display from the menu beside the category of cartridges you wish to move The options are 10 50 100 default 500 or 1024 cartridges Click View beside the category The cartridges parameters window opens Choose the cartridges that you want to edit by using the Select boxes Enter a new value in GB in the Total box Click Update in the cartridge row Changing Cartridge Read and Write Access To change a cartridges read and write access from Command View VLS l 2 3 4 5 6 7 Click the System tab Select Cartridges in the navigation tree The Cartridge Details screen opens Select the number of cartridges to display from the menu beside the category of cartridges you wish to move The optio
104. 1 optional h Displays command usage information optional VLS Commands This section describes the VLS commands in the VLS CLI command set Network Settings Configuration Commands Use the CLI commands in CLI network settings configuration commands to configure the VLS network settings via a serial session See Opening a Serial Session page 102 Table 26 CLI Network Settings Configuration Commands Command Description showConfig Lists host name DNS domain name DNS address and various other addresses This command shows both the current internal values as well as the original values It also lists the current and new content of all files atfected by the changes uu setConfigValue Sets the value of the corresponding configuration parameter To reset a value enter lt tag gt value quoted space as the value More than one tag and value can be set at a time Where lt tag gt can be host Host name such as visexamp unqualified domain DNS domain name such as xyz com fullhost Fully qualified name such as visexamp xyz com ntpPrimary First NTP Server Address ntpSecondary Second NTP Server Address dnsaddr DNS server address replaces all addresses with one line dnsaddr1i First DNS server address cannot use with dnsaddr dnsaddr2 Second DNS server address cannot use with dnsaddr dhcp Has no value indicates you want to configure the public Ethernet connec
105. 13 array 14 etc Use the switch 3 ports in this order 9 19 8 18 b Connect a Fibre Channel cable from Fibre Channel switch 4 to port O of each additional RAID controller 2 array 13 array 14 etc Use the switch 4 ports in this order 9 19 8 18 Secure together the Fibre Channel cables installed in this procedure and the Ethernet cables installed previously with Velcro ties Route them to the right side of the rack Installing the VLS9000 Interswitch Link Kit The following sections describe the procedures for configuring the Ethernet switches and installing the interswitch link kit Recontiguring Ethernet Switches 40 Before cabling the interswitch kit establish a CLI session with each Ethernet switch to ensure that Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP is enabled l 2 Ow Or e 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Locate a null modem serial cable provided with the VLS Connect one end of the serial cable to a PC or workstation and the other to the serial port on the rear of an Ethernet switch in rack 1 Establish a CLI session using a terminal emulation program such as Windows Hyperterminal At the prompt select a baud rate between 9600 and 115200 with 8 data bits and no parity Press Enter twice to reach the command line which reads HP ProCurve Switch 6600 24G Enter show spanning tree The screen displays the status of the spanning tree protocol and the options set This optional step serv
106. 4 On the rack vertical posts mark the holes that will be used by the rail flanges three on each front vertical post and two on each rear vertical post the switch will be installed at rack position 41 Then from the inside of each vertical post insert a cage nut into each marked hole Installing the Fibre Channel Switches into a Rack 37 38 o m o ma o GS Oo ES Oo ESO ll ue ppp popDeDs shop opeDEt 11749 From the front of the rack secure the adjustable mounting flanges to the marked holes using screws shipped with the rails From the rear of the rack slide the racking shelf assembly with Fibre Channel switch into the rack sliding the rail ends onto the adjustable mounting flanges already installed in the front rack vertical posts When the rail flanges are flush with the rack vertical posts secure them to the rack o I o I o I 9 o o I o J o o I o o m 11756 Attach two 1U cover plates to the front of the rack Attach one 1U cover plate in front of each Fibre Channel switch Plug the AC power cords into an AC power source Route one cord to a PDM mounted on the right vertical post and the other to a PDM on the left vertical post 10 Repeat this procedure to install the second Fibre Channel switch in rack position 42 Hardware Installation Cabling Fibre Channel Switches sg HP StorageMhorks SWEDCO Fite Channel Sode
107. 5 regulatory information 255 Turkey RoHS material content declaration 255 Ukraine RoHS material content declaration 255 remote support 239 removing slot mapping LAN WAN 63 SAN 62 replication 51 see also automigration concepts 51 configuring job reports 82 installing license 48 job history 82 exporting to CSV file 83 266 Index job status 81 job summary 83 outside the policy window systems with deduplication 75 systems without deduplication 69 reporting 79 restarting services 71 tape initialization 52 whole cartridge 52 replication target viewing slots 77 reports automated 154 configuring 147 current status 147 performance history 148 SAN health 148 CSV data 147 current status 148 logical capacity 151 performance 147 performance history 149 physical capacity 152 153 SAN health 150 storage use 147 Restart Automigration Replication Services 71 Restart Broken Mirror 61 Restart Emulations in Maintenance Mode 47 Restore Media 60 restoring data from a LAN WAN cartridge 60 from a SAN cartridge 59 restoring the system manually 23 warm failover 230 Retention days 56 Run Pool Policy 48 running a workload assessment 152 S SAN cartridge restoring from 59 SAN destination library deploying firmware 72 generating drive support ticket 72 generating library support ticket 72 operations 65 running drive assessment test 73 running library assessment test 72 scanning 71 u
108. 5 seconds File Edit view History Bookmarks Tools Help e Cc xa A hittps vls323n0 usa hp com 8008 main html LAJ Most Visited vad adm learn ej ref L webdev L HobbyProj _ patch bits L build L hp team L rssinews L tools L temp B Home Auction 4 Index of work jquer HP Command View LS Critical Diagn administrator Chassis lt I Tasks Shutdown Reboot Restart Command View YLS SupportTicket Start Web Console E gt Hodes gt Hode 0 S hodei Device Details E Arrays 1 DiskArray 1 rial 1CC1DE228828 E G DiskArray 2 wa y Serial NIA Controller A Controller B mp Enclosure Chassis Status w Enclosure 2 33 RAID Sets ca system time Thu Jan 27 10 20 51 MST 2011 Doni ale 4 In the screen shot above the Diagnostic Services screen is fully loaded This system has two nodes and two arrays Note that there is a problem with array 1 To view information about any hardware component select it from the navigation tree the screen displays the status and details about that item Diagnostic Services tasks are available on the task bar e Shutdown shuts down the VLS system as it would from Command View VLS or VLS CLI e Reboot reboots the VLS system as it would from Command View VLS or VLS CLI e Restart Command View VLS restarts Command View VLS e Support Ticket The support ticket task allows you to generat
109. 6 Creating a LAN WAN Replication Target ccccccccscecceeeeeesteeeeeeecesneseeeeeeecesseeeeesesenseaeees 76 Viewing the Replication Target Slot Details icciiscncsccccayignadivetiveesdancnsctdvetivevaiecctdciwals teactsexteaiee 77 Setting the Global LAN WAN Replication Target Configuration cccsesseeeeeeeteeeeseteeeeeeeaees 78 Editing a LAN WAN Replication TONG ET siecicnicnniauadetsinctiavancuncisnedaacevananvaveactalaineenaeemeane Ren 78 Deleting a LAN WAN Replication Target cccsccecceeceseeneeeeeeceseeeeeeeeseeneaeeeeeeseneeseeeeeees 78 Changing the LAN WAN Replication Target Password cccccceeeesseceeeeeeesesseeeeeeeeesteaaeees 7 Clearing the Source VLS from the LAN WAN Replication Target cccccceseeeesseeeeeeeeetteeees 79 Automigration Replication RSG eicctetndecedstene decnntenaiscitc de eaibbensre lesa aden enedaedietearauend ees 79 Status Of dll Cariridg S issossssisiciisisneisiii iiien i ania esii aniei 79 Summary of Cartridges by SINUS icc csdpateretencdewncexcdiduetececieicessdiasetoredeniebasdiceetasctndeeakatade 80 Cartridge NS ce cehrc tarsal etcun ete opetatescetecreiecsoaueteee de aeae E EEEE E EES EEE EEEE 81 Configuring the Cartridge SOUS cc cxapceapatecadeenrntaunied ecelursubheceiedlucaliuerniprendalecaieencntauniedees 81 Viewing the Current Status of 16s xivo2sctsacisavetadatcaceantiarea orienta awiseat Aeeambineds 81 Configuring Automigration Job Reports cccccssscccssseceees
110. A0000 45 00 GB 77 95 GB 45 00 GB ATA DA0001 77 95 GB 45 00 GB 1741 DA0002 45 00 GB 77 95 GB 45 00 GB 174 DA0003 45 00 GB 77 95 GB 45 00 GB 4 71 v The Library Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 18 Library Capacity Table Total storage capacity allocated to the Library This is the product of the number and size of the cartridges in the Allocated Capacity Library This value might be oversubscribed Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage used for data whether or not it is deduplicated Available Capacity The physical storage currently available for additional backup data This is the total Allocated Capacity less the Used Capacity Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity If there are cartridges in this library a table listing the cartridge capacity information is displayed You may need to scroll down to view additional capacity information The Cartridges Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 19 Cartridges Capacity Table The barcode of the cartridges in the library The barcode name is a link to display the capacity information about Barcode the cartridge Allocated Capacity Total storage capacity allocated to the Cartridge Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application
111. Act Port LEDs Link and Mode arrows pointing to appropriate port Link e Green The port is enabled and receiving a link indication from the connected device e Off The port has no active network cable connected or is not receiving link beat or sufficient light Otherwise the port may have been disabled through the switch console the web browser interface or ProCurve Manager e Blinking orange simultaneously with the Fault LED The corresponding port has failed its self test Mode The operation of the Mode LED is controlled by the LED Mode select button and the current setting is indicated by the LED Mode indicator LEDs near the button Press the button to step from one view mode to the next The default view is Activity Act Clear button When pressed by itself for at least one second the button deletes any switch console access passwords that you may have configured Use this feature if you have misplaced the password and need console access This button can be disabled by a CLI command When pressed with the Reset button in a specific pattern any configuration changes you may have made through the switch console the Web browser interface and SNMP management are removed and the factory default configuration is restored to the switch Ethernet Switch E6600 Components LEDs and Buttons 203 ltem Description Status 9 Reset button Used to reset the switch while it is turned on
112. Activity green On or blinking 3 Right ear Fault Service Required Off 4 Power On OK On NOTE The hard drive LEDs may not immediately illuminate when the enclosure is powered on The LEDs illuminate after the hard drives are configured by the VLS firmware Figure 3 VLS9000 Base Enclosure Rear Panel LED Status Normal Operation 11769 Item Location LED LED state 1 Power module AC Power Good green On 2 DC Fan Fault Service Required yellow Off 3 RAID controller FC link status L green On 4 FC link speed S green On 5 Fault Service required yellow Off 6 Power On OK green On 7 Ethernet link status green On 8 Expansion port status green On Operation Figure 4 VLS9200 Base Enclosure Rear Panel LED Status Normal Operation Item Location LED LED state 1 Power module Voltage Fan Fault Service Required amber Off Input Source Power Good green On 3 RAID controller Host 2 4 Gb FC Link Status Link Activity On if link speed is 2 or 4 Gbps green 4 Host 8 Gb FC Link Status Link Activity green On if link speed is 8 Gbps 5 Network Port Activity green On 6 Network Port Link Status green On 7 OK to Remove blue Off 8 Unit Locator white Off 9 FRU OK green On 10 Fault Service Required amber Off 1 Cache Status green On if cache contains unwritten data Off if cache does
113. Add The slot range you just added moves to the Current Slots section of the screen Repeat this step for as many slot maps as you need Select Submit The copy pool details screen refreshes and the message The slot map was successfully added to copy pool name displays To change the slot mapping on a copy pool that already has slots mapped ARNS On the System tab check the capacity of the copy pool to ensure there is room for copies Follow steps 1 through 5 in the To remove the slot mapping of any copy pool section above On the Edit Slot Maps screen select Edit corresponding to the slot map to change Enter the new start and or end slots into the appropriate fields Select Submit If the change is successful the copy pool details window displays including the message The slot map was successfully changed Editing the SAN or LAN WAN Policy 2 3 4 5 Select Copy Pools in the appropriate library from the navigation tree Select the appropriate copy pool to open the Echo Copy Details screen In the task bar select Edit Policy Make the appropriate changes For explanations of the options see Creating an Echo Copy Pool page 56 Select Submit The Echo Copy Details screen displays the new policy information Editing the SAN or LAN WAN Availability Windows 1 eS o Select Copy Pools in the appropriate library from the navigation tree Select the appropriate copy pool to open
114. Apply to set all paths back to their primary paths anga NOTE Upgrade of the firmware for the RAID controller s components is automatically provided by the operational controller and will occur within the first 10 minutes of power on Upgrade of the firmware on the expansion controller is not automatic schedule a VLS restart if an upgrade is needed To check the current expansion controller firmware use Command View VLS to review the enclosure information on the System tab For the enclosure repaired compare the firmware version on Disk Adapter O and Disk Adapter 1 and confirm they are the same If the replacement controller has a lower firmware version HP recommends a VLS reboot at the earliest opportunity Earlier versions of the expansion controller firmware are supported by the current RAID controller firmware VLS9200 Disk Array Component Replacement 229 15 Disaster Recovery This section details the VLS disaster recovery procedures It includes recovering from operating system failures disk array failures and node failures Recovering from Operating System Failure Re install the operating system if it becomes corrupted or is lost as a result of node RAID volume failure A CAUTION Only install the VLS operating system on the node hard drives Installing any other operating system on the node hard drives voids the warranty NOTE The VLS operating system contains all the hardware device drivers firmware and uti
115. Current Status report which displays information on all pending and active automigration jobs The report includes Barcode Action pause resume or cancel job see page 76 Job type Mirror Preprocessing or Mirror Start time complete Time of the last update Source and target locations Automigration Replication Reporting 81 e The node the job is running on e Status active or pending e Expected completion time e The drive the job is running on Change the number of rows displaying on the screen using the Page Size menu You can also use the Filter by View menu to display a specific predefined set of information see Configuring Automigration Job Reports page 82 to create the views After making a choice from one or both of these menus click Refresh Configuring Automigration Job Reports The Configuration screen allows you to assign default settings for reports 1 Select the Automigration Replication tab 2 In the navigation tree expand Configuration Summary 3 Select Job Reporting Configuration from the expanded list You can customize the following defaults e Refresh time for the display 1 to 15 minutes e Duration of the job status graphs to display 1 to 90 days e Reporting data retention period 1 to 90 days e Duration of the CSV format export file 1 to 90 days e Name for the CSV format export file You can also create a pre defined custom view based on the locations you cho
116. E Storage Exerciser jobs will slow down other VLS operations Do not start a job when the performance of other VLS operations is critical Configuring the Storage Exerciser In the Configuration tab you can assign default settings for reports To customize the Storage Exerciser from Command View VLS l 2 3 Select the System tab From the navigation tree select Chassis From the task bar select Storage Exerciser A caution screen indicates that running a job will affect your system s overall performance Click Accept The Storage Exerciser opens to the Configuration tab Choose an option or enter the information into the fields e Storage Pool the storage pool targeted in tests All or one specific storage pool e Compressibility Ratio the compressibility ratio for data written during a Background job For instance if 2 1 is selected the data created will be compressible at 2 1 and decompressed when read back This exercises the disks more thoroughly than without compression A compressibility ratio of at least 2 1 is recommended Stress Testing Hard Disks using the Storage Exerciser 155 Storage e Number of Concurrent Jobs the number of read or write operations called streams running at the same time The larger the number the more the storage system is stressed you can run up to six at once NOTE A Background job can only involve one stream unless multiple storage pools are present e
117. E a is cee gee E A E AA E A asec 12 VS FOO Comp nenS ssc eienn onera ae E a a ea eia AEA NEE 12 2 Haraware Installation i4 224542ececevadauasasasuiseneeeneneanenptonesensennnepesannpeeeceraieenease 14 Minimum Hardware REQUIRSieilSie 3 lt dcecorisaiteiciendencesteuned nae bearer abe anientenene 14 Preparing for the Instebhatioii c vwcssxiaceecenesesnenansacneecadas anenentxeavdadied v nentnad gaudei phwextnanezanedadvenduendatecnddes 14 Tools for Installation seissen nne ai aaea E rR E E aE AO 14 Taking ESD Precautions cn asncmncceccdtoaysneasictep ane sesacnambonenacdsacatencesetdudeageasandeadedaceinsanganendnecss 14 Grounding Methods to Prevent Electrostatic Discharge ccccccccceeeeeseeeeeeecesseeeeeeesesseaaeees 14 Unpackitgissresonis tate me fee aera ste Neier teeny eae mer nel n EE EAEE Nn men Recon nr nes Tee eter 15 Removing the Packing Mana Gl S x tra veceleuncessiedcoleceddnustorntearesalacoreteveneaiivalacecesaenca nutiesenecaeeds 15 Rack Planning Resources sensnsssseenenseeseeeeesesrsertesssssrreesssessrttssesssettttssssetitresssrrenerssseereeessst 15 Rack Sg Seeerei n Er E EA E E VEE EEEE RTA 16 Rack Waihi Siseseinte ee EE i E EE EE EEE T EO EE DES ENEE 16 Identifying the VLS Shipping Carton Contents lt cci lt cetevedeterncedzes lavernecieiedincalnveceiseiualeieeeieieroncedens 16 VLS9200 Base Enclosure Shipping COONS ers setrecvenseeoninsuceteneeraeriosktectandexneeesaurdeseeauiemrestanetie 16 VLS9200 Capacity Enclos
118. Fibre Channel transceiver l 2 6 7 Power off the system See Powering Off the System Disconnect the Fibre Channel cable by squeezing the end of the cable connector If removing more than one cable make sure that they are labeled before removing them The cables are fragile use care when handling them CAUTION Mishandling Fibre Channel cables can degrade performance Do not twist fold pinch or step on cables Do not bend the cables tighter than a 2 inch radius Some models of transceivers are held in place by a small wire bail actuator pull down on the top of the bail and rotate it in the downward direction Grasp the transceiver between your thumb and index finger and carefully remove it from the Fibre Channel port Insert a new transceiver in the Fibre Channel port and gently push in the transceiver until it clicks in place NOTE A transceiver fits only one way in the port If the transceiver does not install under gentle pressure pull it out of the port turn it over and re insert it Plug the Fibre Channel cable into the duplex jack at the end of the transceiver Power on the system See Powering on the VLS System Ethernet Switch Replacement To replace an Ethernet Switch l 2 3 4 J 6 7 Power off the switch Make a note of all cable connections to the switch then disconnect the cables From the front of the switch loosen the captive thumbscrews until the thumbscrews are free
119. HP 9000 Virtual Library System User Guide For VLS Firmware 6 1 0 Abstract This document describes the HP VLS9000 series systems fo facilitate their installation operation and maintenance This document is intended for system administrators who are experienced with setting up and managing large storage systems A 3 0 9 6 O 3 4 x HP Part Number AG306 96034 Published December 2012 Edition Tenth G 6 Copyright 2007 2012 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein Acknowledgments Microsoft and Windows are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Warranty WARRANTY STATEMENT To obtain a copy of the warranty for this product see the warranty information website http www hp com go storagewarranty Revision History Revision AG306 96034 December 2012 release of firmware version 6 1 0 Revision AG306 96029 September 2010 release of firmware version 3 4 0 Revision AG306 96027 March 2010 release of firmware version 3 3 1 Revision AG306 96022 September 2009 release of firmware version 3 2 1 Contents
120. HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations ltem Description Status Off System health is normal when in standby mode 3 Power On Standby button and system power LED Green System is on Amber System is in standby but power is still applied Off Power cord is not attached power supply failure has occurred no power supplies are installed facility power is not available or the power button cable is disconnected Rear Panel Components AA sacco ltem Description 1 Slot 1 PCle2 x8 8 4 2 1 2 Slot 2 PCle2 x16 16 8 4 2 1 3 Power supply 1 4 Power supply 2 5 iLO 3 connector 6 Serial connector 7 Video connector 8 NIC 4 connector 9 NIC 3 connector 10 NIC 2 connector T NIC 1 connector 12 USB connectors 2 VLS9200 Node Components LEDs and Buttons 183 PCle2 Gen signaling rate x8 physical connector link width 8 4 2 1 negotiable link widths Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons ltem r rr tO SAE SSeS fr eG See re Description 10 100 1000 NIC ctivity LED Eo io SIHR CI Status Green Activity exists Flashing green Activity exists Off No activity exists 10 100 1000 NIC link LED Green Link exists Off No link exists iLO 3 NIC activity LED Green Activity exists Flashing green Activity exists Off No activity exi
121. In this case power down the enclosure by unplugging the power cords from the enclosure VLS9200 Disk Array Enclosure Components LEDs and Buttons This section provides images and descriptions of the front and rear panels of the VLS9200 disk array enclosures Front Panel Components 11733 Item Description 1 Drives O 1 and 2 numbered from top to bottom 2 Drives 3 4 and 5 Drives 6 7 and 8 4 Drives 9 10 and 11 Front Panel LEDs ro a om ra m ra 11734 ltem Description Status 1 Enclosure ID LED A hex LED shows the enclosure ID which enables you to correlate an enclosure F for 3 4 seconds with logical views presented by Command View VLS The enclosure ID for a base at power up disk array enclosure is zero 0 the enclosure ID for an attached capacity enclosure is nonzero Continuous F The display has a problem If the Fault Service required LED is also lit an enclosure level fault occurred 2 Hard drive status LED Blue Hard drive is selected for identification purposes only Amber Hard drive has failed Flashing amber Flashes at constant 1 Hz when hard drive is predicted to fail Off Hard drive is operating normally 3 Hard drive activity LED Green Hard drive is online but there is no hard drive activity Flashing green constant 1 Hz Hard drive is rebuilding VLS9200 Disk Array Enc
122. Power on the secondary node being added to the VLS The node will then run cable checks and configuration checks After several minutes a menu will appear on your monitor asking whether the node is a primary master m or secondary slave s node Enter s At the prompt enter the node number next sequential node number and the node will then automatically reboot NOTE Node numbering must be sequential with no gaps Gaps in ID numbering will prevent the VLS from recognizing any nodes with an ID after the gap For example if node numbering is O 1 2 4 the VLS will not recognize node 4 After the reboot the VLS will automatically recognize and add the node Repeat this procedure for each secondary node in the system 44 Multi node Setup 4 Storage Configuration This section describes how to configure the storage pool policy and add or remove storage as needed after the nodes have been configured Managing VLS Capacity There are several ways to manage the capacity of your system e Increase the number of VLS nodes e Increase the number of VLS capacity enclosures See Adding VLS Capacity e Reduce the number of VLS disk array enclosures See Removing VLS Capacity e Create storage pools See Configuring the Storage Pool Policy Adding VLS Capacity Add capacity by increasing the number of VLS9200 capacity enclosures in your VLS system New to the VLS family is the ability to purchase individual capacity enclosure
123. Restart Emulations window opens Click Restart Emulations to confirm ARNS Updating the Firmware A CAUTION The VLS restarts automatically when you install a firmware update To update the VLS firmware Obtain the VLS firmware update zip file from HP Verify the file integrity of the downloaded file See the firmware release notes for details In Command View VLS click the System tab Select Chassis in the navigation tree Select Software Update under Maintenance Tasks The Software Update window opens Select Browse Select the zipped firmware upgrade file Select Next Step The window displays information about the upgrade Select Next Step to continue The EULA displays Select Accept and Install to continue OONAMRWNS S The screen displays a message that the upgrade was successtully installed and reboots automatically The reboot may take several minutes 132 Management Saving Configuration Settings NOTE The VLS firmware ensures a persistent VLS serial number and Fibre Channel port WWPNs so that in the event of any hardware failure and replacement such as the system board or Fibre Channel host bus adapter card the VLS still appears exactly the same to the external SAN It does this by generating a VLS serial number and Fibre Channel port WWPNs at first boot which are based on the system board s MAC address The VLS serial number and Fibre Channel port WWPNs are saved on the VLS hard drives and with
124. SB device is connected to the switch but no data transfer operation is occurring Blinking orange blinks every 1 6 seconds Indicates an error condition The switch Fault LED will be blinking simultaneously There is a hardware fault associated with the USB device or the USB connector on the switch Blinking orange blinks every 0 8 seconds Indicates an alert condition The switch Fault LED should not be blinking simultaneously An alert error occurred in the USB operation that is not caused by a hardware fault such as a file transfer error Off Indicates that no USB device has been inserted or that the inserted USB device cannot be recognized or that no command file can be found on the inserted USB device Port LEDs Link left and Mode right Link e Green The port is enabled and receiving a link indication from the connected device e Off The port has no active network cable connected or is not receiving link beat or sufficient light Otherwise the port may have been disabled through the switch console the web browser interface or ProCurve Manager e Blinking orange simultaneously with the Fault LED The corresponding port has failed its self test Mode The operation of the Mode LED is controlled by the LED Mode select button and the current setting is indicated by the LED Mode indicator LEDs near the button Press the button to step from one view mode to the next The default view is Activity
125. Secure Erasure provides guaranteed erasure of information on virtual tape cartridges You must purchase a separate license for this feature You can schedule all or selected cartridges for a total data overwrite to ensure that no data can be retrieved The erasure procedure conforms to NIST guidelines as required in many regulated industries and government agencies that mandate that data must be destroyed after a certain period of time This erasure is comparable to tape shredding of physical tapes A CAUTION Ifyou want to keep data that is currently on a cartridge that you are going to delete copy the data to another cartridge using a backup application before performing this task NOTE You cannot delete a cartridge that is currently being accessed by a backup application Cancel all replication and deduplication jobs associated with this cartridge first You may delete replication cartridges on either the source or the target VLS with the following results e Deleting a source cartridge results in the mirror copy pool on the target VLS moving to the Mirror Broken state e Deleting a target cartridge results in the cartridge disappearing from the mirror copy pool on the source VLS To delete cartridges from Command View VLS Managing Cartridges 129 1 On the Cartridge Details screen select all the cartridges that you want to delete and erase UA Command View VLS Cartridges MPF S LUN Mapping Selec arcode Virt
126. Tab For the Current Status tab you can customize the default refresh time for the display You can also create a pre defined custom view based on the devices you choose At the bottom of the Configuration tab 1 Select a device category 2 Select the specific devices of interest from the Available Devices box Performance and Storage Use Reports 147 3 Using the gt gt button move the devices of interest into the Selected Devices box These are the devices that will display in the report You can use lt lt button to remove devices from the Selected Devices box 4 Select another device category and repeat steps 2 and 3 Enter a name for this view in the Create a New View field 6 Select Create View mn This view is now available as a selection in the Pre defined Views list on the Current Status and Performance History tabs To edit an existing view select it from the Update Existing View list adjust the selected devices rename the view if desired in the name field and select Update View Select Delete View if you want to remove that view from your Pre defined options Performance History Tab For the Performance History tab you can customize e The default duration of the performance graphs to display e The default duration of the CSV format export file e The default name for the CSV format export file You can also create a pre defined custom view based on the devices you choose See Current Status Tab page 147
127. Table 3 Expand the navigation tree to display the usage view options The Statistical Graph provides information for the component s overall storage utilization The Storage Details table provides a detailed storage utilization listing of the selected component Capacity Usage Views This section describes the various information screens related to the system capacity System Capacity View The System Capacity screen presents a summary of the system s overall storage capacity utilization The Statistical Graph on the System Capacity view displays the Logical Used and Available capacity in your VLS The System Capacity table lists the following capacity values 140 Monitoring Table 14 System Capacity Table Total Physical Capacity Total physical storage capacity purchased and installed on the system This is the sum of all LUN capacity in the pool minus the space reserved for formatting overhead Reserved for System Usable Capacity The space required for system overhead and metadata Storage Pool 1 or the FireSafe can have more space reserved than other storage pools due to Deduplication metadata that can be up to 2 TB The physical storage capacity available for user data This is the total Physical Capacity less the space reserved for the system Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage used for data wheth
128. The capacity to cope with internal hardware problems without interrupting the system s data availability often by using backup systems brought online when a failure is detected Many systems provide fault tolerance by using RAID architecture to give protection against loss of data when a single disk drive fails Using RAID 1 3 5 6 10 or 50 techniques the RAID controller can reconstruct data from a failed disk drive and write it to a spare or replacement disk drive A data transfer architecture designed for mass storage devices and other peripheral devices that require high bandwidth A VLS file is a virtual cartridge The holding area for virtual media that is not assigned to a virtual library Data cannot be restored from virtual media located in the Firesafe until the media is moved into a library The ability to add and remove devices to an appliance while the appliance is running and have the operating system automatically recognize the change Integrated Lights Out The physical hardware used to interconnect computers Infrastructure also includes the software used to send receive and manage the signals that are transmitted A media host server that runs the backup restore application that passes commands and data between the network and the VLS 257 inputs outputs per second L library logical unit number LUN LUN mapping LUN masking M mean time until data loss MTDL media access control MAC a
129. The source virtual cartridge has been updated by the backup application since the target cartridge was updated Instruction creation is complete Mirror Scheduled Echo Copy Waiting to acquire resources to run the job to synchronize the target cartridge with the source cartridge Mirroring Echo Copy Mirroring from the target cartridge to the source cartridge Mirror Broken Echo Copy A problem was encountered mirroring the cartridge Restoring Echo Copy Mirroring from the source cartridge to the target cartridge Eject Pending Echo Copy Ejecting the target cartridge and about to put the source cartridge into the firesafe Mirror Eject Pending Echo Copy About to eject the target cartridge and then put the source cartridge into the firesafe Mirroring before Eject Echo Copy Synchronizing the cartridge in the Destination Library with the source virtual cartridge When the mirror job is complete the target cartridge will be ejected and the source cartridge will be moved to the firesafe 66 Automigration Replication Status message Pool type Description Export Preprocessing Echo Copy Gathering deduplication instructions needed for replication using tape transport Exporting Echo Copy Copying content from the source cartridge onto a physical tape Partially Exported Echo Copy Copying content from the source cartridge will continue on another p
130. Under the user s name select enable The SMIS Users screen refreshes and displays the message The Read Write or Read Only User was successfully enabled The enable button for that user is replaced by the disable button To change a user s password From the Notifications tab task bar select Get SMI S users The SMI S Users screen displays listing Read Only Users and Read Write Users 2 Under the appropriate user s name select change password The change password screen displays 3 Enter the new password for the user in both fields 4 Select Submit The SMIS Users screen refreshes and displays the message The Read Write or Read Only User s password was successfully changed NOTE Viewing and managing users with SMI S access is the only SMI S associated functionality on the VLS itself The benefits of SMI S are evident on applications attached to the VLS Monitoring Storage Capacity The Capacity Manager is a tool that constantly monitors your VLS storage utilization The Capacity Manager provides a centralized graphical view of the storage capacity utilization by devices in your VLS The graphical representation of the data allows easy in depth capacity monitoring by providing overall system capacity view storage pool view library view and cartridge view Monitoring Storage Capacity 139 The Capacity Manager screens are designed to provide quick information for monitoring and diagnostic purposes The ove
131. Update The screen returns to the template summary list Editing the Notification Alerts To edit the notification alerts for libraries the VLS system and storage pools 1 Select the VLS or the library or storage pool of interest 2 Select Edit Thresholds libraries and VLS or Edit Pool Configuration storage pools The screen lists the available notification alerts with default or previously set threshold values 3 Check the top box to enable notification alerts or uncheck it to disable alerts 4 Enter the hour of the day for the system to send notifications in 24 hour time For example a value of 14 means 2 00 p m 5 Change the remaining values where necessary Some values are a ratio while others are a percentage You can set both critical and warning notifications for e System ratio the logical data to used capacity e Deduplication ratio the logical size to physical size e Logical capacity usage the total amount of data written by the backup application e Replication traffic the total replication data transferring across the LAN WAN e Physical capacity usage the total physical disk space used e Performance of the library the overall performance of the library 6 Select Submit The screen indicates that the notification alerts have been set 7 Select Back to return to the Workload Assessment screen Replication History This tab displays two views of the replication usage for the VLS system Th
132. Usage changePassword Resets the administrative password or changes the administrative or user password Command View VLS automatically restarts atter changing the passwords to make the changes take effect Where the options are admin Reset the administrator password u and p are ignored optional p Password no spaces optional u Username administrator or user Default is current user optional h Displays command usage information optional editCartridge Changes parameters on an existing cartridge Where the options are a lt s gt VLS filename of the cartridge required b lt s gt Barcode label of the cartridge required c lt n gt Current capacity of the cartridge in gigabytes optional Only required if changing the cartridge capacity 1 lt s gt Name of library in which the cartridge resides Library_O required nc lt n gt Desired new capacity of the cartridge in gigabytes optional nl lt s gt Name of the new library if moving cartridge Library_1 optional s lt s gt Storage LUN name SLun_ required w Write protect O read write or 1 read only optional 170 CLI Command Set Table 28 CLI Management Commands continued Command Usage 1 y lt n gt Cartridge emulation type 2 3 required h Displays command usage information optional restartEmulations Restarts the VLS device emulations restartCommandV
133. VLS 1 Select the System tab 2 Select Storage Pools in the navigation tree 3 Select Rebuild All Storage Pools from the task bar 4 Select Rebuild or if your system has deduplication enabled select Restart Emulations in Maintenance Mode from the task bar Systems with deduplication enabled must enter Maintenance Mode before rebuilding the storage pools Maintenance Mode reboots the system with deduplication disabled and the front fibre ports down 5 If your system has deduplication enabled wait until the system has completed rebooting into Maintenance Mode then follow steps 1 through 3 The system will reboot again when the system is back up deduplication is enabled and the front fibre ports are back up Rebuilding a Single Storage Pool To delete all information on the VLS9200 arrays for one specific storage pool and reformat them perform a Rebuild Storage Pool from Command View VLS A CAUTION Selecting Rebuild Storage Pool destroys all current virtual tape cartridges in that storage pool To rebuild a storage pool from Command View VLS Select the System tab Select Storage Pools in the navigation tree Select the specific storage pool you want to rebuild Select Rebuild Storage Pool from the task bar Click Rebuild or if your system has deduplication enabled select Restart Emulations in Maintenance Mode from the task bar ARONS Systems with deduplication enabled must enter Maintenance Mode before rebui
134. View Backups The screen displays a list of backup jobs meeting the set criteria and includes the following information e State the state of the backup job see below e Backup Name e Policy e Backup Time e Type e Logical Size version 3 4 x the size of the backup data sent to the VLS before deduplication and compression e Physical Size Estimate version 3 4 x the disk space currently used to store the compressed backup which varies over time as deduplication processes the backup and reclaims redundant disk space e Dedupe Ratio Estimate the estimated deduplication ratio based on the Logical Size divided by Physical Size Estimate From the results list select a backup name to see the backup statistics for that particular job The backup information includes a graph depicting the original data size shown as zero prior to the deduplication the deduplicated size and the unprocessed data In the Cartridge Details select a barcode to see its cartridge report The deduplication reports show the following states Waiting for Next Backup the backup has nothing to difference against and is therefore waiting for a new backup Incr diff backups difference against the new full backup not the old full backup 88 Deduplication Delta diff in Process the backup has identified another version of itself to difference against and is now running differencing to identify the duplicate data between the two
135. _Port F_Port and E_Port G_Port GL_port auto configuring Transparent Router TR e 10 20 Gbps E_Port and F_Port G_Port auto configuring Data traffic types Fabric switches support unicast and broadcast Media types 8 Gbps Small Form Factor Pluggable Plus SFP optical transceivers Laser Distance using short wave 8 Gbps optical transceivers at 2 Gbps 4 Gbps and 8 Gbps connection speed e 8 Gbps OM3 fiber 150 m OM2 fiber 50 m e 4 Gbps OM3 fiber 270 m OM2 fiber 150 m e 2 Gbps OM3 fiber 500 m OM2 fiber 300 m Distance using short wave 4 Gbps optical transceivers at 2 Gbps and 4 Gbps connection speed e 4 Gbps OM3 fiber 270 m OM2 fiber 150 m e 2 Gbps OM3 fiber 500 m OM2 fiber 300 m Fabric services e Simple name server e Hardware based zoning e Registered State Change Notification RSCN e O StreamGuard e Multi chassis in order delivery e Automatic path selection e FDMI support Management access 10 100 Ethernet Base T RJ 45 serial port RS 232 with DB9 in band Fibre Channel Diagnostics Power on self test POST Front to back airflow RoHS compliant Dimensions Height 1U 1 7 in 4 32 cm Depth 18 75 in 47 6 cm Width 17 in 43 2 cm Weight 18 Ib 8 16 kg Environmental Fibre Channel Switch 4 10q 249 Fibre Channel Switch 4 16q ltem Specification Temperature Operatin
136. a can be written to and read from the virtual tape and the virtual tape can be migrated to physical tape An emulation of a physical transport in a virtual tape library that looks like a physical tape transport to the host backup application The data written to the virtual tape drive is really being written to disk See also virtual tape library A disk drive buffer containing virtual tape and virtual tape drives See also virtual tape drive World wide node name A globally unique 64 bit identifier assigned to each Fibre Channel node World wide node name A globally unique 64 bit identifier assigned to each Fibre Channel node process World wide port name A unique 64 bit address used in a FC storage network to identify each device in a FC network Index Symbols 20 port Fibre Channel Switch specifications 249 40 port connectivity kit shipping carton contents 19 A accelerated deduplication see deduplication adding workload assessment template 153 adding slot mapping LAN WAN 64 SAN 63 additional information 236 Advanced Search for slots 68 array 122 see also disk array adding 45 dual pathing 122 load balancing 122 powering off 96 powering on 91 assembly overview 20 At End of the Policy Window LAN WAN 58 SAN 57 authorized reseller 238 automated reports 154 backup summary 154 performance history 154 policy cartridge summary 154 replication data for ISV import 154 replication job hist
137. a separated values CSY file format The data fields are separated by commas or columns depending on the program used to view the file Test summaries are logged at the beginning and end of a test The data fields are in order as follows Test_summary indicates that this row of data is the test summary information Test summary ID Date of the test Test type Background or Read only Storage pools All or the number of the storage pool tested Test start time Test end time Current job count Total job count Total amount of data written during the test Total amount of data read during the test Total number of successful jobs Total number of failed jobs Status of the test Decompression errors will be logged once per occurrence The data fields are in order as follows See Log Monitor Summary page 158 for descriptions not defined here Decompression_error indicates that this row of data is the decompression information Decompression error ID Time the error occurred sDev Number LBA Stress Testing Hard Disks using the Storage Exerciser 159 e Otfset e Length e UUID e P address e Enclosure number e Range of suggested disk numbers within the enclosure e Part number of the faulty drive Jobs are only logged in event of a job failure The data fields are in order as follows e Job indicates that this row of data is the job information e Job ID e Date of the test e Generated job key e Te
138. a te tea Oren en Arner ee enor 151 Contents 7 Physical Capacity ectadat ou teen case cloistGvtae uunes tetera inet aie E A E a a a E R 152 Workload Assessment wo fesanisaaedaavuien vb sa aitinnts oimin dy uve is hinsides ade iSe s ri eE aS eRNaRoawias 152 Running a Workload Assessment Simul tOftvsnciascicxdsatecty qratvteletinadiycdeldetarepwtereitacnia 152 Using the Workload Assessment Templates ccccccceseessceeecesesneeeceeeeesnesseeeeecessssseaeees 153 Editing the Notification ANAS acts voices detcsdecetetiacelcbecdtseen devel cnuniereigadanaarecnierniea et peat 153 Replication UO cdi ete earache tceedespo cae oside acetic euaenines E EEDE rG ETA inea T ERTES 153 Deduplication Job PA St ee ccteie anc opereisnacscospheenataedqcxpepecevidscienecnnsna ed eiaieenteenaleecige 154 Receiving Automated Reports s lt isiccsseridcccesneiigseneeceteetednouemanaeeuuediancteeen 154 Stress Testing Hard Disks using the Storage Exerciser cccccccsescseceeeeeseneeeeeeeceessseeeeeceesetseeeees 155 Configuring the Storage Exercise icesoscsedausncdscsveleus vax exes sicdsaienevaegvadsnsasaionniaiensisdarkaiaunliness 155 Storage Exerciser CLI Commands c cccdsccsancnensadaceadsenenenonsedecandtceantiad fadedecentenanaadanteneencns 156 Starting and Reviewing Read only Jats 2s cssesscoriianenycievaiecteehweaenderepiy ae nieieeaiaeivene 156 Starting and Reviewing Background Jobs cccccceesseeceessseeceeeeseeceesnaeeeeesueeeeeseneeeeeeentee
139. acked up to compression enabled virtual tape drives both software and hardware compression is compressed before it is deduplicated The following is an overview of the deduplication process See the HP VLS Solutions Guide for more detailed information 1 When a backup runs a data grooming exercise is performed on the fly Using meta data attached by the backup application data grooming maps the content or objects of the backup and assembles a content database This process has minimal performance impact 2 After the scheduled backups have completed the content database is used to delta difference compare objects in current and previous backups from the same hosts There are different levels of comparison For example files may be compared using a strong hashing function while other objects may be compared at a byte level 3 When duplicate data is found in an older backup it is replaced by a pointer to the most recent copy of the same data Because the most recent backup is a full version you achieve the fastest possible restores 4 Space reclamation occurs when duplicate data from previous backups is removed from the disk This can take some time but results in previously consumed capacity being returned to a free pool on the device Getting Deduplication Running on the VLS This section explains how to get deduplication running on your VLS system including some considerations for setting up the system installing t
140. aesachand sansa ndeedeebasharasqeudeedacsdcvarecnteniecsenrenes 6l Viewing Cartridges in Automigration Source Libraries cccccccssceceeeeeeeseeeceeesesteaeeeeeesenaes 6l Viewing Automigration Cartridges in the Firesafe c ccccccccsssseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeeeessseeeeesensaes 62 Editing Copy Pools eee meee eee ne te ne Rr eee one ee aae ane ire me Mle ered Non er ee ene en eee 62 Moving a Copy peaches thee ccs scscee ened cada cays rii ernro E ee toansase bis seeseanoteemackeesneeesacaes 62 Changing the Slot Mapping for a SAN Library 2c ccvesaete tte cersciaiwterteweren ctaeiietaen beeline 62 Changing the Slot Mapping for a LAN WAN Library cccceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeceeneeeeeeessstaeeees 63 Editing the SAN or LAN WAN POliGy cs3iicoi nessevissits v2 cde budindntm dard ocusabadindwbane ssdeudadwincabadeseonedecsweas 64 Editing the SAN or LAN WAN Availability Windows cccccceeceecseeeceeneeeeeeseeeeseteeeeeeaees 64 Deleting a Copy soc Reet me ney Aa Ment PY MT ON NCRONT ae BOE Pret acter Or cre oe BED fy Serene Tae Pree eS 65 SAM Destination Library Operonons xj ccicorieieecncacerieetatehiceacicestaaieecdeeeeniceeueiieehienddadaceniens 65 Monitoring Destination Library Status cccccccccceeseeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeceeceseeaeeeeeseessseeeeeeeesenteaaeees 65 Cartridge Status and Slot De tel s x cceteesarscerntorteradecededetsanyeaiidenteueeelaciingunireteiae eae 66 Advanced Sectchi for SIGl5 sisedenaiansianieravenntinraninnnna
141. age 111 However if you use LUN mapping for a dual port device the defined LUN number for that device for a specified host applies to both device paths Follow the operating system LUN requirements see Operating System LUN Requirements and Restrictions page 112 when configuring the paths Creating a Virtual Library Before creating a virtual library you must first e Determine the best way to manage VLS virtual library and tape drive LUNs for your environment see Managing Virtual Device LUNs page 111 e Determine the best way to configure virtual libraries and tape drives on your VLS for your environment See the HP VLS Solutions Guide You can configure any combination of virtual tape libraries and virtual tape drives up to the maximum number supported on the VLS You can configure one node with up to 16 libraries with a total of up to 180 virtual tape drives With multiple nodes a single library can span across nodes To create a new virtual library from Command View VLS 1 Click the System tab 2 Select Chassis in the navigation tree 3 Select Create Virtual Library in the task bar The Create Virtual Library Wizard opens 4 Select the Fibre Channel host port and node on which to present the virtual library Only one port or port pair may be selected 5 Select the type of tape library to emulate NOTE The only library emulation Veritas supports for use with Netbackup is the HP VLS emulation IBM su
142. age pool width across the arrays in the system To set the storage pool policy from Command View VLS 1 Select the System tab 2 Select Storage Pools in the navigation tree 3 From the task bar select Edit Policy The Storage Pool Policy Wizard screen is displayed 4 Select the number of arrays wide in the Number of Arrays Wide field You can select All for one storage pool across all arrays or select 1 8 for that many arrays per storage pool Only the Number of Arrays Wide default value can be changed 5 Click Next 6 Click Next to confirm If the existing storage pools do not fit into the new storage pool policy selected a dialog box will ask if you want to erase the existing storage pools to create the new policy Select Yes to rebuild all storage pools or No to cancel the change See Rebuilding all Storage Pools Storage Configuration 7 Click Finish Viewing the Storage Pool To view the storage pool information from Command View VLS 1 Select the System tab 2 Expand Storage Pools in the navigation tree 3 Select the storage pool of interest in the navigation tree The storage pool details window opens Rebuilding all Storage Pools To delete all information on the VLS9200 arrays and reformat them perform a Rebuild All Storage Pools from Command View VLS A CAUTION Rebuild All Storage Pools destroys all current virtual tape cartridges in the system To rebuild all storage pools from Command View
143. al representation showing the Logical Used and Available storage capacity Figure 20 Storage Pool Capacity Screen Expand Collapse Refresh E amp Chassis vis300n0 usa hp com E Capacity StoragePool_3 Capacity Storage Pools gt Virtual Libraries 32 500 30 000 gt Cartridges 27 500 E Deduplication 25 000 E e Nodes 22 500 LUN Mapping 20 000 Virtual Libraries 17 500 15 000 amp Storage Pools bd 2 12 500 Storage LUNs 10 000 Cartridges 7 500 E tie Disk Arrays 5 000 2 500 o Logical Data Used Capacity Available Capacity StoragePool StoragePool_3 Total Physical Capacity Reserved for System Usable Capacity Logical Data Used Capacity Available Capacity Ratio 29 77 TB 216 28 GB 29 56 TB 32 06 TB 9 84 TB 19 71 TB 3 3 1 Virtual Libraries StoragePool_3 1 30f3 Virtual Library Allocated Capacity Logical Data Used Capacity Available Capacity Ratio fireSafe N A 0 00 KB 0 00 KB NIA NIA Library_0 0 00 KB 0 00 KB 28 02 GB 0 00 KB NIA Library_2000 22 50 TB 32 06 TB 9 82TB 12 68 TB 3 34 The Storage Pool Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 16 Storage Pool Capacity Table Total physical storage capacity purchased and installed on the system This is the sum of all LUN capacity in the Total Physical Capacity pool minus the space reserved for formatting overhead Reserved for System The space required for s
144. al tape disk to disk backups using your existing backup applications The VLS family includes different series of models that vary in storage capacity and performance Firmware version 6 0 0 marked the change to a 64 bit operating system on the nodes The VLS emulates a variety of physical tape libraries including the tape drives and cartridges inside the libraries You determine the number and types of tape libraries a VLS emulates and the number and types of tape drives and cartridges included in each tape library to meet the needs of your environment You configure the size of the virtual cartridges in your VLS which provides even more flexibility The VLS offers many features such as e deduplication storing only a single copy of a data block e replication transferring data from virtual cartridges on disk to a remote physical tape library across the LAN WAN e automigration transferring data from virtual cartridges on disk to a physical tape library across the SAN e Secure Erasure overwriting data on cartridges to ensure that no data can be retrieved The VLS accommodates mixed IT platform and backup application environments allowing all your servers and backup applications to access the virtual media simultaneously You can specify which servers are allowed to access each virtual library and tape drive you configure Data stored on a VLS is easily cloned to physical tape for off site disaster protection or long ter
145. an the graphs can display You must select how the system chooses which data point to use for each time period displayed For example if Performance and Storage Use Reports 151 you show four days of data the graphs show one data point for every four hour period Use the Advanced Setting list to indicate which data point out of that four hour period is used e First data point the first data point for each time period e Maximum data point the data point with the highest value for each time period e Minimum data point the data point with the lowest value for each time period 3 Select a specific virtual library to view from the list or use VLS Device to include all libraries Logical Capacity tab only 4 Select Update Graphs The graphs update to reflect the data options you chose NOTE The final graph displays the history of the logical capacity for the entire VLS and does not change if you choose to view a specific library Physical Capacity This tab displays different views of the physical capacity usage for an individual library or the entire VLS system Physical capacity is the amount of data actually stored on the disk while the logical capacity is the amount of data the backup application wrote In a deduplicated environment the physical capacity reported represents data after compression and deduplication without deduplication it represents data after compression To export the physical capacity CSV data
146. ardless of the policy windows 9 Pausing Resuming and Canceling Replication Jobs Each replication job is actually split into smaller jobs Mirror Preprocessing preparing to move data Mirror moving the data and Mirror Postprocessing clean up process This saves resources because each job type uses only the resources it needs instead of reserving resources for the entire job Whole cartridge replication is not divided into smaller jobs The source VLS displays the Mirror Preprocessing and Mirror jobs while the target VLS displays the Mirror and Mirror Postprocessing jobs From Command View VLS select the Automigration Replication tab then select Job Reporting in the navigation tree This opens the Current Status screen where you can control the jobs On the source VLS you can pause Mirror and Restore jobs and resume them at a later time for example when there are more resources available At any point during the job click the Pause Job icon u in the Action column The job pauses and the Pause Job icon is replaced by the Resume Job icon When you are ready click the Resume Job icon and the job will continue where it left off You can cancel all job types at any point by clicking the Cancel Job icon x in the Action column NOTE When a replication library goes offline all active mirror jobs pause When the replication library comes back online all paused jobs resume LAN WAN Replication Target Operations Th
147. ary Operations 67 Status message Pool type Description Ready For Import Tape Import Tape in an Import pool slot that is in the catalog Importing Tape Import Actively copying data from the physical tape to the target virtual cartridge Import Complete Tape Import All data has been copied from the physical tape to the target virtual cartridges Signal to tape operator to remove the tape from the physical library Unloaded Completed Tape Tape Import All data has been copied and the tape has been ejected Bad Tape Tape Import Unable to read the physical tape Signal to tape operator to remove the tape from the physical library Unloaded Bad Tape Tape Import Unable to read the physical tape and the tape has been ejected Skipped Tape Import The tape operator skipped this tape possibly because it was missing in the collection received from the source site Unloaded Skipped Tape Tape Import The tape operator skipped this tape and the tape has been ejected Unknown Tape Tape Import There is a physical tape in an Import pool slot that is not part of the pool it is not in the catalog Signal to tape operator to remove the tape from the physical library Indicates status messages that are only valid for replication deduplication enabled Advanced Search for Slots Quickly locate slots of interest using the Advanced Search link on the task bar Enter a specific barcode or filter by status
148. ater So consider your potential future requirements when entering values Not all of the tape drives and cartridges must be created at this time You may add tape drives later Click Next Step A window opens indicating that by default all libraries connected to the VLS have access to all hosts Click Create Library A summary window opens and displays details about the library emulation created Choose one of the following options e To perform LUN mapping for the virtual library click Map LUNs and proceed to LUN Mapping page 112 for further instructions e To continue creating the virtual library click Create Tape Drives and proceed to Creating Tape Drives page 118 e To exit the wizard click Cancel The library is created but does not contain any tape drives or cartridges You can add tape drives and cartridges later Creating a Virtual Library 117 Editing a Virtual Library To edit the slots and drives of a virtual library from Command View VLS a a la a 7 8 Click the System tab Expand Chassis in the navigation tree Expand Virtual Libraries in the navigation tree Select the virtual library you want to edit Select Edit Virtual Library in the task bar On the Library Parameters screen change the values as appropriate You can change the maximum number of slots maximum number of ports and maximum number of drives Select Next Step The screen displays a confirmation Select Yes
149. ation Height 4 3 cm 1 70 in Depth 69 2 cm 27 3 in Width 42 6 cm 16 8 in Weight fully loaded 17 9 kg 39 5 Ib Weight no drives installed 14 1 kg 31 0 Ib Rated input voltage 100 VAC to 240 VAC Rated input frequency 50 Hz to 60 Hz Rated input current 7 1 A 120 VAC 3 5 A 240 VAC Rated input power 852 W BTUs per hour 2910 120 VAC 2870 240 VAC Rated steady state power 700 W SATA hard drive 60 GB capacity 7 200 rpm rotational speed Power supply 700 W DVD CD drive 8x 24x IDE Memory 4 x 1024 MB DDR2 SRAM ECC Processor 2 xPentium quad core Xeon processor 2 0 GHz VLS9200 Node ltem Specification Physical Dimensions HxWxD 4 32 x 42 62 x 69 22 cm 1 70 x 16 78 x 27 25 in Weight maximum two processors two power 15 97 kg 35 20 lb supplies eight hard drives Weight minimum one processor one power 14 51 kg 32 00 Ib supply no hard drives Weight no drives installed 14 06 kg 31 00 Ib Power Consumption 250 W Processor and memory Number of processors 2 Processors supported Intel Xeon 5600 series 246 Specifications Item Specification Cache 12 GB L3 Memory type DDR3 RDIMM Standard memory DDR3 Maximum memory Up to 192 GB Memory slots 18 DIMM Storage Storage type Hot plug SFF SATA Maximum internal storage 4 TB Maximum internal drive bays 8 Expansion slots 2 PCle x8 Gen 2 mezzanine
150. ation library is directly connected to the VLS LOOP mode and you disconnect the destination library to change its connection to be via a SAN FABRIC mode you will need to reboot the VLS in order for this change to work If you do not reboot the destination library will be marked as FAILED after you disconnect and reconnect it NOTE The mirror broken state can occur when there is not enough room on the virtual tape _ g to create the copy there are no available slots to create the copy the library cannot read the header of the physical tape the library cannot determine that a tape without a header is blank or the library cannot successfully write the header to the virtual tape For more help with automigration and replication issues e Monitoring Destination Library Status page 65 e Replacing a Library page 73 244 Troubleshooting Deduplication Issues Symptom The VLS is not deduplicating the backup jobs Possible causes The VLS does not free up storage on a cartridge until e Atleast two full backups of the same policy exist on different cartridges e The delta differencer has processed all of the backup sets on the cartridge e The cartridge is physically full Solution Consider using cartridges that are smaller than the sum of your daily backup jobs so the cartridges deduplicate sooner The deduplication compression ratio is low The compression ratio de
151. ber 70 Automigration Replication Restarting Automigration Replication Services If you replace a tape drive on your physical tape library you must restart automigration replication services afterwards This resets the services to acknowledge the new tape drive l 2 3 4 J 6 In Command View VLS select the System tab In the navigation tree select Chassis Under Maintenance Tasks select System Maintenance In the task bar select Restart Automigration Replication Services The screen displays a warning Select Restart You can select Return to cancel the restart The screen displays a summary of the restarted services Select Return Scanning a SAN Destination Library For an initial setup or to force an immediate synchronization of data scan the appropriate destination library This immediately forces the scan of a specific physical library NOTE The status message is returned as soon as the scan is successfully scheduled however the scan may not yet be complete There is no way to determine whether the scan has been performed l 2 From the navigation tree under Destination Libraries select the library to scan From the task bar select Scan The Destination Library Details screen refreshes and the message Scan of destination library successfully scheduled displays Editing the Management URL In order to view the management software for a SAN destination library from the Autom
152. cables before installing Verify that both power cords are unplugged on each enclosure in the rack For each base enclosure using the figure and table above work downward to connect the base enclosure to up to three capacity enclosures Secure the SAS cables of the enclosures together with a Velcro tie Cabling Base and Capacity Enclosures 27 Installing the VLS Node into a Rack 28 NOTE If you are installing the node into a telco rack order the appropriate option kit at the RackSolutions com web site http www racksolutions com hp Follow the instructions on the web site to install the rack brackets 1 Locate the rail kit part number 360332 003 2 Install the two outer slide rails to the rack The outer rails are marked FRONT and REAR On both sides of the rack align the rail holes with the holes in the rack and secure with thumbscrews 3 Attach the inner rails to the sides of the node Align the holes in the rail with the round tabs on the side of the node and secure with thumbscrews NOTE The inner rails are identical The word FRONT should face away from the node but will appear upside down on one side 4 Align the rails on the node with the rails in the rack and slide the node fully into the rack If your rack contains single phase PDUs you will install the node in rack position 35 If your rack contains 3 phase PDUs you will install the node in
153. capacity is the amount of data the backup application wrote while the physical capacity is the amount of data actually stored on the disk Select the Show Details link in the first section to display the breakdown of the logical and physical capacity and the deduplication ratio To export the deduplication CSV data enter the number of days to include in the report and select Export See Exporting CSV Data page 147 for more information To change the information displayed in the graphs 1 Select the date range to include in the report e Start date the date you want as the starting point for stepping back into the past by some number of days to establish a particular date range This is effectively the end date of the date range e Hour of the day the hour of the day in 24 hour time to use in conjunction with the Start date e Going back the number of days to step back from the selected start date to establish a date range For example if you select June 20 at 10 going back 3 days the graph will include data from June 17 at 10 00 a m to June 20th at 10 00 a m NOTE The greater the number of days included in the date range the fewer the data points for each day will display in the graphs For example for two days of data the graphs will show one data point for every two hours while for seven days of data the graphs will show one data point for every seven hours 2 In some cases there are more data points th
154. cation timeout limit Forced Copies 80 notification alerts 135 configuring 147 153 logical capacity 148 physical capacity 148 SAN health 148 deleting 136 172 editing email settings 136 receiving as SNMP traps 138 172 receiving by E mail 172 SMI S support 139 testing the mail notification settings 138 viewing in Command View VLS 136 viewing using CLI 172 notification thresholds 152 NTP server address setting 164 O operating system failure recovery 230 re installing 230 oversubscription defined 109 enabling and disabling 109 165 265 P passwords changing 122 170 default 100 forgot administrator password 102 Paused cartridge status 80 PDUs installing 20 Pending 80 performance history report 149 performance repports 147 physical capacity report 152 153 policy see library policy echo copy pool 56 polling frequency setting 108 power module replacing 226 powering off arrays and enclosures 96 VLS system 96 powering on arrays 91 VLS system 94 Priority 58 Q quarantined virtual disks defined 124 quick restore using DVD 230 using ilO 230 R rack planning resources 15 requirements 16 warnings 16 rack stability warning 238 RAID controller replacing 227 Re manage LAN WAN Replication Library 54 rebooting the VLS system 95 Rebuild All Storage Pools 47 Rebuild Storage Pool 47 Reclaim Space task 111 regulatory compliance identification numbers 25
155. cccssesreeeeecteeeeeeteeeeseeaeeees 71 Deploying SAN Destination Library or Tape Drive Firmware cccccceceeeeeesceceeeeeeseesteeeeeeeees 72 Generating a SAN Destination Library Support Ticket ccccccccccceeeeeseceeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeessteaeeees 72 Generating a SAN Destination Library Drive Support Ticket 0 cccccceecescseceeeeesseeeeeeeesssseeeees 72 Running a SAN Destination Library Assessment Test c cccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesneeeeeeseesseeeeeeeee 72 Running a SAN Destination Library Drive Assessment Test ccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesensseeeeeeee 73 Replacing a Hbrarysieenisoesseirintini ia a ERE AE NEE E E 73 LAN WAN Destination Library Operations ccccccccsccceceeeeseeceeeeeeeeesneeeeceeceeseneeeeeesentetseeeeeeees 74 Exporting Data to Physical tapes for Tape Initialization cccceeeeeseeeeeeereeeeeeneeeeetaeeeeeteaeeees 74 SHOP PINE a Tape EMO lt i cvawsnacededucneikdancurauansdteapeovinancnslaaiehicimennauadessaanGotanmcastaanainbadaunaantennaes 74 Importing Data from Physical Tapes for Tape Initialization ccccesseeeeseeeeeeetneeeeeteeeeeetaeeees 75 Forcing Non Deduplicated ReaiicGtoniesciss ahcceedsecaoussssdlecedordesuniiuedeceveidemmecieedebanineseasetnetes 75 Pausing Resuming and Canceling Replication Jobs ccccccccesesceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeessseseeeeeeeenaes 76 LAN WAN Replication Target pert ONS x eseseccteasddesecorspoccetustiensenemuiestiacinestaemenviewetewhll 7
156. ch 1 port 22 Switch 1 port 22 Switch 1 port 23 Switch 1 port 23 Switch 2 port 20 Switch 2 port 20 Switch 2 port 21 Switch 2 port 21 Switch 2 port 22 Switch 2 port 22 Switch 2 ort 23 Switch 2 port 23 4 Secure Fibre Channel cables to one side of the rack with a Velcro tie Installing Interswitch Ethernet Cables ee ee Port 21 2 Port 22 42 Hardware Installation l 3 Locate the Ethernet cables included in the interswitch link kit contents 2 Connect the Ethernet cables from the switches in rack 1 to the switches in rack 4 as shown in the figure and table below SS A EAA CS P g O E m RRRS DO a ns c m otee oe Boogod SS Se From Rack 1 Switch O port 22 To Rack 4 Switch O port 22 Switch 1 port 22 Switch 1 port 22 Switch O port 21 Switch 1 port 21 Switch 1 port 21 Switch O port 21 Secure Ethernet cables to the right side of the rack using a Velcro tie Installing the VLS9000 Interswitch Link Kit 43 3 Multi node Setup This section explains how to configure the identities of each node after the nodes and other components of the system are installed and cabled NOTE The Fibre Channel and Ethernet switches should be powered on before configuring the nodes NOTE The VLS system can be configured remotely using iLO wi
157. changing write access 127 170 configuring status screen 81 creating 119 168 deleting 129 destroying 169 details 81 moving 128 replicating outside policy window systems with deduplication 75 261 systems without deduplication 69 summary 80 unloading 130 viewing details 127 168 viewing in automigration source libraries 61 viewing the slot details 66 viewing the status 66 certificate error in browser 100 changing cartridge access 128 changing cartridge capacity 128 changing slot mapping LAN WAN 64 SAN 63 Clear All Faults 160 Clear Compression Faults 160 clearing leftover disks 125 CLI command set 163 configuration commands 165 connection commands 163 conventions 163 help 164 management commands 170 monitoring commands 171 network settings configuration commands 164 output commands 164 cold spare node 233 Command View VLS closing a session 101 description 98 Login window E mail Administrator link 108 opening a session 99 restarting 101 171 window regions 99 commands CLI 163 components disk array enclosure hard drive 225 power module 226 RAID or expansion controller 227 DVD CD drive 218 Ethernet Switch 225 fan module 220 FBDIMM 221 Fibre Channel Switch 224 Fibre Channel transceiver 225 hard drive 216 power supply 218 primary node 222 secondary node 223 VLS9200 12 configuration 105 165 rebuilding the library 232 restoring settings 171 231 saving settin
158. cho copy extent F failover protection fault tolerance Fibre Channel file Firesafe hot plug l iLO infrastructure initiator The process of archiving in which data is initially copied to backup storage on a disk based storage system such as a VLS and then periodically copied again to a tape storage system Virtual devices for example the two host or device ports on each FC card in the node with connectivity to two ports so that the device can be connected to more than one input or output A finely tuned filesystem developed to handle large block I O typical of a streaming backup and restore environment This filesystem is optimized for sequential access and very large file sizes A software feature within automigration that automatically synchronizes the physical cartridges to matching virtual cartridges with the same barcodes based on user defined policies and is totally transparent to the backup application Echo copy is similar to mirror copy The minimum amount of disk space allocated for writing by the VLS dynamic disk filesystem A smaller extent reduces wasted disk space but decreases restore performance The VLS extent size is 32MB See also data restore A backup operational mode in which the functions of a system component such as a hard drive or power supply are assumed by secondary system components when the primary component becomes unavailable through either failure or scheduled down time
159. choose will apply to every new host that you add to the VLS e All Devices LUN mapping disabled The default The VLS allows all hosts connected to the VLS through the SAN to access all virtual devices configured on the VLS e User Defined LUN mapping enabled the VLS prevents all hosts connected to the VLS through the SAN from viewing any virtual devices until they are explicitly mapped to the host To set the default status of LUN mapping from Command View VLS 1 Click the System tab 2 Expand Chassis in the navigation tree 3 Select LUN Mapping in the navigation tree 4 If this is not your first time changing the setting select Change Host Access Mode in the task bar Initially All Devices is selected and LUN mapping is disabled To enable LUN mapping select User Defined 7 Select Apply The global default is now set For every host you add LUN mapping is automatically enabled or disabled as you chose oo NOTE Both modes allow you to disable a host so that it cannot see any virtual devices regardless of any other settings Mapping LUNs by Device To map LUNs by device 1 Select the System tab 2 Expand Chassis in the navigation tree 3 Expand LUN Mapping in the navigation tree 4 Select Device View The Device View window displays all of the devices that have been mapped to a host Figure 10 page 113 Figure 10 LUN Mapping Device View window Administrator 42 Command View VLS
160. ck Save The SNMP restarts automatically 6 Test the system using the new community strings to ensure your changes were applied SMI S Support SMLS support allows applications attached to the VLS to detect the virtual library configuration and to allow some users to change the state of the VLS To protect access to the VLS via the SMI S agent and to allow a higher level of security for the device there are two access categories e Read only access allows you to view SMI S objects but not change them This is used by 3rd party monitoring products ISEE and other components that need visibilty but not control of the VLS configuration e Read and write access allows complete control of the device including the ability to reboot move tapes change port map settings etc A CAUTION Because of its destructive potential this functionality should be strictly controlled To disable an SMI S user From the Notifications tab task bar select Get SMI S users The SMI S Users screen displays listing Read Only Users and Read Write Users 2 Under the user s name select disable The SMIS Users screen refreshes and displays the message The Read Write or Read Only User was successfully disabled The disable button for that user is replaced by the enable button To enable a user From the Notifications tab task bar select Get SMI S users The SMI S Users screen displays listing Read Only Users and Read Write Users 2
161. cluded in the connectivity kit shipping carton All the documentation necessary for installing a VLS interswitch link kit into a rack is included in the interswitch link kit shipping carton VLS9200 Base Enclosure Shipping Cartons lem Description 1 VLS9200 base enclosure 10 TB or 20 TB 1 2 1U rack mounting hardware kit 1 16 Hardware Installation ltem Description 3 VLS badge 1 8 Gb FC transceivers 2 Power cords 2 LTU 1 for 10 TB 2 for 20 TB N oO on A Printed VLS array installation poster 1 Ethernet cables 2 and FC cables 2 not shown shipped separately VLS9200 Capacity Enclosure Shipping Cartons ltem Description 1 VLS9200 capacity enclosure 10 TB or 20 TB 1 2 1U rack mounting hardware kit 1 3 VLS badge 1 4 SAS cables 2 5 Power cords 2 6 LTU 1 for 10 TB 2 for 20 TB 7 Printed VLS array installation poster 1 Identifying the VLS Shipping Carton Contents 17 VLS9200 Node Shipping Carton oc 2 ltem Description 1 VLS9200 node 1 1U rack mounting hardware kit 1 and documentation Loopback plugs for FC ports 2 8 Gb FC transceivers 2 Power cords 2 Quick Restore CD 1 N 1 oO oa RR OJN Printed VLS node installation poster 1 Ethernet cables 2 and Fibre Channel cables 2 not shown shipped separately
162. coeielencnavoasieaublaced edu nest sesbeseadardyoesaocnatseiandvenceieens 249 Fibre Channel Switch Ay Woes te ctectantnttesebuccretateeniaesd eiaevaalartenscictanaieiaetvelie i vaidldeieucieniet 250 Ethernet Switch 2510 24 SOSCieCtONs xcesoeaseceereliassorennsderscbersiauernndeeselerwvssionnteeesClenwawonradens 252 Ethernet Switch 2OlO 2AG x cssscvsiasectiacnsv svmsed dacs Wonsetswessadacaiuaesbivobiedbaca loadsvbsvivialasedvonevbetcasals 253 Ethernet Switch 6600 24G ccccccssssccccssscccccsscccsessscceesscsceesssesteusessoesssescsscsscssevescesenscoeea 253 EF NN SON see decent ca Secs crass daiee amnnnicuwoadeauaateneatsaoeeed aaah cuncataliacancencmentidece erences 254 C Regulatory lint on ninatOiits424 sacseaseracereseanessanesnaprebnnntepentnnetoeaieneuessaseads 255 Turkey RoHS material content AeelaratiGiies sxccsicevseczsvsovsoarcneceddied dvotstdadeedadekentmulearaysedererermanbeaeles 255 Ukraine RoHS material content declaration ccccccccseecccsseccccueeccceuuececceuucccssuuceceeuaeceseuaeeeaaa 255 Warranty WOMEN ON So c2ttcck set tote vetkedentespoasauatiieeheccanivecesbteeken shapes tadeedoehaanstpatcdeesdeeba a peaeieoe 255 E EN T A A EIEE E AI AAIE AAE A E EA TA 256 e E neice species nec omens va sain emetic aac EAEE E ES 261 Contents 1 1 Introduction The HP Virtual Library System VLS family consists of RAID disk based SAN backup devices that emulate physical tape libraries allowing you to perform disk to virtu
163. configure an additional node as a cold failover node with all the same attributes as the primary If the primary node fails deploy the spare primary node in place of the failed primary node to bring the entire VLS library back online quickly Install the spare primary node into the rack directly above the primary node To deploy the spare primary node 1 Shut down all nodes on the VLS Because the original primary node has failed he secondary nodes should be shut down from the command line of each node Log in to the administrator account on each secondary node using the serial port or keyboard and mouse At the prompt enter shutdownNode 2 Cable the spare primary node exactly as the original primary node was cabled a Move all Fibre Channel cables from the original primary node ports to the corresponding spare primary node ports b Move all Ethernet cables including the USB Ethernet adapter from the original primary node ports to the corresponding spare primary node ports c Connect to the serial port or use the keyboard and mouse ports to connect to the console of the spare primary node 3 Power on the spare primary node The node will run cable checks and configuration checks After several minutes a menu will appear on your monitor asking whether the node is a primary master m or secondary slave s node Recovering from a Primary Node Failure using a Cold Spare Primary Node 233 vls313NO Node0 Video Session Viewer l
164. continuously the port is operating at 1000 Mb s 9 Port LEDs Green overlaid with the port number 200 Component Identification Displays port link information network activity information whether the port is configured for full duplex operation or the speed of the connection depending on the LED Mode selected e Ifthe Link Lnk indicator LED is lit each port LED displays link information for the associated port If the port LED is in Link mode and it is blinking the port has failed its self test The Fault and Self Test LEDs will be blinking simultaneously e If the Activity Act indicator LED is lit each port LED displays activity information for the associated port it flickers as network traffic is received and transmitted through the port ltem Description Status e If the Full Duplex FDx indicator LED is lit the port LEDs light for those ports that are operating in full duplex mode e Ifthe Speed Spd indicator LED is lit the port LEDs behave as follows to indicate the connection speed for the port OFF 10 Mb s Flashing 100 Mb s the flashing behavior is a repeated on off cycle once every 0 5 sec ON 1000 Mb s 10 T M LEDs For the dual personality ports ports 21 through 24 indicates which connector is enabled e T Indicates the 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 port is enabled e M Indicates the mini GBIC port is enabled The blinking behavior is an on o
165. ct Restart All Nodes from the task bar Restart Head Wizard displays 6 Select Yes to reboot all nodes ARNS A CAUTION Rebooting the VLS device places the VLS cartridges back into the same library slots and tape drives they were in at the time of reboot To move the cartridges from tape drives back into the appropriate slots use Force Unload from the task bar visible when you select the tape drive from the navigation tree Rebooting the VLS System 95 Powering Off the System A WARNING AA To reduce the risk of personal injury electric shock or damage to the equipment remove the power cord to remove power from the node before removing the access panel The front panel Power On Standby button does not completely shut off system power Portions of the power supply and some internal circuitry remain active until AC power is removed From the VLS CLI 1 Verify that any backup or restore operation has completed and that the VLS is idle 2 Initiate a shutdown of the VLS by entering shutdownSystem The primary node will report when it has powered down Amber system power LEDs indicate that nodes are in standby mode 3 Press the Power On Standby button on any nodes not in standby mode Amber system power LEDs indicate that nodes are in standby mode 4 If removing the access panel from a node a Wait until the VLS has completed its shutdown operation then press the UID LED button on the front of the node Blue LEDs
166. ctable full self test including media modules Fabric services e Simple name server e Fabric zoning Hardware based Access Control List port Name Server WWN Orphan Zoning All zoning assigned on per node basis even across Multi stage fabrics e Registered State Change Notification RSCN e O StreamGuard e Multi chassis in order delivery e Automatic path selection in Multistage configurations e FDMI device support Voltage 100 240 VAC Current 1 0 A at 100 120 VAC 0 5 A at 200 240 VAC Power 100W maximum with full optics configuration Frequency 50 60 Hz Ethernet Switch 2510 24 Specifications ltem Specification Dimensions 9 3 x 17 42 x 1 73 in 23 62 x 44 25 x 4 39 cm 1U height Weight 4 9 lb 2 2 kg fully loaded Ports 24 RJ 45 10 100 ports IEEE 802 3 Type 10Base T IEEE 802 3u Type 100Base TX 1 RJ 45 serial console port 2 dual personality ports each of which can be used as either an RJ 45 10 100 1000 port or an open mini GBIC slot for use with mini GBIC transceivers Processor MIPS 264 MHz Flash capacity 8 MB RAM ROM capacity 64 MB Packet buffer size 384 KB Latency 100 Mb lt 4 9 us 64 byte packets Latency 1000 Mb lt 2 6 us 64 byte packets Throughput 6 5 million pps 64 byte packets Switching capacity 8 8 Gbps MAC address table size 8000 entries 252 Specifications
167. ctive notification but do not need proactive service delivery and integration with a management platform e HP Insight Remote Support Advanced This software provides comprehensive remote monitoring and proactive service support for nearly all HP servers storage network and SAN environments plus selected non HP servers that have a support obligation with HP It is integrated with HP Systems Insight Manager A dedicated server is recommended to host both HP Systems Insight Manager and HP Insight Remote Support Advanced Details for both versions are available at htto www hp com go insightremotesupport To download the software for free go to Software Depot http www software hp com Select Insight Remote Support from the menu on the right Customer Self Repair 239 17 Documentation feedback HP is committed to providing documentation that meets your needs To help us improve the documentation send any errors suggestions or comments to Documentation Feedback docsfeedback hp com Include the document title and part number version number or the URL when submitting your feedback 240 Documentation feedback A Troubleshooting Using This appendix lists iLO troubleshooting features and also describes some common issues you may encounter while configuring or using the VLS including automigration replication and deduplication issues iLO The VLS supports many of the features of iLO 2 Standard non licensed
168. cuuntcrineatacalecennientise 204 Front Panel WD Siccecciaat iui nich cash iaiulen cosh Guid inten in EE E E EAEE A ound atelier 205 Rear Panel Cormpanenitss ciicscccunniansesaenesvnnudddcadednedewvsdnedseeddduntamednddasandaatekanedaddatandeanepanencidees 206 Base Disk Array EnclosUte xg secs chee certvenas etcvcdonceminnreheniusis A E E A 206 Expansion Disk Array EMmclostite iz lt icscssucenidicee intnontnesnissdenswemengneauestebndwumcnbdoneeervenevencaneles 206 Rear Panel LEDs and Bute iisiccci tas cecwcdsianracineaieusestacertcieniiucrneaneeinetmdouaeeen aaa 207 Base Disk Array Eiic OSS cox dace cescance cad cnnteaaantacedntanecte awamentivddedeoeacsanpandatenendancanbenen tes 207 Expansion Disk Array Eine Ostet oncce ciepntcriennctincrneeuteblareancexdanesdiateennnsisideaevanlats 208 VLS9200 Disk Array Enclosure Components LEDs and Butfons cccccesseceeeeeeeeesteeeeeeeeeeneees 209 Front Panel COMmpOnie iS recencsdhacceutaavetenthinte ates alndecaderanceuedledeceetaenis iets ethane nnnediuediedandonlagise 209 Front Panel Oi age re cdecte tp ocrersSt btiacteesse erent eenei ae na EEA E KEE aaria 209 Rear Panel Componeiteisiiacnicelsatteaiderdinccneidiesr lt aeetricpuisltiatenrcincanalalamatciecetmedleehaiiue teeta 210 Ps Se A Np dnd searen ngee e eena ones sE EEEE TEREE E ESE LEE ESES EAEE 210 Capacity ol 1 c 0 210 1 Omer emer CRE eae one i Pentre eee ence et Renee caret ie Ter aC A ay Nee nee tren Rete eee 211 Rear Panel LEDs and Bu
169. d have an IP address or unconfigured You can use the VLS discovery utility to set the network settings on an unconfigured VLS and to view the network settings of configured devices The utility can also be used to remove LUNs from the user interface after one or more LUNs are no longer configured or have been removed from the VLS NOTE The VLS discovery utility can only be used to change the network settings on a VLS with no IP address Once a VLS has an IP address either through the DHCP or the VLS discovery utility its network settings cannot be changed using the VLS discovery utility Use the CLI command set or Command View VLS to change the network settings on a VLS that has an IP address See Setting the Network Settings using the CLI Command Set page 106 To set the network settings using the VLS discovery utility 1 Insert the VLS Documentation CD into the CD drive on a Windows system that is on the same subnet as the VLS The CD auto launches 2 Click VLS discovery utility The VLS discovery utility opens and lists all the devices it sees on the subnet Figure 8 page 106 The Configured box for a device is checked if the device has an IP address The device type host name IP address if available and serial number are displayed for each device listed Setting the Network Settings 105 Figure 8 VLS discovery utility main window 10 x File Help Below is a list of the devices that were di
170. d ibraries 3 If the library you wish to manage is not already selected select it now NOTE You can only select one library to manage at a time To manage additional libraries repeat the procedure for each library to add 4 Select Submit The Destination Library Details screen displays with the message The library library name was managed successfully You can now create pools for the library and manage your data on the library using automigration You can also unmanage the library at any time See Unmanaging a SAN or LAN WAN Library page 54 for instructions Managing a LAN WAN Replication Library To manage a LAN WAN replication target Managing and Unmanaging a Destination Library 53 1 Select the Automigration Replication tab The Summary for All Managed Destination Libraries screen displays 2 Select Manage LAN WAN Replication Library from the task bar 3 Enter the name or IP address of the host containing the LAN WAN replication target you just created 4 Select Submit 5 On the next screen select the LAN WAN replication target to manage 6 Enter the password you created for that target 7 Select Submit The LAN WAN replication target is now associated with the source You must re manage a LAN WAN replication target if you change the password for security reasons see Re managing a LAN WAN Replication Library page 54 You can now create pools for the library and manage your data
171. d of e All Storage Pools e All Virtual Libraries e Virtual Libraries per Storage Pool displays a pie chart instead of a gauge e Storage Pools per Virtual Library displays a pie chart instead of a gauge Performance History The Performance History tab displays a table of performance data for the selected nodes or devices as designated in the Configuration tab To determine which devices display select one of the following e Nodes e Pre defined Views and then select a view from the list Determine the duration of the data reported in the graphs Valid entries are whole numbers between one and 15 NOTE The longer the duration you select or the more nodes or devices your system has the longer it may take to generate a report To export the CSV data enter the number of days to include in the report and click Export See Exporting CSV Data page 147 for more information on exporting CSV data See Figure 25 page 149 for an explanation of each field in a line of CSV data Figure 25 CSV data fields for VLS performance reports Library OpOVolfe5s35 65535 oloyo sun Mar 09 00 00 17 MST 2008 12050460173520 00 O 600 ltem Data Device name Node number Target device ID Ignore this field Writes Bytes written read N 1 oO oan RR wl rd Bytes written read in last minute Performance and Storage Use Reports 149 8 Time stamp 9 Ignore this field SAN Health The SAN H
172. d with the corresponding icon in the navigation tree Device Status Icon The device status icon in the Command View VLS status banner indicates the overall VLS device health The device status icon is displayed in the status banner regardless of the tab selected NOTE On the Automigration Replication tab the status icon represents the health of the destination libraries not the overall VLS device health See Monitoring Destination Library Status page 65 If multiple system health conditions exist simultaneously for example two components are experiencing problems and have a status of warning and error respectively the icon representing the most serious status is displayed in the status banner 134 Monitoring Figure 14 Device status icon in the status banner Chassis visexamp xyz com A device status icon can be one of four states Unknown A component s operating condition is unknown Contact HP Technical Support Normal All components within the VLS are operating normally amp Warning A component s operating condition has degraded Error A component has failed Navigation Tree Icon An icon appears just to the left of objects in the navigation tree when an unknown warning or error condition is present with a component It also appears just to the left of the parent objects of that component For example if the icon is displayed by Fibre Channel in the navigation tree it will also be displayed
173. d Usage discoverArray Discovers any new arrays added to the VLS updateFC Changes the default FC host port connection settings Where the options are a lt n gt ID number of node to modify 0 optional i lt n gt FC index 0 1 required 1 lt n gt If attached in arbitrated loop mode specifies a hard ALPA value between O and 125 A value of 1 specifies a dynamically assigned ALPA If not attached to an arbitrated loop this parameter is ignored required r lt n gt Port number of the FC port to modify required s lt n gt Preferred speed 0 Auto 1 One GB 2 Two GB 4 Four GB or 10 Ten GB required t lt n gt Preferred topology O Auto 1 Point to Point 2 Loop 3 Fabric or 4 Public Loop required h Displays command usage information optional setOverSubscription Enables or disables oversubscription and specifies the percent storage remaining for notification Where the options are e lt n gt Enable disable oversubscription O Disabled or 1 Enabled required p lt n gt Percentage of capacity remaining for alert notification required h Displays command usage information optional VLS Commands 165 Table 27 CLI Configuration Commands continued 166 CLI Command Set Command Usage getOverSubscription Returns whether the oversubscription feature is enabled or disabled and the capacity remaining percentage for notificat
174. d during shipment If damage is detected contact your authorized service representative Remove the accessory kits and documentation from the shipping cartons Set them aside for later use Place shipping materials back into the shipping cartons Set the shipping cartons aside for later use Rack Planning Resources The rack resource kit ships with all HP or Compaq branded 9000 10000 and H9 series racks A summary of the content of each resource follows Custom Builder is a web based service for configuring one or many racks Rack configurations can be created using o A simple guided interface o Build it yourself model The Installing Rack Products video provides a visual overview of operations required for configuring a rack with rack mountable components It also provides the following important configuration steps o Planning the site o Installing rack servers and rack options Cabling servers in a rack Coupling multiple racks The Rack Products Documentation CD enables you to view search and print documentation for HP and Compaq branded racks and rack options It also helps you set up and optimize a rack in a manner that best fits your environment Unpacking 15 Rack Requirements HP supports the HP System E racks and the HP 10000 Series racks for use with VLS systems Other racks might also be suitable but have not been tested with the VLS Rack Warnings A WARNING _ To reduce the risk of personal in
175. d the controller has placed it offline Replace the drive as soon as possible Off Amber flashing A predictive failure alert has been received for this drive Replace the regularly 1 Hz drive as soon as possible Off Off The drive is offline a spare or not configured as part of an array Fan Locations 11462 Item Description 1 Fan module 1 2 Fan module 2 3 Fan module 3 VLS9000 Node Components LEDs and Buttons 181 VLS9200 Node Components LEDs and Buttons This section identifies and describes the front and rear panel components LEDs and buttons of the VLS nodes Front Panel Components Description Hard drive 1 Hard drive 2 DVD ROM drive Hard drive blank Hard drive blank Video connector HP Systems Insight Display MOIlNI a a AJ wl ny Front USB connector Front Panel LEDs and Buttons 182 ltem Description UID button LED Status Blue Identification is activated Flashing blue System is being remotely managed Off Identification is deactivated Health LED Component Identification Green System health is normal Amber System health is degraded To identify the component in a degraded state see HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations Red System health is critical To identify the component in a critical state see
176. d view current status performance and storage use reports for the entire VLS for individual nodes and for selected devices in Command View VLS You can also view information on the overall health of the SAN You can generate and display the reports online or export the report data in a comma separated values CSV file format see Exporting CSV Data You can also set up automated reports that the system emails to you on a regular basis see Receiving Automated Reports page 154 To view and configure VLS performance storage use and SAN health reports 1 From the System tab select Chassis at the top of the navigation tree 2 From the Tasks displayed at the top of the main window select Reporting The reporting tabs open to Performance History by default Exporting CSV Data Many of the reports allow you to export the data in a comma separated values CSV file format Determine the information you want exported and select the Export or similar button The File Download window opens for you to indicate where to save the file The CSV export file is a text file delivered as a zip Each line is the record for one device and the data fields are separated by commas or columns depending on the program used to view the file Configuring Performance Reports and Notifications On the Configuration tab you can assign default settings for reports and notifications At any time you can change any of these default settings Current Status
177. ddress media server metadata mirroring N node O oversubscription P port mapping primary node RAID 258 Glossary A performance measurement for a host attached storage device or RAID controller A storage device that handles multiple units of media and provides one or more drives for reading and writing them such as a physical tape library and virtual tape library Software emulation of a physical tape library is called a virtual tape library See also virtual tape library An address used in the SCSI protocol to access a device within a target In the case of the VLS a LUN is assigned to each virtual library and tape drive A mechanism of changing the LUN assignments for a specific host An authorization process that makes a LUN available to some hosts and unavailable to other hosts The average time until a component failure can be expected to cause data loss This includes the consideration that RAID redundancy can protect against data loss from the failure of a single component A low level unique hardware identifier for every Ethernet port in the world that is physically stored inside a network card or similar network interface MAC addresses are assigned by the IEEE A computer whose purpose is to move or copy data from one location to another such as from network clients to tape cartridges in a library The data in the first sectors of a disk drive that the system uses to identify virtual disk memb
178. de template click the Remove button for the barcode template The window refreshes when the deletion operation is finished 5 To add a barcode template Enter the barcode prefix one to five alpha characters in the Barcode Prefix box Enter the number of digits for the barcode number in the Digit Length box Enter the barcode suffix one to two alpha characters in the Barcode Suffix box Enter the starting barcode number in the Starting box Click Add to add the new barcode template To add another barcode template repeat these steps Toaongo Freeing up Storage Space Storage space can be freed up by erasing the data on or destroying virtual media that is no longer used such as e Cartridges that are no longer used by a backup application e Cartridges that have been moved to the Firesafe that are no longer needed Use the backup application to erase data on virtual media that is no longer used Destroy virtual media that is no longer needed using Command View VLS See Destroying Cartridges page 129 NOTE Reducing the size of the cartridges in a virtual library will not free up disk space Storage space is dynamically assigned by the VLS as it is used It is not reserved Restarting VLS Device Emulations Restart VLS device emulations e Ifthe VLS locks up e After destroying a virtual device library or tape drive on the VLS and doing so leaves a gap in the virtual device LUN numbering on an Fibre Channel host po
179. defined options To see the graph for a particular pre defined view select it from the Update Existing View list The graph immediately updates to the data for that view To further refine a report you can change the number of days reflected in the graph and the type of error to include in the display Enter the information for either or both of these options and select Update Graph The graph applies those boundaries to the data for the previously selected locations or pre defined view 150 Monitoring Figure 26 SAN Health tab Administrator LA Command View VLS Identity Refresh SAN HEALTH a This tab reports SAN issues seen by the VLS during normal operation story EXPORT DATA Gy SAN Health Export raw data in CSV format for fi ays Ea Gu Physical Capacity The current available range is 1 9 day s Gi Workload Assessment SELECT UP TO 15 LOCATIONS TO DISPLAY LOCATION CATEGORIES AVAILABLE LOCATIONS SELECTED LOCATIONS O Host WWPH O VLS Port Switch Port E aLL Mshow Top 16 cn cfu anew wien E Update existing view view view Update View Delete view Select the date range to view Start date Today Hour of the day hh 15 Going back 1 day s Select the type of SAN error to display SRRs B N BELOW ARE THE TOTALS FOR SELECTED LOCATIONS 41 w lt gt Logical Capacity This tab displays different views of the current logical capacity usage for an individual library or the entire VLS system Logical
180. device emulations are restarted if e A virtual device has been deleted since the last restart creating a gap in the LUN numbering or e A virtual tape drive has been added to a library since the last restart and the default LUN number it was assigned is not consecutive with the other virtual tape drives in the same library Restarting VLS device emulations changes the default LUN numbers as necessary to remove the gap or to make the virtual tape drive LUN numbers consecutive in each library This is done so that the virtual device LUN numbering meets the operating system LUN requirements NOTE When a LUN has been unconfigured or otherwise deleted it may still show up in the VLS user interface Use the VLS discovery utility to refresh the list of LUNs that are present Managing Virtual Device LUNs 11 Operating System LUN Requirements and Restrictions Most operating systems require that each VLS Fibre Channel host port connected to the SAN has a virtual device with the LUN number LUNO and no gaps in the LUN numbering LUNO LUN1 LUN2 and so on If the operating system does not see a LUNO on a VLS Fibre Channel host port when it is scanning for new hardware on the SAN it will stop looking for LUNs on that port and erroneously report that there are no LUNs virtual devices on that port If the operating system sees a LUNO LUN1 and LUN2 but not a LUN3 on the port it will stop looking for LUNs on that port when the gap in the LUN n
181. does when the library policy includes a copy on eject and the media being ejected is either not synchronized or has a status of Mirror Broken If deselected the slot will eject immediately without running a copy If selected a copy job is put in the queue and the system will wait to eject the media until after the copy is complete Scheduling the copy requires that you wait for the copy to complete before moving another tape into the slot Although a status message may display indicating that the copy has begun it may still be in the queue Click Eject The Move Media History screen displays the current status of the eject The possible status messages are Moving Waiting Successful and Failed If the status of the move is still Waiting you can click Cancel to stop the eject Ejecting Media from a Drive into an Empty Mailslot To eject media from a drive into an empty mailslot within the same library l ae a Expand the navigation tree On the appropriate library expand Drives and then select the drive from which to eject the media The TAPE DRIVE DETAILS screen is displayed in the main window From the task bar select Eject Media From the list of empty mailslots that displays select the destination slot for the ejected media Select Submit After the media is ejected the TAPE DRIVE DETAILS screen displays along with the message The media was successfully ejected from the drive into slot destination mailslot num
182. dveericeeaetiescesirepidereeaieneendens 230 Restoring the System with Warm PQUGVEl cscssssmudewesnscucenxcenascneecsesed enenuiobesaseadommennoveedvensstdves 230 Manually Restoring the System nnssssennnnessseonnnessssseenessssssrerssssssernrsrsssrrrerrssssreneerssrerere 231 Re installing the VLS Vic GHGS teen caste lt cieesnievandastuencatyemeepana ondetaddvenasiorabitetinloed dencdetsleaieicens 231 Restoring the Configuration from a Configuration File cccccseeeessececeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeees 231 Manually Rebuilding the Virtual Library Contiguration ccccccccccceesstseeeeeeeeseteeeeeeeseesaes 232 Recovering from a VLS Disk Array RAID Volume Failure ccccccceeceeceeeeeceeeseeeeeeeseensteeeeeeeees 232 Recovering from a Node RAID Volume Failure ccccccccesseeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeecessseeeeeeesesesteeeeeeenes 232 Recovering from a Primary Node Failure using a Cold Spare Primary Node cccccseeeeeeeeeees 233 16 Support and Other Resources 1nsss cntedcavesesaceressuaiqueseuasauesauatecsuaeepeerores 236 Related Informatio N xc iscimewerensasasssabeanaanadiosiasboinbendvaediocyerbilesinaysddrsiadamannageiadeanuninincyersiiatelantes 236 DG CUISINE siarcaaarianinentalieuddovencsenes enn nedsnianantusnudineddaeagen nea a Ea REEE e e A Ea 236 Websites sicscxis sia nbigstend atin iaee e a A E EE E E RE ERa 236 Document Conventions and Symbol c csesaisedenccescnenngsadederdadyencnndeandarencadneinddadedanmn
183. e To prevent damaging the system be aware of the precautions you need to follow when setting up the system or handling parts A discharge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor may damage staticsensitive devices or micro circuitry This type of damage may reduce the life expectancy of the device Proper packaging and grounding techniques are necessary precautions to prevent damage To prevent electrostatic damage e Avoid hand contact by transporting and storing products in static safe containers such as conductive tubes bags or boxes e Keep electrostaticsensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at staticfree workstations e Cover workstations with approved static dissipating material Use a wrist strap connected to the work surface and properly grounded earthed tools and equipment e Keep work area free of non conductive materials such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and foam packing e Place parts on a grounded surface before removing them from their containers e Always be properly grounded when touching a static sensitive component or assembly e Avoid touching pins leads or circuitry Grounding Methods to Prevent Electrostatic Damage There are several methods for grounding Use one or more of the following methods when handling or installing electrostatic sensitive parts e Use a wrist strap connected by a ground cord to a grounded workstation or computer chassis Wrist straps are flex
184. e An error occurred that disabled the port Port Activity LED on Green data is passing through the port bottom for each port Ethernet Switch 2510 24 Components LEDs and Buttons This section provides images and descriptions of the front and rear panels of the Ethernet Switch 2510 24 Front Panel Components 11981 ltem Description 1 Console port 2 10 100Base TX RJ 45 Ethernet ports 1 through 24 numbered from left to right top to bottom 3 10 100 1000 T dual personality ports 25 and 26 4 mini GBIC dual personality ports 25 and 26 Front Panel LEDs and Buttons a 11962 ltem Description Status Clear button When pressed with the Reset button in a specific pattern any configuration changes you may have made through the switch console the web browser interface and SNMP management are removed and the factory default configuration is restored to the switch 2 Reset button Press to reset the switch while it is powered on This action clears any temporary error conditions that may have occurred and executes the switch self test Also resets all network activity counters to zero 3 Locator LED Blinking blue Locate function is active Firmware controlled can be set to on or blinking Off Locate function is disabled Ethernet Switch 2510 24 Components LEDs and Buttons 197 ltem Description Fault LED Status Orange O
185. e ID for a base ai disk array enclosure is zero 0 the enclosure ID for an attached expansion disk power up array enclosure is nonzero Continuous F The display has a problem If the Fault Service required LED is also lit an enclosure level fault occurred 2 Hard drive status LED Blue Hard drive is selected for identification purposes only Amber Hard drive has failed Flashing amber Flashes at constant 1 Hz when hard drive is predicted to fail Off Hard drive is operating normally 3 Hard drive activity LED Green Hard drive is online but there is no hard drive activity Flashing green constant 1 Hz Hard drive is rebuilding Fluttering green There is hard drive activity or the array is running a background parity check of the data in the RAID set Off The hard drive has no power is offline or not configured 4 Unit locator LED Blinking white Enclosure is selected for identification purposes only on for 3 4 seconds at Off Not active power up then off 5 Fault Service required Amber An enclosure level fault occurred Service action is required The event LED has been acknowledged but the problem still needs attention on for 3 4 seconds at Off No fault power up then off 6 Power On OK LED _ Green Enclosure is powered on with at least one power module operating on for 3 4 seconds at normally power up blinks for Off Both power modules are off up to 2 seconds during boot then on
186. e and download a support ticket Click Create New Support Ticket The ticket is listed under Active Ticket Collection Process until it completes VLS Critical Diagnostics Services 103 After completion the ticket is listed under Available Tickets click Download to download the ticket or Delete to delete it e Start Web Console Enter the service administrator password You can use the web console just as you use a serial session when connected to the serial port of the VLS node The web console may be slower than a serial session depending on the condition of the network 104 User Interfaces 9 Configuration This section describes how to configure and manage the VLS network settings user preferences Fibre Channel host ports optional virtual libraries tape drives and cartridges Setting the Network Settings Before you can open a Command View VLS or secure shell session set the network settings The network settings can be set using either the VLS discovery utility see Setting the Network Settings using the VLS Discovery Utility page 105 or the CLI command set using the serial user interface see Setting the Network Settings using the CLI Command Set page 106 Setting the Network Settings using the VLS Discovery Utility The VLS discovery utility looks for all the devices on the same subnet as the Windows computer on which it is running It then lists the devices and indicates whether they are configure
187. e array from being configured or a license violation that prevented the array from being added d Click Run Pool Policy The VLS adds the new LUNs to the storage pools If you opt to cancel instead you can return later and add the new storage to the storage pools using the Run Pool Policy task see Adding New Arrays to the Storage Pool page 48 e Click Return to return to the Storage LUNs screen Removing VLS Capacity Remove capacity by decreasing the number of VLS disk array enclosures installed in your VLS system At a minimum one disk array enclosure must be installed for every node Removing disk array enclosures from the system destroys all current virtual tapes in the system Once disk array enclosures are added to the VLS the only way they can be removed from the a VLS storage pool is using the following procedure 1 Power off the nodes 2 Remove the disk array enclosures 3 Power on the nodes 4 Run the Rebuild All Storage Pools operation see Rebuilding all Storage Pools This deletes the disk array enclosures from the configuration and reformats the remaining disk array enclosures into working capacity Configuring the Storage Pool Policy 46 VLS automatically creates storage pools on the VLS arrays in the system based on your storage pool policy Storage pools are defined in terms of whole arrays one base enclosure and three capacity enclosures Use the Storage Pool Policy Wizard to set the stor
188. e eeeetencateed de cet aesemeentesocandyouseGeceento sean aeas hese hacenesaa vee stacndutiasevetaieces 190 Rear Panel LEDs and BUnOMS sdancaccehictacincncedenedi lt badcncortinecitectareeabiedehlecsdewiccndiueceahneeeiian 191 Fibre Channel Switch 4 10q Components LEDs and BUttons c eeccceeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeeseneees 191 Front Panel opm ani etitsoces ssccunsdsseiicasnessoawobebnsdev uonsnanededad vos antmontalgndaidinenexdnuuenedeleenenneeteenes 19 Front Panel IEDs and BURONS s soisi irainen a i aaia AaS 192 Heartbeat LED Blink Pateiseacecacnanconsesacedecencceaictecadaddadwtmenansedearatiewauciadesihenedueeausaacdead 193 Fibre Channel Switch 4 16q Components LEDs and BUttons ccceeccceeeceeeeteeeeeeeeesseteeeeeeeees 193 Front Panel Copper erits cc xcmestnsaucaaede cxensotneeesiver Grundwnceneuenes dyin cntussanas nencsinsablenesesventvanaenienes 193 Front Panel LEDs and Buiten se sestecateiiunter dceteeciechantecnseatvesladeuntensecaiecade iegaterencalncdletinieliazala 194 Rear Panel C oIMPONe Ni sesc 8G isso se ateciserepranesaehacehiansnuseuedotenes atewedduisebastaasanvasyabendsuiaanonacetecke 195 Rear Panel LEDs and BROOM cicec ce saves caneeteteatencdveicnctiiarstensciveavaldldiatoedinieedleieeieeeeem 195 Fibre Channel Switch 8 20q Components LEDs and BUttons scccceceeeceessteeeceeeessstseeeeeseees 195 Front Panel Corn Gta tits sec Zeseceareteccteros stents ecedecemnteneectansieceredeeecdiasaleccisiren tered
189. e first graph shows the actual traffic the y axis displays the usage in MB and the x axis displays the day of the month dd and time of day hh data points The second graph shows the replication ratio logical size of the backup to amount of data replicated for each day time data point To export the replication traffic CSV data enter the number of days to include in the report and select Export See Exporting CSV Data page 147 for more information To change the information displayed in the graphs 1 Follow Step 1 in Logical Capacity page 151 2 Select a specific virtual library to view from the list or use This Device to include all libraries Performance and Storage Use Reports 153 3 Select Update Graphs The graphs update to reflect the data options you chose Deduplication Job History This tab displays the count of both active and pending jobs over time to reveal trends in the deduplication jobs such as when the job load is usually light This is useful information for job scheduling To export the replication traffic CSV data enter the number of days to include in the report and select Export See Exporting CSV Data page 147 for more information To change the information displayed in the graphs l 2 Follow Step 1 in Logical Capacity page 151 Select Update Graphs The graph updates to reflect the data options you chose Receiving Automated Reports You can receive automated reports on a reg
190. e following sections describe the operations for LAN WAN replication target Creating a LAN WAN Replication Target The first step in configuring replication is the creation of the LAN WAN replication target Do this via Command View VLS on the destination VLS Any virtual library or slot range within a virtual library can be configured to act as a LAN WAN replication target 1 In Command View VLS select the Automigration Replication tab 2 Expand LAN WAN Replication Targets in the navigation tree 3 If the library on which you want to add a LAN WAN replication target appears in the list select that library The Summary for all LAN WAN Replication Targets screen displays all LAN WAN replication targets created for that library If the library does not appear in the navigation tree it means that the library does not yet have any LAN WAN replication targets on it Select LAN WAN Replication Targets in the navigation tree instead The Summary for All LAN WAN Replication Targets screen displays all LAN WAN replication targets created for all libraries 4 Select Create LAN WAN Replication Target from the task bar to open the Create LAN WAN Replication Target screen 5 Enter a name for the LAN WAN replication target 6 If you did not select your library from the navigation tree select the library on which you want to add the target from the Local Library menu The Available Slot Ranges section indicates the slots that are available on
191. e job Click Cancel in the appropriate row to cancel a Background job NOTE During a job one cartridge per storage pool involved in the job is created to support the background process This cartridge can be found under the VLS cartridge list prefixed with StorageExerciser_ You can only start one Background job at a time You must have at least 5 GB of free space on your VLS in order to run a Background job If less than 5 GB is available the Background job will fail The status table displays e Start Time the date and time the job began e End Time the date and time the job ended e Current Iteration the number of the current iteration of the read write process e Failed Iterations the number of iterations that failed due to decompression error or other error e Data Written the amount of data in bytes that has been written for all iterations combined e Data Read the amount of data in bytes that has been read for all iterations combined e Status the state of the jobs can be In Progress Cancelling Cancelled Complete or Complete with Errors The Complete with Errors status signifies that one or more read operations failed this may mean the job uncovered a disk error If a disk error has occurred view the Log Monitor Summary To delete jobs from the status table check the jobs in the Select column and then click Delete Selected Log Monitor Summary The Log Monitor Summary disp
192. e navigation tree 3 Select the LAN WAN replication target you wish to clear from its source 4 On the LAN WAN Replication Target Details screen select Clear Managed Source VLS on the task bar 5 The screen refreshes and a message indicates that the connection has been cleared 6 Connect the target with a different source library See Managing a LAN WAN Replication Library page 53 NOTE Clearing the connection leaves both the source and destination libraries intact This is different from unmanaging a library where the source library is deleted Automigration Replication Reporting The VLS stores job status and history for all automigration and replication jobs allowing reports to be generated and displayed online or exported in a comma separated values CSV file format You can customize and view job status and history reports for the VLS automigration feature in Command View VLS Status of all Cartridges The Summary of All Cartridges Managed by Automigration Replication screen provides a quick view of the status of all cartridges that are managed by automigration replication Each managed cartridge is counted among only one of the listed statuses with the exception of the first status which can contain cartridges listed elsewhere Echo Copy Pool Summary e Not migrated in Copy Pools notification limit contains cartridges that have not successfully mirrored within the time limit set for the echo copy pool assigned in
193. e onto this physical tape Used Tape Tape Export Tape contains export data Full Tape Tape Export Tape contains export data and is ready to be ejected Signal to tape operator to unload this tape from the physical library Unloaded Full Tape Tape Export Tape contains export data and has been ejected This tape should be included in the collection to be sent to the target site Waiting for Load Tape Export Tape that contains data that will be imported when the tape operator moves it into an Import pool slot Signal to tape operator to load this tape into the physical library Tape Currently Not Needed Tape Export Tape in an Import pool slot that is in the catalog but not needed yet Signal to tape operator to remove the tape from the physical library Bad Tape Tape Export Unable to write tape It does not contain any export data and is ready to be ejected This tape should NOT be sent to the target site Unloaded Tape Tape Import Tape that contains data that will be imported later Waiting for Load Tape Import Tape that contains data that will be imported when the tape operator moves it into an Import pool slot Signal to tape operator to load this tape into the physical library Tape Currently Not Needed Tape Import Tape in an Import pool slot that is in the catalog but not needed yet Signal to tape operator to remove the tape from the physical library SAN Destination Libr
194. e switch When the POST completes with no errors the Heartbeat LED blinks at steady rate of once per second When the switch is in maintenance mode the Heartbeat LED illuminates continuously All other blink patterns indicate critical errors In addition to producing a Heartbeat error blink patterns a critical error also illuminates the System Fault LED The Heartbeat LED shows an error blink pattern for the following conditions e 2 blinks Internal Firmware Failure Blink Pattern e 3 blinks System Error Blink Pattern e A blinks Configuration File System Error Blink Pattern e 5 blinks Over Temperature Blink Pattern Internal Firmware Failure Blink Pattern An internal firmware failure blink pattern is 2 blinks followed by a two second pause The 2 blink error pattern indicates that the firmware has failed and that the switch must be reset Momentarily press and release the Maintenance button to reset the switch System Error Blink Pattern A system error blink pattern is 3 blinks followed by a two second pause The 3 blink error pattern indicates that a POST failure or a system error has left the switch inoperable If a system error occurs contact HP support Momentarily press and release the Maintenance button to reset the switch Configuration File System Error Blink Pattern A configuration file system error blink pattern is 4 blinks followed by a two second pause The 4 blink error pattern indicates that a configuration file sys
195. ealth tab displays information on the number and types of errors encountered on the SAN See page 151 To export the CSV data in the Export Data section of the screen enter the number of days to include in the report and click Export When you open the SAN Health tab the graph at the bottom of the screen displays information for the top 16 locations from all location categories with the most errors You can change the information displayed in the graph 1 Select a location category 2 Select the specific locations of interest from the Available Locations box 3 Using the gt gt button move the locations of interest into the Selected Locations box These are the locations that will display in the report You can use the lt lt button to remove locations from the Selected Locations box 4 Select another location category and repeat steps 2 and 3 5 Select Update Graph The graph updates to reflect the information you chose You can also create a pre defined custom view based on the locations you choose 1 Follow steps 1 through 4 above 2 Enter a name for this view in the Create a New View field 3 Select Create View This view is now available as a selection in the Update Existing View list To edit an existing view select it from the Update Existing View list adjust the selected locations rename the view if desired in the name field and select Update View Select Delete View if you want to remove that view from your Pre
196. eclaimed or Dedupe Complete the backup disk space has been partially or full reduced by deduplication and the ratio represents compression plus deduplication The Dedupe Estimate in GB follows the same logic Deduplication Cartridge Report version 3 4 x The cartridge report provides information on the deduplication of your backup jobs at the cartridge level 1 Select Cartridge Report from the navigation tree or from the task bar of the Deduplication Summary screen The cartridge report options display 2 Select View corresponding to the report you want to view You can view all cartridges or view a specific barcode prefix or virtual library The screen displays the list of cartridges meeting the set criteria 3 From the results list select a cartridge to see all of the backup jobs on that cartridge The report includes the following information e Library e Barcode e Logical Size the size of the backup data sent to the VLS before deduplication and compression e Physical Size the disk space currently used to store the compressed backup which varies over time as deduplication processes the backup and reclaims redundant disk space e Dedupe Ratio Estimate the estimated deduplication ratio based on the Logical Size divided by Physical Size Viewing Deduplication Statistics and Reports 89 NOTE If a cartridge is full and all jobs on it have been delta differenced except for one job that is waiting f
197. ected Windows nodes before installing the VLS system the Windows tape device paths can break change or disappear when RSM is run Windows runs RSM by default When RSM initially discovers any removable storage device such as a tape drive it will make an entry in NtmsData database Once a tape drive is listed in this NtmsData database the Windows OS can potentially either break the second level OS path name bind or re bind it to a different OS path name even with RSM in a Disabled state Netbackup has a 6 character barcode limit Only 6 characters of the actual VLS cartridge barcode numbers will be displayed Delete the Windows NtmsData database and put the RSM into the Disabled state using the following procedure Disconnect the Windows node from the SAN label and unplug all FC cables 2 Delete all files and folders under the system32 NtmsData folder location of the system32 folder varies between Windows versions 3 In the Microsoft Computer Management window enable and start the RSM 4 Bring up the Removable Storage utility in the Microsoft Computer Management window 5 Verity there are no Tape or Library devices listed other than the direct attached devices such as the CD ROM drive 6 Stop and Disable the RSM service in the Microsoft Computer Management window 7 Reconnect the Windows node to the SAN plug all FC cables back in to the original HBA Ports 8 Repeat this process on
198. ector 14 USB connector on primary node connects to USB Ethernet adapter then to port 1 of switch 2510 24 15 iLO 2 NIC connector service port ltem Description 1 iLO 2 NIC activity LED 11457 Status Green Activity exists Flashing green Activity exists Off No activity exists 2 iLO 2 NIC link LED Green Link exists Off No link exists 3 5 FC port LEDs Red green and amber on or flashing Power on LED that is on flashing represents the link speed red 1 Gbps green 2 Gbps amber 4 Gbps Online I O activity Red green and amber flashing alternately Firmware error Red green and amber off Power off 6 10 100 1000 NIC 1 activity LED Green Activity exists Flashing green Activity exists Off No activity exists 7 10 100 1000 NIC 1 link LED Green Link exists Off No link exists 8 10 100 1000 NIC 2 activity LED 176 Component Identification Green Activity exists Flashing green Activity exists ltem Description Status Off No activity exists 9 10 100 1000 NIC 2 link LED Green Link exists Off No link exists 10 UID button LED Blue Identification is activated Flashing blue System is being managed remotely Off Identification is deactivated T Power supply 2 LED Green Normal Off System is off or power supply has failed 12 Power supply 1 LED Green Normal Off System is off or powe
199. ed s lt s gt Storage pool name StoragePool_ optional y lt n gt Cartridge type 2 required h Displays command usage information optional getCartridges Returns a list of the cartridges that have been created All cartridges have both a VLS filename cartridge name and a barcode label This command returns the following cartridge metadata e Storage pool the cartridge resides SD_1_0 e Cartridge VLS filename e Cartridge capacity in GB e Consumed capacity in GB e Cartridge type e Timestamp value for when it was last loaded e Whether or not it is write enabled 0 or write protected 1 e Library to which it belongs e Barcode label getCartsByLib Returns a list of the cartridges associated with the specified library Where the options are a lt s gt Name of library Library_O required h Displays command usage information optional getCartsByBarcode Returns the cartridge metadata for the number of cartridges indicated having the specified barcode Where options are b lt s gt Barcode prefix required i lt n gt Starting numeric value for the cartridges created with this template required n lt n gt Ending numeric value for the cartridges to retrieve required h Displays command usage information optional 168 CLI Command Set Table 27 CLI Configuration Commands continued Command Usage removeCartridge Deletes the speciti
200. ed a destination slot for each mailslot Click Next Step A confirmation screen displays Click Load The Media Move History screen displays the current status of the move The possible status messages are Moving Waiting Successful and Failed If the status of the move is still Moving or Waiting you can click Cancel to stop the move Automigration will then automatically create a matching blank virtual cartridge in the source virtual library defined for this echo copy pool if one does not already exist A CAUTION Any tape moved into an echo copy pool in this way will be considered blank even if it contains data Loading Media into an Echo Copy Pool for Overwrite To load an expired tape a tape that was previously backed up to and is being reused from a mailslot on a destination library into an echo copy pool use Load Media for Overwrite From Command View VLS l 2 3 Select the Automigration Replication tab In the navigation tree expand Destination Libraries and then the library of interest Select Mailslot to display the list of mailslots on thot library 60 Automigration Replication I 10 11 From the task bar select Load Media for Overwrite to open the Load Media for Overwrite screen From the drop down box select the copy pool you want to load the media into For all mailslots the destination slots are automatically populated with the first available slots To keep the automatic assignment skip to S
201. ed cartridge and its user data from the VLS Where the options are a lt s gt VLS filename of cartridge to delete required b lt s gt Barcode value of cartridge to delete required c lt n gt Capacity of cartridge to delete in gigabytes required f Force This parameter is ignored and is present only for backward compatibility optional 1 lt s gt Name of library with which cartridge is associated Library_0 required s lt s gt Storage LUN name SLun_ optional h Displays command usage information optional getStorageCapacity Returns the total usable storage capacity of the storage pool Where the options are a lt s gt Storage pool name StoragePool_ optional h Displays command usage information optional getStorageCapacities Returns a list of the usable storage capacity of each storage pool on the VLS getStorageLuns Returns a list of the storage LUNs on the VLS List includes the storage LUN name IP address storage pool number number in storage pool and so on for each LUN getStorageLunsByArray Returns a list of the storage LUNs in the disk array Where the options are a lt s gt Disk array IP address required h Displays command usage information optional getStorageLunsBySP Returns a list of the storage LUNs on the storage pool Where the options are a lt s gt Storage pool name StoragePool_ optional h Displays command usage inf
202. ed the current time is within the policy window Set this value to a number greater than zero to prevent aborted or multiple mirror operations on a cartridge where the backup application mounts the cartridge writes to it unmounts the cartridge and then repeats this cycle multiple times during a backup window At End of the Policy Window what happens to active jobs when the policy window is over The options are Allow Active Jobs to Complete Cancel Active Jobs and Cancel Active Jobs if Less Than 0 complete If you select the last option enter the percentage completion in the field Echo Copy Pool Operations 57 LAN WAN libraries e Priority the priority this echo copy pool takes over other copy pools during the backup window This can be High Medium or Low e Deduplication Timeout only if you selected deduplicated replication on the previous screen if the cartridge fails to deduplicate within the timeout limit you set the entire cartridge is copied over in non deduplicated mode e Send notification if cartridge not replicated in the copy pool threshold The system will send a notification if this many hours have passed and the cartridges have not replicated e Start mirror of Out of Synch cartridges see above for LAN libraries e At End of the Policy Window see above for LAN libraries 12 Select Next 13 Beneath the policy settings you just entered enter the details of the window duration e Start Da
203. edudentaenanenserecseentuentntd dendmcrancunntned darddenantie 113 Mapping LUNs by Devices occur naceuciwietinen aaah A AE 113 Mapping LUNs by THOSE goss svtunee ces ccs ti cnstiscereias ide a Gi etenelo esd dn dniawtande nds dv snvionetiwedeewaeee 114 Setting Up th Isl eiaematass orcs talon aera is a a tbat a aa aet 115 Dual Port Virtual Devices missionis ssoi uies diusi i tin eissis ia siie 116 Creating a Magy le ME sire g pemmeen eee cenee to ea etn nn ce cette to ter ene rere ETE EEE EEEE 116 Editing a Virtual AI oe aareccseeteaeetsantctauiecesnices ecaneay seca co tomrstaen aa a i i 118 Creating Tape Dives c2siseeinstassiudccetureiardarihvaianiarelsaiasniaseniaeeaaeianaasieinaisieienieinunts 118 Eee es AI RN epee Neca EE E too kiw acme sore A 119 Destroying a Virtual Une h yscccicn ats 2c deyiedelanacenteidcnaie idl aemetusdentdleianaceamicevetbaleaed ee eniceeialecsenen 120 Destroying a Tape Dive seese onan AEE ETE S eer A 121 TO MEE EASE EEE 122 Changing the Account Passwords aici at decneiysatertvntenleuiededetavehealeeatncucedarhtrerers lane eirenlatieacieciiets 122 Managing High AVN UN oe soca eedencepocantececieawuntondgeenisenady vecemepaeticainvennceiedeeeetden torsiveeesaereet 122 Array Dual APM MUN cscri aiei la chance yet Oka ta ea ued E earn deat tinal TEE EN 122 load MN IN cere oes eecreinerdassecies inson eie ae i i eaei a i i 122 LUN Path Ur hilo Viste eich ns tar piso eden abla alot nave snoree se ension cea mein tabana wp ease
204. eeeeeeenseeeeeeees 37 Cabling Fibre Channel Switches ci s 28 0cexisenbaeien iestcusbeaceeaden atc dunieeiaaiaaetd dowwesuaedeeeapenede 39 Installing the VLS9000 Interswitch Link Kit ccccceceesccceeceeeeeseceeeeeeecesneeeeceeeeseteaeeeeseseneetseeeeeeess 40 Reconfiguring Ethernet Swit Wes 2 aacucesusssdcten icnsiavsiadedenta varia usaceanel bane niadee tion sarMernianasame Neus 40 Installing XPAK Wats ONG SIS aos occesscereussncetoncedscesenstonseneeusudbaneseaecs casei niyeeneisturebecardeeentecowels 41 Applying ISL Kit Labels rerisiosninenesnii r EE RE E 42 Installing Interswitch Fibre Channel Cables aeccesecssnausdeovedersesdsnemnsnteedsceeseneudedexseceareayusensenedvedas 42 Installing Interswitch Ethernet Cablesice ccsn trveecnsivettceicadveaishesenedadetlagiewd hala eaesteen Quad 42 Contents 3 3 Multinode Setup ccccccccccccccsssseseeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaasaasaaeeeeees 44 Configuring the Primary Node 0 asiincspcnesecarathiorerpcactecadenueiaeele Ratvenasoeenieieiiariietee nats 44 Configuring the Secondary NGOS Sis cycccucnterusin ays tec cuitct crcl wleneiebasieicpalentiarnennieeriaitlerscmvids 44 A Soage CG iPIG UNH GI easier ccnsnwsrevossverecnisnsesasesusesausincerasesaeessesmensianseienanesd 45 Managing VLS Capac thy sscaxisescsnsnamanecinenidesaquaataandbeialsiaseadenaletesaeasssntunsandeayieseadenseanvasaniuaninnceds 45 Adding VLS Capacity sesiet ane ee to ee ene are oe mE EE E re ene Snr earns REEE E
205. eeees 26 Cabling Base and Capacity Enclosures aconicicicicesissicentonchdeisnaker oarkoeeiiabnxicneereueadiadatoeneneeees 26 Installing the VLS Node into a ROCK 2cic 2iccnansacecevedas ancnenteavdandendnenentyaaneed vextuenaneacnedarsenenendneeeidas 28 Cabling the NOG c casecteaucnccanerscieaed ususesi E iea EEEE E AE EEEE EAA a 29 Installing the VLS High Performance Node into a Rack eccceecccceceseseteeeeceeeenneeeeeeeseeeesteeeeeeeess 30 Cabling External Connections scpsnchad ites cee ctenetciteac ctu cindertetsaenceupeeetindel aacareeetiaedileardanicnaiavas 30 Installing the Ethernet Switches 6600 into a RaCkiccseicsscxsdcovscenausdsavansunaedencesdvoudotsnsnceareenasnednecedias 31 Installing Cage Nuts and Rail Plangesziee cc cdecisicncrenteavvsaivahanecekeativelecereeieersteeaiaeanticoneds 32 Attaching Rails to the Ethernet Switch GG0024 Gi cc ccneecsscnscceindevwles sarieoeteantmnsenaledaebivevemGuadenses 32 Mounting Ethernet Switch 6600 24G into the Rack icricecesteerecoereieiini nieces 33 Cabling Ethernet MNS esac eereetces ithe coreerattecnedd carelaenenun tex Sueaveisedeosdeeedaxusuiocdoaneeuedin dieiuaavdedeuses 34 Installing the Ethernet Switch 2510 24 into a Rack ccccccccceeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeececeesseaeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeens 35 Cabling Ethernet Switch 2510524 a u01122 lt ocesisteauesdnacentencniaw cies aanelile renal sdeeale 36 Installing the Fibre Channel Switches into a Rack cccccccceceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeececeeseeaeee
206. een received for this drive it also has been selected by a management application On off or flashing Steadily blue The drive is operating normally and it has been selected by a management application On Amber flashing A predictive failure alert has been received for this drive regularly 1 Hz Replace the drive as soon as possible On Off The drive is online but it is not active currently Flashing regularly 1 Hz Amber flashing regularly 1 Hz Do not remove the drive Removing a drive may terminate the current operation and cause data loss The drive is part of an array that is undergoing capacity expansion or stripe migration but a predictive failure alert has been received for this drive To minimize the risk of data loss do not replace the drive until the expansion or migration is complete Flashing regularly 1 Hz Off Do not remove the drive Removing a drive may terminate the current operation and cause data loss The drive is rebuilding or it is part of an array that is undergoing capacity expansion or stripe migration Flashing irregularly Amber flashing regularly 1 Hz The drive is active but a predictive failure alert has been received for this drive Replace the drive as soon as possible Flashing irregularly Off The drive is active and it is operating normally Off Steadily amber A critical fault condition has been identified for this drive an
207. een updated to the new firmware a Done button appears Do not select Done until you complete the next step 9 Manually power cycle the disk arrays 10 When the power cycle is complete select Done It may take several minutes until the system is back online Resetting the Disk Array Information Use the Reset Array Information function to reconstruct the display of array components in the Command View VLS navigation tree following the removal of a disk array or enclosure A CAUTION Follow the procedure in Removing VLS Capacity page 46 when removing an array from the system or removing an enclosure from an array 1 Navigate to the Manage Virtual Disks screen see Managing Disk Arrays page 124 2 Select Reset Array Information from the task bar The screen provides a caution about resetting the disk array information 3 Click Accept The screen displays a message that the reset has completed successtully Setting the RAID Mode If your VLS is located at a remote data center and failed hard drives cannot be replaced in a timely manner 48 to 72 hours you can set the global VLS RAID6 configuration to include a hot spare for each RAID set This feature allocates one spare hard drive per enclosure that will automatically take over for a failed drive After you replace the failed drive the new drive becomes the spare A CAUTION This feature requires running the Rebuild All Storage Pools operation Rebuild All
208. eenciivavencinesdsladadsteeaeatedeetas 128 Moving SiG eS sat seaceonasancdectdancoapenincundeternebeaensonsandaidsdandetheaqanddegacattcanescaceensuantangnecende 128 Deleting CarnridgeSorisminpsiseriierii in aerated eeenee 129 Unloading a Cartridge from a Drives saissncsenssvenincnencaenvvovedd scwamcouiwareriveneveneunieteceeeesanmentienee 130 Adding and Removing Barcode Templates iicsiiiciecicetsesicsiceivesessesnieediceledaceieresadieindennenseic 130 Freeing Up Storage SO GCS asic uievlarsdbaievagaasienanddiaiislanauwwedindd EE EEEE E E ETEA EAER E E EE Ea 131 Restarting VLS Device EiitlahOnsccciccdexsecs tee cedpciereiencdbveceuetidearennieediabtenniaieneedlaieieeene 131 Updating the Art VIAN cacao 2h eran aitened cas scersegesddeadotes wsiacsimrexatistadetecuop wares goueteuuesanaceeemensn map ueeeiiens 132 Saving Configuration Settings cteerarelecaleenstsinndalasataccubdcnntedtesaluiacndss ted bevalsteuventenen laraleatentetieciie 133 Ee aE is Merce rane rene ere renee Merete T AE AE A reer AEE veh rete 134 Status Information in the Status PONE Zc secesrvintnioseesededenssniecudenderksedanocumssekaidsmeneoreskaceducuseaaieerkedte 134 Statis CONS siririn rinise e TEE E EEEE EEE EA EE EE ETR 134 Device Status ICOM inisieustacstsmuseniddecreuesdepudadetidecuesitenuniulanrabbdamnvenennioheashauuanuiuunveostibebesamupimabeunees 134 Navigation Iree ICOM wissisnercateasecelasennronheainvevrnentesaleaiivaiaiaineaangdinaie R an r E RRA pi neidia 135 Notification
209. eesenseeeees 142 Viewing Additional Information about a Libary isicecc 2 cbdconweiensidysentcentnctvarmanucenics 143 Viewing Additional Information about a Cartridge cccccccccscccececeesssessseeeeneesssseeeees 144 libraries VieWi sepesi smeiti a r E a anon a E a aS 145 Cartridges VI cree Lote teaiaelarund inca ute ual dasaatvecintd ebene tiobuieteaseid2tncdietvesatauendeeeteanenaumttees 146 Performance and Storage Use REGOMHS xicccesivendveniecienncnivnntdadanaheeseniwentnediyisheesionuvedindialsesbecnatels 147 Exporting CSV CGS sa aqus44ausiariadexiseddanaenndseilvesdairsenamis egies EEEE E E E TEN EEE E TEES 147 Configuring Performance Reports and Nofifications ccccccccccceeceesseeeeeeeessesseeeeeceseesseeeees 147 Current Status TAL seater treenis e Eo s as ET E E RITE A ESEE 147 Performance History Velliyiceicaieista tidetemrdendesiebiceencteneuaaslanicuvedtada laa ladedenerealeradinaahaecenes 148 SAN Health Tab and INNO ONS caxcchasvecscccsetsssudssu sdeesiesdeansemuieedaveueneauiwansSodeererneamenseees 148 Physical Capacity INGi nea NOiS cated oss teasacedeshenctun scat ucs wc bunttantualicadnerensientaientledereereneiaa 148 logical Capacity INGWMCONONS x c2 5ciintaticrnecianvedinicdunies sichuitces outed nine alone 148 Current SIGUE ercsi tited rencard neoon E EEEE NOSOROGA SE 148 Performance IMISIOy 2 a cottrantectraiar consent i i E ER eae ieee 149 FIN Tre IE E 150 logical Capaci ance ene nen ee eel Pree el eRe Eee re
210. em Insight Display the same way for the VLS9000 and VLS9200 systems See Accessing the HP Systems Insight Display page 178 HP Systems Insight Display and LEDs The display provides status for all internal LEDs and enables diagnosis with the access panel installed To view the LEDs access the HP Systems Insight Display EF a POWER 246 8 97 iiie PROCS 864 Pity 220 810 40 ltem Description Status 1 Power cap LED To determine Power cap status see HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations 2 NIC LEDs Green Network link exists Flashing green Network link and activity exist Off No link to network exists If power is off the front panel LED is not active For status see Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons 3 AMP status Green AMP mode enabled Amber Failover Flashing amber Invalid configuration Off AMP mode disabled All other LEDs 186 Component Identification Amber Failure Off Normal For possible failure causes see HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations NOTE The HP Systems Insight Display LEDs represent the system board layout HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations When the internal health LED on the front panel illuminates either amber or red the server is experiencing a health event Combinations of illuminated system LEDs and the internal health LED
211. eme Connecting a Destination Library to a VLS9000 To connect the destination library to the VLS9000 1 Connect your destination library to the VLS by connecting the library to the Fibre Channel switches in the VLS connectivity kit 2 Reboot the VLS Upon reboot the device detects the newly connected destination library Managing and Unmanaging a Destination Library To manage a library is to enable automigration by connecting the source library to a destination library that is already on the VLS Until you manage the destination library it cannot communicate with the source The process for managing destination libraries is different for SAN libraries than for LAN WAN libraries See Managing a SAN Library page 53 or Managing a LAN WAN Replication Library page 53 An unmanaged library is a library that is not recognized by and using automigration or replication The process for unmanaging destination libraries is the same for both SAN and LAN WAN libraries See Unmanaging a SAN or LAN WAN Library page 54 Managing a SAN Library To manage a SAN library 1 Open the Automigration Replication tab 2 From the task bar select Manage SAN Automigration Library The screen displays all eligible libraries Libraries that appear on the list but are greyed out either have no drives or have multiple drive types and therefore cannot be managed Also if ia are no unmanaged drives the system will return the message There are no unmanage
212. en Power cap Amber Power cap has been exceeded flashing amber Power cap Green Power is available green VLS9200 Node Components LEDs and Buttons 187 IMPORTANT If more than one DIMM slot LED is illuminated further troubleshooting is required Test each bank of DIMMs by removing all other DIMMs Isolate the failed DIMM by replacing each DIMM in a bank with a known working DIMM Hard Drive LEDs The hard drive LEDs are the same for the VLS9000 and VLS9200 systems See Hard Drive LEDs page 180 Hard Drive LED Combinations The hard drive LED combinations are the same for the VLS9000 and VLS9200 systems See Hard Drive LED Combinations page 181 VLS9200 High Performance Node Components LEDs and Buttons This section identities and describes the front and rear panel components LEDs and buttons of the VLS nodes Front Panel Components ltem Description 1 Quick release levers 2 Systems Insight Display Hard drives DVD ROM drive Video connector alana AJOJN USB connectors 2 188 Component Identification Front Panel LEDs and Buttons ltem Description UID button LED Status Blue Identification is activated Flashing blue System is being remotely managed Off Identification is deactivated System
213. en displays the result of the test Success or Failure If the test failed details are provided NOTE The connectivity test only works if the replication target VLS is at the same firmware version or higher than the source VLS 84 Automigration Replication 6 Deduplication Deduplication is the functionality in which only a single copy of a data block is stored on a device Duplicate information is removed allowing you to store more data in a given amount of space and restore data using lower bandwidth links The HP virtual library system uses Accelerated deduplication NOTE The deduplication feature is only available on systems running VLS software version 3 0 or later This section describes deduplication including getting deduplication running on your system configuring deduplication and viewing reports NOTE See the HP VLS Solutions Guide for more detailed information How It Works HP Accelerated deduplication compares the most recent version of a backup to the previous version using object level differencing code It places pointers in the earlier version that identify duplicated content in the new version Deduplication then eliminates the redundant data in the earlier version while retaining the complete new version You can improve deduplication performance simply by adding additional nodes NOTE Deduplication takes place after the data has been processed to the backup tapes Therefore any data b
214. enetes caueieuiarensiataneieiiaverslet accycraiadanets 182 Front Panel Onn sola zcercecacndacneadsduneacuteanee pendence adnenauncgenedeteatiaasndecandeatantienanadeaetementas 182 Front Panel LEDs and Butlons acccneace ccna atineaonwerawenecueidee 182 Rear Panel coef rth snes ices da oust dnicca oe Du de mG obesde nies hed srt vena odd ddan Gn mex uvuuaecwindas 183 Rear Panel LEDs and Butonsrwst drretscieclvidedscatedecaitvedetannbtelacelocencdienteatersleunreleueatiuslatecen 184 System Board Cine NSIS oscksechsatscosaciecadecdinsanetae Ris cnedy ye anaceniiekdwesescsedude Mandan toremereMieeenesens 185 Accessing the HP System Insight Display scsieseectinccnatertecssteciyictatdtetanmtivsuisinlel avec pewleieteaes 186 HP Systems Insight Display and WEDS ccciesetinsdouiencssacscedevesaibesecesdivinennsieidedls memsenetiesdseigiowd 186 HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations c cccsseeeeeeereees 187 8 Contents mele DIEN i DEI 188 Hard Drive LED Cambios a dncatecdedeonssyscuseencieceeedyiavbedletstdi ensues beasesuetioasnadeldssauasdvoncebedoa 188 VLS9200 High Performance Node Components LEDs and BUttons ccccsccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenees 188 Front Panel Comments ts Suwsvsiecececedsecepemdseredtiest aweaueseclstiersmumantdoaed siuumdauionnucdeeesmmapueccauels 188 Front Panel LEDs and Buttons aicrstecstvcsencicaneteretecpthtcvneectacalacachteercluctioneanicrencaterateaennteecasiae 189 Rear Panel Cin cec
215. eplication Target Slot Details On the navigation tree select Slots from the expanded replication target list to view the replication target slots The screen displays the barcode and last successful echo copy for each slot The last successful echo copy is intended to notify you of problems with the echo copy but is not necessarily related to the Cartridge Status or Last Mirrored fields on the Summary for Slots or LAN WAN Replication Target Operations 77 Summary for Cartridges screens The state can be unknown when only the header transferred to the tape when nothing transferred to the tape during the transfer of data or when a data transfer has failed Setting the Global LAN WAN Replication Target Configuration I 2 3 4 6 Click the Automigration Replication tab In the navigation tree expand Configuration Summary Select Global LAN WAN Target Configuration From the Default Compression Setting for LAN WAN Replication Targets menu select whether the compression for LAN WAN replication targets is on Yes or off No by default If your network has a WAN accelerator that performs compression installed between the source VLS and the target VLS setting this to No will usually speed up data transfers during replication Enter a new port number for unencrypted data transfer only if you need to change it from the default Your firewall may require that the data transfer use a different port number Click Submit
216. eplication tab and select Import Tapes from the navigation tree 3 Select the export pool you want to import 4 From the Local Library list select the physical library from which to copy the tapes 5 Enter the start and end slots from the available slot range 6 Select Submit 7 Select Import Export Pools from the navigation tree then select the newly created import pool to see the Tape Import Pool Details screen The screen prompts you to load full tapes and unload finished tapes as needed If a physical tape is damaged or otherwise unavailable you can select Skip for that tape and transmit the data over the LAN WAN after the import process completes 8 After the import process completes e The tape import pool is automatically destroyed on the target site e The tape export pool is automatically destroyed on the source site e The echo copy pool on the source will change to the Ready state and deduplication enabled replication over the LAN WAN will begin at the next screen Forcing Non Deduplicated Replication For systems using replication with deduplication the Non Deduplicated Copy and Forced Non Deduplicated Copy tasks allow you to schedule a replication job that forces the whole cartridge non deduplicated data to replicate immediately regardless of whether or not the cartridge is within the policy window You can only perform this task when the cartridge is in the Backup Postprocessing state Non Deduplicated Copy tas
217. equired h Displays command usage information optional getNodeNames Returns the list of nodes in the VLS getNodeFault Returns fault information for the specified node Where the options are a lt s gt Node name Head_0O required h Displays command usage information optional getNotificationsCount Returns the number of notification messages specified counting back from the most recent Where the options are n lt n gt Maximum number of notifications to return required h Displays command usage information optional VLS Commands 171 Table 29 CLI Monitoring Commands continued 172 CLI Command Set Command Usage getNotificationsDate Returns all the notification alert messages that occurred starting with the specified date Where the options are d mm dd yy on or after this date required h Displays command usage information optional deleteNotifications Deletes the specified notification alerts from the VLS Where the options are id lt s gt D number of notification to delete required h Displays command usage information optional addEmailServer Specifies an E mail server with an SMTP gateway to route notification alerts from the VLS Where the options are a lt s gt E mail server address required c lt s gt node IP address required s lt s gt Sender email address optional h Displays command usage information o
218. er Good green On 3 Expansion controller Unit Locator white Off 4 OK to Remove blue Off 5 FRU OK green On 6 Fault Service Required amber Off 7 SAS In Port Status green On 8 SAS Out Port Status green On Figure 7 VLS Node LED Status During Normal Operation ltem Description Status 1 Internal health LED LED is green 2 External health LED power supply LED is green 3 NIC 1 link LED LED is green if primary node LED is off if secondary node 4 NIC 2 link LED LED is green 5 Power supply LEDs LED is green 7 Rebooting the system is complete when you receive the Initializing node then Initializing for node completed messages for all nodes in the systems notifications in Command View VLS NOTE Under problem conditions you can use iLO Standard non licensed to power on the system You can also use it to determine if the nodes are powered on or off Rebooting the VLS System From VLS CLI 1 Verify that any backup or restore operation has completed and that the VLS is idle 2 Open a secure shell session and log in as the administrator See Opening a Secure Shell Session page 102 3 Initiate a reboot of the VLS by entering restartSystem From Command View VLS Verify that any backup or restore operation has completed and that the VLS is idle Click the System tab Select Chassis in the navigation tree Under Maintenance Tasks select System Maintenance Sele
219. er or not it is deduplicated Available Capacity Ratio Storage Pool View To navigate to the Storage Pools link The physical storage currently available for additional backup data This is the total Usable Capacity less the Used Capacity The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity e On the navigation tree select System gt Chassis gt Capacity gt Storage Pools The Storage Allocation by Pool screen displays the statistical graph that depicts all the storage pools in your VLS The graph also displays the total capacity of each storage pool Figure 19 Storage Allocation by Pool Screen Expand Collapse Refresh E Chassis vis300n0 usa hp com E Capacity Storage Allocation by Pool GB Storage Pools gt Virtual Libraries gt Cartridges E gt Deduplication SsoragaPool a meen Sraerees 08 W g LUN Mapping 44 661 08 m Virtual Libraries E K Storage Pools Storage LUNs Cartridges tie Disk Arrays StoragePool 2 44 661 08 Storage Pools All 1 30f3 Storage Pool Total Physical Capacity Reserved for System Usable Capacity Logical Data Used Capacity Available Capacity Ratio es ol_1 44 66 TB 44 1478 0 00 KB 0 00 KB 44 1478 NIA os 44 36 TB 5 41TB 1 7778 42 5978 3 44 os 29 56 TB 3206TB 9 84TB 19 71 TB 3 3 1 The Storage Pool Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 15 Storage Pool Capacity Table Storage Pool The name o
220. erere a e EREE E a E E ERE E E 216 OVID CD DRIVE cus E E E bintiieveniareniandeiiuebeneures 218 Power Supp yasai ene mee eee Crone AE EEE ee Tecnico mene one EE TEE EE ee ates venice cere 218 F n MOGUIE ciccecomenmiataaemnumen daemon dada eG a umoR RNG 220 EBDIM M eene aegis essen seabed EE Laat een E moe ean 221 Replacing a Primary NGG c 26 c scsstsmceseinaiaeeetan cts sianaviye uate crea EAE EN E Eai 222 Replacing a Secondary NODS i22 1cssaceuriereepnocncucnsnuntaderagdaagencunsieatdanedtientiaudadedatanduenedeedactetancal 223 Replacing All VLS9000 Nodes with VLS9200 Nodes co ccincicissssnencrseinciadseedsevaemrentieisiaeueess 223 Fibre Channel Switch Replacement ccccccccccceeeseeneeeeeceseeneeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeesteeeeeeeees 224 Fibre Channel Transceiver Replacement ccscctticerstereteciecaiisededenciedlecziaveledacetealerelaviredsveiealuclncseeae 225 Ethernet Switch Ive DIC SMICNT geact ees 2acrenrqsduetcdes oarsoezaationieseerasnped bitetdustd censdeeRictieeeaseesee Sickiee eas 225 VLS9200 Disk Array Component Replacement aseyncniciasiieieshaclricucinihareyediveda deh eneleanieen 225 Hard Drive es se e E E E E S E E S 225 Power IWiOClUl e lt 1 1 4 sscnteraanadapeuenis aielnial anion E e E E EA E ERE 226 RAID or Expansion SiN Esco pyar patereregechiorepocdesesatctvenraeetsotckinrexacdeniesteveieuecoraeedusnandees 227 ODi sacer RECOVER A EA 230 Recovering from Operating System Pomlire sigseteccujtenncsatvraieschideneesnanve
221. ers The act of creating an exact copy or image of data A server that contains the hardware and firmware required to run a virtual library system This refers to a hardware assembly containing a power supply cooling fans motherboard expansion boards and internal hard drives to support the VLS system A condition that exists when more virtual media storage is configured on a VLS than there is physical storage available Because the VLS dynamically allocates storage space as user data is written the VLS allows you to allocate more storage for virtual media than is physically available A mechanism of assigning a LUN virtual device such as a virtual library or tape drive to a specific FC host port Port mapping allows you to load balance the LUNs among the FC host ports to maximize bandwidth At this time you must manually load balance the virtual tape drives in a VLS A computer node that provides primary administrating and control for backup and restore operations on a server cluster and provides communication and control for all secondary servers on the system A RAID volume consists of more than one drive but appears to the operating system to be a single logical disk RAID improves performance by disk striping which involves partitioning each drive s storage space into units By placing data on multiple disks I O operations can overlap in a balanced way improving performance RAID 1 level data storage RAID5 level da
222. es e g ejecting media and where noted Otherwise where the information refers to physical cartridges for replication assume virtual cartridges instead NOTE Replication is deduplication enabled if you have purchased the appropriate replication and deduplication licenses and your backup ISVs and data types are supported for deduplication Check the Accelerated deduplication ISV support matrix at hitp www hp com go ebs to see if your system supports deduplication Tape Initialization When you first configure deduplication enabled replication on your VLS and set up an echo copy pool to a LAN WAN destination the first round of data migration is not deduplicated because there is not yet a set of backups on the target VLS to deduplicate against Because the first full set of backups can be very large the VLS system includes a tape initialization process You can transport the first full set of backups to the target VLS using physical tapes rather than the network This tape initialization process is optional and must be enabled by the administrator when creating the echo copy pool The tape initialization process works very generally like this Set up the LAN WAN replication target on the remote site Set up an echo copy pool on the source site Run a standard deduplication backup on the source site Export the full backup to physical tapes Transfer the physical tapes to the remote site Import data from the tapes onto the remote LAN
223. es as a check of the initial status before you make the change If the status of the protocol is Yes you may skip this procedure Enter config The command line now reads HP ProCurve Switch 6600 24G config Enter spanning tree force version rstp operation Enter spanning tree This turns on the spanning tree protocol as configured Enter write memory This writes the changes to non volatile flash memory Enter show config Verify that the commands in Step 9 and Step 10 are present Enter exit Enter exit Enter exit Hardware Installation 15 A prompt asks if you want to log out Enter y The switch logs off and the spanning tree is now reconfigured to include the new switch 16 Repeat this procedure for the remaining Ethernet switches in racks 1 and 3 NOTE After reconfiguring the Ethernet switches power down the entire VLS system See Powering Off the System for instructions Installing XPAK Transponders The XPAK transponders XPAKs plug into the 10 Gb Fibre Channel ports in the front of the 20 port Fibre Channel switches The 20 port Fibre Channel switches are included in the 40 port connectivity kits Med Hm ltem Description 1 Fibre Channel port 20 2 Fibre Channel port 21 3 Fibre Channel port 22 4 Fibre Channel port 23 1 Locate four XPAKs supplied in the interswitch link kit contents 2 Remove the port covers from ports 16 through 19 on the 20 port Fibre Channel switches
224. es over operation of the storage system until you install a new controller A controller can be hot swapped which means you can replace one controller without halting I O to the storage system or powering it off as long the other controller is operational VLS9200 Disk Array Component Replacement 227 IMPORTANT RAID controllers should only be replaced while the array is powered up to ensure that the array will copy configuration data from the surviving controller into the newly added controller A CAUTION When removing a controller allow 60 seconds for the failover to complete before fully inserting a replacement When you remove a controller with the disk array enclosure powered on install a replacement controller or a blank within two minutes Otherwise the disk array enclosure might overheat NOTE A damaged midplane may appear as though a controller has failed If you replace a controller and it does not remedy the original fault replace the whole disk array enclosure To replace a RAID controller or expansion controller 1 Disconnect all cables attached to the controller in this order e Fora RAID controller 1 Fibre Channel port O 2 SAS output port 3 Ethernet port e For an expansion controller 1 SAS port O input port 2 SAS port 1 output port 2 Turn the thumbscrew on each latch counterclockwise until the screw disengages from the controller Do not remove the screw from the handle 11727
225. estination library connecting 53 import export details 68 managing 53 status 65 status of all 65 unmanaging 53 DHCP deselecting 165 selecting 107 164 diagnostics see VLS Critical Diagnostics Services disaster recovery disk array enclosure RAID volume failure 232 node RAID volume failure 232 operating system failure 230 Discover Unconfigured Storage 45 disk array enclosure adding 45 adding hot spare 126 front panel components 209 front panel LEDs 209 powering off 96 powering on 91 rack mounting 25 rack mounting order 22 RAID volume failure recovery 232 rear panel buttons 211 rear panel components 210 rear panel LEDs 211 specifications 248 disk array managing 124 disk beaconing 127 DNS server address setting 107 164 document conventions 236 documentation providing feedback on 240 domain name setting 107 164 Drive Assessment Test 73 E Echo Copy on Source Cartridge Eject 57 echo copy pool availability window start day 58 start time 58 window duration 58 creating 56 loading blank media 60 loading media 60 operations 55 restoring from a physical cartridge 59 echo copy pool policy at end of the policy window LAN WAN 58 SAN 57 deduplication timeout 58 echo copy on source cartridge eject 57 priority 58 retention days 56 send notification if cartridge not migrated in 57 send notification if cartridge not replicated in 58 sizing factor 56 source cartridge size lim
226. evices the host can see such that the virtual device LIN numbers include a LUNO and no gaps in the LUN numbering See LUN Masking and LUN Mapping for instructions There is a gap in the LUN numbering on the FC host port Most operating systems will stop looking for virtual devices on an FC host port once a gap in the LUN numbering is detected For example if LUNO LUNI and LUN3 are mapped to an FC host port the operating system will see LUNO and LUN1 When it does not find a LUN2 it will assume there are no more LUNs on the port and stop looking Remove the gap in the LUN numbering by editing the host s LIN mapping see LUN Mapping or if a virtual device has been destroyed on the VLS creating a gap in the LUN numbering restart the VLS device emulations The VLS firmware will reassign LUNs to the virtual devices as necessary to remove any gaps in the LUN numbering See Restarting VLS Device Emulations There are two levels of logical device binding in the Windows OS At the first level of logical device binding the FC HBA binds the FC WWPN and FC LUN Fibre Channel layer devices to a SCSI Bus Number SCSI Target ID and SCSI LUN SCSI layer device At the second level the Windows Removable Storage Manager RSM will bind the SCSI Bus Number SCSI Target ID and SCSI LUN SCSI layer device to an OS Tape path name Only tape drives are subject to this second binding level NOTE If you have built and conn
227. ewrneneedendcauasens 236 Rack Stability isisisi aa a E EE E R aE 238 Contacting AP assess aera erresa ena noose Ped REESE slate eet EE EE TEE 238 Betore you Contact HP eceisacteretoilours tennant den cree saber EEE EA E EE RS 238 HP Contact liiarnationssnsxstasvoreieietaen na hercine nn eesi ae ia iese aseet 238 S bseription Seinos i iiie EERE REEVE A TE R Ea 238 Customer Self Repdif sssissesirisrisrssnirirsisnriis ri inisin nE EE EE EENES E E a 239 HP Insight Remote Support SOM WONG 27 2 ctscalcdececaretonedclerareterensmladerevuensarneneleraenennesendeelaunels 239 17 Documeniaion feedback 25 anc nn cota 240 A Tovbe nosiniai E E EERS 241 Using Oseo tae E E E E A E e E A EO 24 VES Common Issues i 2i uciiridnsiivecricmupanwanni esau 241 Automigration and Replication Issues cccccccsssseceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeceeneeeeeeesesessseeeeeeeseseaeeeeeseneaaes 244 Decale rh ISSO SS irisito i aE E a nat wr nlam cee eek a 245 LAs cal ial o a cope Rene Renee A E A MTOR Tero E A D fey Meee fer Ser eter 246 ES OO IN dees aos Sacred EEE EEE EEEE EE EEE EEEE EEE 246 VIS9200 Nodes reniris siiin a EE EENE EEE A 246 VLS9200 High Performance Node cccccsssssccceeessesesneeeeecesssseeceeeesesesneeeeseesseseaeeeeeseseaaes 247 VIS9000 Disk Array Eines Wie scscececdiecxcicneve soot ssecaset cnc tan seanem sacs a a E ia 248 10 Contents VES9200 Disk Array EndlosUresr dasseni a a a a 248 Fibre Channel Switch A LO Gha voces nsdetacercy doonsns
228. f 12 ministrator Step 8 of 12 The Cartridge Parameters window opens Figure 12 page 119 O Command View VLS Not entity o Create Virtual Library Wizard To add a barcode template a b c d e f Enter the barcode prefix one to six alphanumeric characters in the Barcode Prefix box No special characters are permitted Enter the number of digits for the barcode number in the Digit Length box For example if you enter 3 the barcode numbers will be 001 002 003 etc Enter the barcode suffix one or two alphanumeric characters in the Barcode Suffix box No special characters are permitted Enter the starting barcode number in the Starting box Click Add to add the new barcode template To add another barcode template repeat these steps Click the radio button next to the barcode template you want to use to create the cartridges Creating Cartridges 119 NOTE NetBackup has total barcode limit of eight characters HP Data Protector has a total barcode limit of 16 characters Check your user guide for other backup applications Click Next Step Select the type of physical cartridge to emulate Click Next Step Enter the number of cartridges and the cartridge size in the appropriate boxes Figure 13 page 120 The default number of cartridges is based on the maximum number of slots configured for the virtual library The default cartridge size is based on the actual size of
229. f the default Fibre Channel host port settings e Viewing and deleting VLS notification alerts e Configuring VLS mail and SNMP notification alert settings e Editing VLS account passwords e Enabling and disabling storage capacity oversubscription e Managing storage pools e Establishing automigration policies and copy pools and performing destination library operations e Viewing VLS hardware and virtual device status User Interfaces e Installing VLS firmware updates e Saving and restoring VLS network settings and virtual library configurations e Restarting VLS device emulations and Command View VLS e Viewing and saving VLS trace log files Command View VLS is installed on the VLS and communicates through the LAN Users can open a Command View VLS session from a web browser on the LAN or HP Systems Insight Manager Window Regions Command View VLS windows consist of five regions Not all regions are displayed on all windows Creasey DETVAN C EET ltem Description 1 status banner 2 task bar 3 status pane 4 notifications pane 5 navigation tree NOTE You can enlarge or reduce any region on the window To change the size of a region position your cursor on the border of a pane and press the left mouse button while simultaneously dragging the border Opening a Command View VLS Session from a Web Browser NOTE Before you can open a Command View VLS session
230. f the maximum speed Max indicator LED is lit the Mode LEDs light for those ports that are operating at their maximum possible link speed 100 Mbps for 10 100 ports and 100 FX fiber optic ports and 1000 Mbps for 100 1000Base T or gigabit fiber optic ports e If the attention indicator LED is lit each Mode LED lights briefly for each network event that could require operator attention for example late collisions or CRC errors 1 The blinking behavior is an on off cycle once every 1 6 seconds approximately Ethernet Switch 2810 24G Components LEDs and Buttons This section provides images and descriptions of the front and rear panels of the Ethernet Switch 2810 24G Front Panel Components 11980 Item Description 1 Console port 2 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 ports 1 through 20 numbered from top to bottom left to right 3 10 100 1000 T dual personality ports 21 through 24 4 10 100 1000 mini GBIC dual personality ports 21 through 24 Front Panel LEDs and Buttons 11983 ltem Description Status 1 Clear button When pressed with the Reset button in a specific pattern any configuration changes you may have made through the switch console the Web browser interface and SNMP management are removed and the factory default configuration is restored to the switch 2 Reset button Used to reset the switch while it is turned on This action clears any temporary error conditions that may have occu
231. f the storage pool This is a link to display information about the storage pool Total Physical Capacity Total physical storage capacity purchased and installed on the system This is the sum of all LUN capacity in the pool minus the space reserved for formatting overhead Monitoring Storage Capacity 14 Table 15 Storage Pool Capacity Table continued Reserved for System The space required for system overhead and metadata Storage Pool 1 or the FireSate can have more space reserved than other storage pools due to Deduplication metadata that can be up to 2 TB Usable Capacity The physical storage capacity available for user data This is the total Physical Capacity less the space reserved for the system Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage used for data whether or not it is deduplicated Available Capacity The physical storage currently available for additional backup data This is the total Usable Capacity less the Used Capacity Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity Viewing Additional Information about a Storage Pool To view additional capacity information for a particular storage pool e On the Storage Allocation by Pool screen click the Storage Pool name field The Storage Pool Capacity screen displays the over all capacity information for the selected storage pool and a graphic
232. failed Command View VLS To view the current and historical notification alerts for all the VLS hardware components 1 Click the Notifications tab The Notifications window displays 2 Click the View Details link for a notification alert to view more information about the notification alert To view the notification alerts for a specific VLS hardware component 1 Click the System tab 2 Select the object in the navigation tree that represents the hardware component that you want to view The notification alerts relevant to the object selected and its subobjects in the navigation tree are listed in the notifications pane 3 Click the View Details link for a notification alert to view more information about that notification alert To delete notification alerts 1 Click the Notifications tab The Notifications window displays 2 Select the boxes next to the notification alerts that you want to delete 3 Click Delete Selected The notification alerts are deleted from the Notification window and can no longer be viewed E mail Notification To receive VLS notification alerts by e mail you must edit the e mail server settings and then edit the e mail settings Editing the Email Server Settings NOTE You must enter the email server settings before editing the email settings To edit the email server settings from Command View VLS 1 Click the Notifications tab The Notifications window displays 2 Select Edi
233. ff cycle once every 1 6 seconds approximately Ethernet Switch E6600 Components LEDs and Buttons Front Panel Components Item Description 1 Console port 2 Auxiliary port 3 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 ports 1 through 24 numbered from top to bottom left to right 4 10 100 1000 mini GBIC dual personality ports 21 through 24 Front Panel LEDs and Buttons ton poen ooo 1 Power LED Green The switch is operating correctly Ethernet Switch E6600 Components LEDs and Buttons 201 Item Description Status Off The switch is not operating correctly or is not receiving power and Test Status LEDs 2 Fault LED Orange The switch has encountered a fatal hardware failure or has failed its self test This LED comes on briefly after the switch is powered on or reset at the beginning of switch self test Blinking orange A fault has occurred on the switch one of the switch ports or the fan The status LED for the component with the fault will blink simultaneously If just the Fault LED is blinking the switch could be attached to an RPS but not receiving power Off Indicates that there are no fault conditions on the switch 3 PS Temperature Fan PS Green The switch is receiving power Blinking orange A fault has occurred on one of the power supplies The PS Status LED Fault LED and on the back of the switch the failed power supply LED PS1 or PS2 will all blink simultaneously
234. g 41 to 104 F 5 to 40 C Non operating 4 to 158 F 20 to 70 C Humidity Operating 10 to 90 non condensing Non operating 10 to 95 non condensing Altitude Operating O to 10 000 ft Non operating O to 50 000 ft Shock Operating 4 G 11 ms 20 repetitions Non operating 30 G 13 ms trapezoidal Vibration Operating 5 500 Hz random 0 2 G Non operating 2 200 Hz random 0 5 G Power consumption Supported power range 100 to 240 VAC operational Frequency 50 to 60 Hz Heat output 80 watts nominal 90 watts typical maximum ltem Specification Dimensions 17 x 20 x 1 70 in 43 2 x 50 8 x 4 32 cm 1U height Weight 15 Ibs 6 80 kg fully loaded Ports per chassis 16 Fibre Channel 4 GB 2 GB 1 GB ports upgradeable in 4 port increments full duplex auto negotiating for compatibility with existing 2Gb and 1Gb devices 4 Fibre Channel 10 GB XPAK MSA compliant ports full duplex 1 Ethernet 10 100 BaseT with RJ45 port Multi switch fabrics e Supports all topologies including stack cascade cascaded loop and mesh with E_Port e Supports multiple links between switches e In order delivery of frames in all Multi switch and multi link configurations e Adaptive Trunking and Intelligent Path Selection on all 10Gb ports Fabric port types All ports can assume the following states e F_port Fabric e FL_port Fabric loop public loop e E_port Switch to switch e Ports are auto d
235. g TURs to the VLS Stop the Removable Storage Manager or Removable Storage program and set the startup type to Disabled on the Windows host using the Services utility located under Control Panel gt Administrative Tools VLS performance is being reduced by frequent tape drive polling Windows Removable Storage Manager service RSM polls tape drives on a frequent basis every three seconds in Microsoft Windows 2000 and every second in Windows Server 2003 Windows built in backup software NTBACKUP relies on the RSM polling to detect media changes in the tape drive In SAN configurations this RSM polling can have a significant negative impact on tape drive performance For SAN configurations HP strongly recommends disabling RSM polling Refer to the Microsoft website at http support microsoft com default aspx scid kb en us 842411 or complete the following steps to disable RSM polling 1 Install the 1 0 4 0 or later driver 2 Disable device polling in the system registry e Establish a CLI session e Log into the system as Administrator e Run RegEdit and navigate to the pela Po e To disable RSM polling edit the AutoRun value found in this key A value of 0 zero indicates that polling is disabled a value of 1 indicates that polling is enabled 3 After completing steps 1 and 2 reboot the affected system 4 Repeat this procedure for every server visible to tape drives
236. ge information optional getLibOpenSlots Returns a summary of the slot status for each defined library open used total destroyLib Deletes the specified library from the VLS This operation takes several minutes to perform Where the options are a lt n gt Node number on which the library emulation resides O optional f Force This parameter is ignored and is present only for backward compatibility optional 1 lt n gt LUN number of the library to delete required h Displays command usage information optional getTapeTypes Returns a list of all tape drive emulation types available Displays each tape drive emulation s name type product revision and vendor information Where the options are 1 List only licensed types optional h Displays command usage information optional createTapeDrive Creates the specified number of tape drives of a particular type and associates them with the specified library Where the options are a lt n gt Node ID of node on which the tape drive emulation will reside O required c lt n gt Data compression O Disabled 1 Enabled required 1 lt n gt LUN number to assign to tape drive 1 to 128 optional la lt n gt Node number on which the library emulation of the library to associate with the tape drives resides 0 to 3 required 11 lt n gt LUN number of library with which to associate tape drive 0 1 required n lt n gt Number of tape drives
237. ge needs Echo Copy Concepts Echo copy acts as a transparent disk cache to the physical library so that the backup application writes to virtual cartridges in the virtual library Automigration then automatically schedules the copies from virtual cartridges to physical cartridges with matching barcodes based on the automigration policies the user establishes Echo copy is managed through the automigration software not the backup application For that reason e The destination library is not visible to the backup application so it does not need licensing e Copy traffic is no longer routed through the SAN e All destination tapes created by echo copy are in the native tape format so they can be restored directly from any tape drive or library that is visible to the backup application When determining whether to use echo copy pools remember e The backup application will not be aware of any copy failures e Any mistakes in destination library media management will also affect the virtual cartridges For example if new tapes are not loaded into the destination library the physical copy will not exist 50 Automigration Replication e The destination library can only be used for copy operations e Echo copy is a full tape copy rather than an incremental change copy so it can be an inefficient use of media if you are using non appending copy pools in your backup jobs An echo copy pool is used to define which destination
238. ges no data will be lost you can still access data beyond the end of the newly set capacity limit The Sizing Factor also controls the size of the source cartridge The system will size the source cartridge using the Source cartridge size limit or the sizing factor whichever value is the smallest Echo Copy on Source Cartridge Eject When the backup application ejects an out of sync virtual cartridge the matching destination cartridge will not be ejected until the copy is complete When the copy on eject option is not checked then the time to complete the copy and eject the destination cartridge will depend on your start time and window size When this option is checked then the copy will be started as soon as possible depending on available drives regardless of start time and window size Then the destination cartridge will be ejected Send notification if cartridge not migrated in the copy pool threshold The system will send a notification if this many hours have passed and the cartridges have not migrated Start mirror of Out of Synch cartridges When a cartridge goes into the Out of Sync state you can schedule the mirror operation to begin only at the start of the policy window or to wait for the specified number of hours to pass after it enters the Out of Sync state provided the time is within the policy window The default is to schedule mirror jobs immediately upon entering the Out of Sync state provid
239. ground jobs 157 CLI commands 156 configuring 155 defined 155 log file fields 159 log monitor summary 158 read only jobs 156 storage pools configuring 46 rebuilding all 47 rebuilding one 47 viewing 47 storage reports 147 storage space freeing up 131 storage dynamically assigned 109 131 Subscriber s choice HP 238 suffix removing for deduplication 87 support and other resources 236 Support Ticket library drive 72 Support Ticket library 72 support ticket creating 161 symbols in text 237 symbols on equipment 237 system status monitoring 134 individual hardware and virtual device status 134 navigation 135 notification alerts 135 overall device status 134 171 T tape drive creating 118 166 deploying firmware 72 destroying 121 details 68 replacing 71 uploading firmware 71 tape export stopping 74 tape initialization defined 52 exporting data for 74 importing tapes for 75 tape shredding see secure erasure tasks Cancel Tape Transport 74 Clear All Faults 160 Clear Compression Faults 160 Copy Now 69 Create Virtual Library 116 Discover Unconfigured Storage 45 Edit Policy 46 Edit Virtual Library 118 Eject Media 70 Export Cartridge Details 81 Export Log File 81 Forced Non Deduplicated Copy 75 267 Initiate Tape Transport 74 Load Blank Media 60 Load Media for Overwrite 60 Load Media for Restore 59 Move Media 69 Non Deduplicated Copy 75 Rebuild All Storage Pools
240. gs 133 171 configuring automigration replication GUI 83 current status reports 147 deduplication options 86 notifications 147 262 Index logical capacity 148 physical capacity 148 performance history reports 148 performance notifications 147 performance reports 147 primary node 44 SAN health notifications 148 SAN health reports 148 secondary nodes 44 storage 45 conventions document 236 text symbols 237 Copy Now 69 copy pools 55 see also echo copy pool changing slot mapping for LAN WAN library 63 changing slot mapping for SAN library 62 deleting 65 details 68 editing 62 moving to another library 62 copying data to physical tape 12 Create Echo Copy Pool 56 Create LAN WAN Replication Target 76 Create Virtual Library 116 CSV data exporting 147 current status report 148 customer self repair 239 D data restoring from LAN WAN virtual cartridge 60 restoring from SAN physical cartridge 59 data path failover 123 Data Protector configuring 87 date and time setting setting 165 viewing 165 deduplication backup report 88 cartridge report 89 configuring 86 defined 85 installing license 48 licensing 86 overview 85 system capacity statistics 90 viewing reports 88 viewing statistics 88 Deduplication Timeout 58 deleting copy pools 65 virtual disks 125 workload assessment template 153 Deploy Firmware 72 destination library 53 see also SAN destination library or LAN WAN d
241. h Fibre Channel switch are required for each VLS base enclosure Up to two VLS arrays may be installed for every VLS node For maximum capacity install two arrays for every VLS node installed For maximum performance install one VLS array for every VLS node installed A VLS system can support a maximum of eight 1U or 2U high performance nodes on non deduplication systems and six nodes on deduplication enabled systems A VLS system can support a maximum of 12 arrays of 1 TB or 2 TB drives To expand beyond 12 arrays you must purchase and install a second connectivity kit Install a maximum of four arrays per rack Depending on the configuration a VLS system requires one to four racks If possible install multiple racks next to each other See the HP VLS9000 Virtual Library System Quickspec on the HP web site http www hp com go vls for performance data NOTE HP recommends ordering a factory configured rack to eliminate complicated cabling on site The VLS uses 10 153 0 0 16 on its backend private network and requires its own subnet Having another network interface such as your public network running on the same network will significantly interfere with the operation of the VLS VLS9000 Components 13 2 Hardware Installation This section details the steps to install the VLS hardware from installation preparation to final cabling Minimum Hardware Requirements VLS9000 systems upgrading to firmware 6 1 have the fol
242. he access panel results in improper airflow and improper cooling that can lead to thermal damage Preparation Procedures To access some components and perform certain replacement procedures you must perform one or more of the following procedures e Extend the node from the rack See Extending a VLS Node from the Rack If you are performing service procedures in an HP Compaq branded telco or third party rack cabinet use the locking feature of the rack rails to support the node and gain access to internal components For more information about telco rack solutions see the RackSolutions com web site http www racksolutions com hp e If you must remove a non hot plug component from the node power off the system See Powering Off the System e Remove the node from the rack See Removing a VLS Node from the Rack e Remove the node access panel See Removing the VLS Node Access Panel If you must remove a component located inside the node remove the access panel Extending a VLS Node from the Rack A WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury or equipment damage be sure that the rack is adequately stabilized before extending a node from the rack WARNING Be careful when pressing the rail release levers and sliding the component into or out of the rack The sliding rails could pinch your fingertips To extend a node from the rack 1 Loosen the thumbscrews that secure the node faceplate to the front of the
243. he capacity license violation is detected during boot this will disable the VLS storage capacity so that the VLS is unable to perform for read write operations VLS storage capacity is re enabled once the capacity license is installed on the VLS without needing to reboot If the capacity license violation is detected when Discover Unconfigured Storage is selected this will prevent the new disk array enclosure from being added to the VLS However the VLS will remain operational When the capacity license is then installed the new disk array enclosure is automatically added to the VLS without needing to reboot 2 Install the base or capacity enclosure into the rack See Installing the Disk Array Enclosures into a Rack page 22 3 Cable the enclosure to the VLS See Cabling Disk Array Enclosures page 26 Managing VLS Capacity 45 4 Power on the enclosure See Powering on VLS Arrays page 91 5 Add the new disk array storage to the VLS using Command View VLS a Select the System tab b In the navigation tree select Storage LUNs c Select Discover Unconfigured Storage from the task bar The VLS locates the new array or capacity enclosure and the screen displays the LUN capacity that will be added to the storage pools based on the storage pool policy as a result of the new enclosure NOTE If the screen displays O storage LUN s discovered check the notifications You may have a problem that prevented th
244. he cartridge Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity If there are backups on this cartridge a table listing the backup information is displayed You may need to scroll down to view additional capacity information The Cartridge Backup Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 21 Cartridge Backup Capacity Table State The current deduplication state of the backup Backup Name The name of the backup set Policy The name of the policy used for the backup Backup Time The time when the data was backed up Type The backup type Dedupe Ratio The deduplication ratio obtained Libraries View To navigate to the Libraries link e On the navigation tree select System gt Chassis gt Capacity gt Libraries Monitoring Storage Capacity 145 The Libraries screen displays the list of libraries and FireSafe capacity utilization in your VLS Figure 23 Libraries Screen Expand Collapse Refresh El Chassis vis300n0 usa hp com E gt Capacity Storage Pools lt gt Virtual Libraries Cartridges E amp Deduplication B Nodes LUN Mapping m Virtual Libraries E ig Storage Pools Storage LUNs Cartridges 2 tis Disk Arrays Virtual Libraries All 1 3 0f3 Virtual Library Allocated Capacity Logical Data Used Capacity Available Capacity Ratio FireSafe NIA 0 00 KB 0 00 KB 0 00 KB NIA Library_ 15 00 TB 5 41 TB 1 80 TB 13
245. he firmware and installing the deduplication licenses Considerations To make the most of the deduplication benefits review these considerations before setting it up on your VLS system e Virtual cartridge sizing The system cannot deduplicate versions of a backup that are on the same cartridge the versions are not deduplicated until a new version is written to a different virtual cartridge Therefore you want the cartridges to be sized big enough to contain an How lt Works 85 entire backup job and to prevent too many backup jobs from piling up on the same cartridge but small enough that you are not wasting overall cartridge space e Additional nodes For systems with long backup windows you may want to include additional nodes to speed up the post processing deduplication A VLS system using deduplication can support up to six nodes nodes e Additional capacity Because you must store two full backups before the delta differencing begins you may want to include additional disk capacity at least the size of the sum of the backups A VLS system using deduplication can support up to eight arrays with four 1U or 2U nodes Installing the Firmware The deduplication feature requires an upgrade to the VLS firmware version 3 0 or higher Download the VLS Firmware and Quick Restore CD Image appropriate for your VLS system from the HP website and burn it to a DVD or CD Then follow the instructions for using the Quick Restore
246. he host needs to see are visible For example if a host s operating system is configured to only see up to eight LUNs per Fibre Channel host port the host will not be able to see the virtual devices numbered LUN8 LUN9 and up Suppose that you need the host to see LUNO through LUN5 LUN8 and LUNO You can enable LUN mapping thereby hiding all of the LUNs from the host Then you can map LUNO through LUN5 LUN8 and LUN to the host The VLS will automatically renumber the mapped LUNs so that LUNs 8 and 9 become LUNs 6 and 7 and they are now within the eight the host can see See LUN Mapping In the VLS LUN masking occurs automatically for all hosts when you enable LUN mapping using the global enable disable LUN mapping setting See Setting the Default LUN Mapping page 113 LUN Mapping LUN mapping is used to present only a subset of the VLS virtual devices to a host If LUN mapping is enabled the VLS prevents all hosts connected to the VLS through the SAN from viewing any virtual devices until they are explicitly mapped to the host By disabling LUN mapping the VLS allows all hosts connected to the VLS to access all virtual devices configured on the VLS By default LUN mapping is disabled The setting you choose will apply to every new host that you add to the VLS See Setting the Default LUN Mapping 112 Configuration Setting the Default LUN Mapping You can set a global default to disable or enable LUN mapping The setting you
247. he matching destination tapes are also automatically ejected into the destination library mailslot when the copy operation is complete When an echo copy is ejected mailslot eject box is checked the echo copy is performed then the eject is carried out This results in the echo copy being placed in the device s firesafe and maintained according to the established policy If a destination tape was ejected while a copy was pending then notifications in the VLS GUI will inform the user that they have interrupted the copy process Replication Concepts Replication provides automigration via LAN WAN between two VLS devices Because replication is a feature of automigration and uses the same Echo Copy policies that allow flexible cartridge slot based configuration any number of different replication configurations can be supported You establish a replication policy and echo copy pools using Command View VLS in the same way you set up automigration with a destination library on the SAN During replication the source VLS copies data to the echo copy pools on a replication library that is on the source During the user defined availability window this replication library migrates data to the destination library known as the LAN WAN replication target The following are two of many possible replication configurations e Data center to data center Designate one VLS as the source and a second VLS as the destination Configure the destination VLS to
248. he progress of the delete operation is indicated on the Destroy Cartridge wizard Secure Erasure occurs in the background after a cartridge is deleted When the delete operation is complete a success message appears 5 Click Finish to exit the wizard and return to the Cartridge Details screen When Secure Erase has completed on the cartridges an alert notification appears on the Notifications screen Unloading a Cartridge from a Drive If a tape becomes stuck in a drive and cannot be removed using the backup application unload the tape using Command View VLS 1 Select the tape drive from the navigation tree 2 From the task bar select Force Unload This will return the tape to its original slot NOTE Upon reboot of the VLS or restart emulations all cartridges that were in drives will NOT be returned to their original slots They will be loaded back into the drives Use Force Unload to return them to their original slots if needed Adding and Removing Barcode Templates You can add and remove delete but not edit cartridge barcode templates at any time NOTE Deleting a barcode template does not affect the cartridges that were created using it 130 Management To add or delete a barcode template from Command View VLS 1 Click the System tab 2 Select Cartridges in the navigation tree 3 Click Add Remove Barcode Templates in the task bar The Add Remove Barcode Templates window opens 4 To delete a barco
249. he screen refreshes and the correct status is displayed If the status does not change it was already correct Any incorrect fault notifications are cleared from the Notifications tab Trace Log Files You can view the current diagnostic VLS trace log files for troubleshooting purposes You can also save one or more of the trace log files to external text files or to a single zip file to create a support ticket Viewing Trace Log Files You can view the current diagnostic VLS trace log files From Command View VLS l 2 3 Click the System tab Select Chassis in the navigation tree Click Log Viewer under Maintenance Tasks The Log Viewer window opens Click the trace log file that you want to view The contents of the trace log file opens Saving a Trace Log File You can save a trace log file to an external file From Command View VLS l 2 3 4 5 Click the System tab Select Chassis in the navigation tree Click Log Viewer under Maintenance Tasks The Log Viewer window opens Right click the trace log file from the list and select Save Target As Enter a name for the file and click Save Creating a Support Ticket You can save all the current diagnostic VLS trace log files to a single zipped file to create a support ticket or pick modules to create a subset of a full ticket From Command View VLS l 2 3 gt Click the System tab Select Chassis in the navigation tree Click Support Ticket
250. health LED Green System health is normal Amber System health is degraded To identify the component in a degraded state see HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations Red System health is critical To identify the component in a critical state see HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations Off System health is normal when in standby mode Power On Standby button and system power LED Green System is on Amber System is in standby but power is still applied Off Power cord is not attached power supply failure has occurred no power supplies are installed facility power is not available or the power button cable is disconnected VLS9200 High Performance Node Components LEDs and Buttons 189 Rear Panel Components Bolca AAA fo Ja eng a i hl es 7 BS arn pega SSe00000 ren fen tr La OF ary Ge Olle LEETE ltem Description 1 PCI slot 5 2 PCI slot 6 3 PCI slot 4 4 PCI slot 2 5 PCI slot 3 6 PCI slot 1 7 Power supply 2 8 Power supply 1 9 USB connectors 2 10 Video connector 1 NIC 1 connector 12 NIC 2 connector 13 Mouse connector 14 Keyboard connector 15 Serial connector 16 iLO 3 connector 17 NIC 3 connector 18 NIC 4 connector 190 Component Identification Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons S80 0000000 O majanma aan
251. hen you enabled oversubscription Additional notifications are sent when the capacity consumed reaches 95 and again at 98 At the level of 98 the system will reject all attempts to write data from the backup application Free up storage space or add more storage before reaching this point to ensure that no data is lost All read operations remain unaffected Once you reduce the capacity consumed to a level below the user defined threshold writes from the backup application resume automatically However if you reduce the capacity consumed to less than 98 but still above the threshold you can manually resume writes by selecting Enable Writes now visible from the task bar of the Chassis status screen When the storage capacity consumed exceeds the user defined threshold the system e Displays warnings on the Notifications screen e Sends emails if configured to specified users e Sends alerts to the management consoles if SNMP traps are configured Displays the Reclaim Space link on the Chassis status screen At this point you can perform the following tasks e Erase cartridges erase or relabel expired cartridges to free up storage space See your backup application manual for details NOTE Use the Cartridge Utilization report to identify cartridges that are consuming more space and can be erased to create more storage space See Receiving Automated Reports page 154 Erasing data from cartridges containing data
252. here are no slots currently in that status The number of slots in each status is displayed Select a status to see a list of the specific slots in that status The Cartridge Status column of the Summary for Slots screen is particularly useful with echo copy because the backup application is not aware of any copy failures The status of the physical cartridges in the destination library will be one of the following Status message Pool type Description Unmanaged None This cartridge is not part of any pool Adding Cartridge Echo Copy Copying the header from the target cartridge to this newly created source cartridge If the barcode of the target cartridge exists anywhere on the VLS it is moved into the source library for the copy pool Up To Date Echo Copy The target and source cartridges have the same contents Waiting for Backup Data Echo Copy Waiting for the backup application to update the source cartridge by appending or overwriting the cartridge over the SAN A cartridge will get into this state when the barcode for the source cartridge already existed on the source VLS when the LBR Echo Copy pool was created and the source cartridge contained data It is not possible to replicate that preexisting content in a deduplicated manner In Use Echo Copy The cartridge has been loaded into a drive by the backup application Backup Postprocessing Echo Copy Creating deduplication instructions Out of Sync Echo Copy
253. humbscrew from the latch 226 Component Replacement 9 10 11 12 Rotate the latch downward to about 45 degrees supplying leverage to disconnect the power module from the internal connector Use the latch to pull the power module out of the chassis NOTE Do not lift the power module by the latch This could break the latch Hold the power module by the metal casing Position the new power module so that AC connector and power switch are on the right side and slide the power module into the power module slot as far as it will go Rotate the latch upward so that it is flush against the power module to ensure that the connector on the power module engages the connector inside the chassis Turn the thumbscrew at the top of the power module latch clockwise until it is finger tight to secure the latch to the power module Connect the AC power cord If the new power module has a power switch set it to the On position Confirm that the AC Power Good LED on the replacement power supply is illuminated green See Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons Confirm that the DC Fan fault service required LED on the replacement power supply is off RAID or Expansion Controller There are two controllers in each VLS disk array enclosure either two RAID controllers or two expansion controllers Both controllers in a disk array enclosure operate during normal disk array operation If one of the controllers fails the other controller tak
254. hysical tape Export In Use Echo Copy Waiting for the remaining cartridges in the pool to finish exporting In Transit Importing Echo Copy Importing status on the destination library In Sync status on the source Importing In Use Echo Copy Importing status on the destination library loaded into a drive by the backup application the source VLS Importing Backup Echo Copy Importing status on the destination library creating deduplication Postprocessing instructions on the source VLS Importing Out of Sync Echo Copy Importing status on the destination library Out Of Sync status on the source VLS Mirror Preprocessing Echo Copy Gathering the deduplication instructions needed for replication Mirror Preprocess Pending Echo Copy A mirror preprocess job is awaiting resources in order to run Mirror Postprocessing Echo Copy Expanding deduplication instructions to update the target cartridge Cleanup Echo Copy Cleaning up replication data on the source Eject Broken Echo Copy A problem occurred when attempting to eject a physical cartridge Header Broken Echo Copy A problem occurred during source cartridge creation process Restore Broken Echo Copy A problem occurred while restoring a cartridge Restore Pending Echo Copy A restore job is awaiting resources in order to run Paused Echo Copy A mirror job was paused Empty Tape Tape Export The physical tape has not yet been used yet Copying Tape Export Copying a source virtual cartridg
255. ible straps with a minimum of 1 megaohm 10 percent resistance in the ground cords To provide proper ground wear the strap snug against the skin e Use heel straps toe straps or boot straps at standing workstations Wear the straps on both feet when standing on conductive floors or dissipating floor mats e Use conductive field service tools e Use a portable field service kit with a folding static dissipating work mat If you do not have any of the suggested equipment for proper grounding have an authorized reseller install the part For more information on static electricity or assistance with product installation contact your authorized reseller 214 Component Replacement Warnings and Cautions Before removing the node access panel be sure that you understand the following warnings and cautions WARNING To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment e Do not disable the AC power cord grounding plug The grounding plug is an important safety feature e Plug the power cord into a grounded earthed electrical outlet that is easily accessible at all times e Unplug the power cord from each power supply to disconnect power to the equipment WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury from hot surfaces allow the drives and the internal system components to cool before touching them CAUTION Do not operate the node for long periods without the access panel Operating the node without t
256. iccncicarciersvsiavsntacietersvasenizevie we neeasnawieaeseuiaws 52 Connecting a Destination Library to a VLS9OOO cccccceeeessceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeesesssneees 53 Managing and Unmanaging a Destination LibtOrysciccsicsdetessieetedeicrevecerecarecewieanenceviaiewereutees 53 Managing a SAN Libia Yssssessnnnirniorsisniaisnisin esni an i ii 53 Managing a LAN WAN Replication WOttycce cheecedictiedeceeenivedieciccderet tlwei need ieiiedeodors 53 Re managing a LAN WAN Replication Library ccccccccsssssscceeesessneeeeeeessenaeeeeeeseneneeeeeeeee 54 Unmanaging a SAN or LAN WAN Tb tery orcs ciecesnect tian shctvecteriiatauinndiviatatslebaidtesalabiicensnes 54 Echo Copy Pool ey AN RS a ruta teu dsassrseucetecureaatecaedeeatecucbaesseceudatonseloesbidenialemaauiebilccanoassde 55 Creating an Echo Copy POG eis sscsnesucenesaadacaiwtnptendsabotwentuteld oivzacainsaiuienserelemunaninrtwietueaananens 56 Creating Virtual Tapes cies soiirci aE e E AE EE E TE 58 Restoring from a SAN Physical Cottride cdccscavenaisenacseanepansnnededesenahenatarsadedadeuederanndeadeeecstivene 59 Restoring from a LAN WAN Virtual Conidae veijvcssvtce dadcentoonvdniaiemmnydenecenmeeaenew 60 Loading Blank Media into an Echo Copy Pool cccccccccccceseseseeeceeeseneeeeeeesessaseeeeeneesetseeeeeene 60 Loading Media into an Echo Copy Pool for Overwrite ccccccscceeeeeseneeeceeseenneeeeeseeeetseeeeeeees 60 Restarting a Broken PAIN cacedechoorenpsnssinsntcdvenspnt
257. icenses Re installing the VLS Licenses If one or more capacity bundles or existing disk arrays deduplication licenses and or replication licenses were added to the VLS you must re install the VLS licenses To re install the VLS licenses 1 Locate the emails containing the license keys Your VLS license keys were emailed to you when you originally requested them If you no longer have these emails contact HP technical support to obtain new license keys 2 Log into Command View VLS 3 Follow the Installing Additional Licenses procedure beginning with Step 9 Restoring the Configuration from a Configuration File Restoring the virtual library configuration from the configuration file restores the virtual library and virtual drive configurations and administrative and network settings including the VLS serial number and persistent Fibre Channel port WWPNs NOTE Configuration files are not backwards compatible with earlier firmware versions For example a configuration file created on a system running firmware version 6 0 will not work on the system at firmware version 3 4 Make sure your system is at the version that created the configuration file before restoring the configuration To restore the virtual library and network settings from the configuration file 1 Set the network settings so you can open a Command View VLS session See Setting the Network Settings 2 Add all secondary nodes using the Add Node Wizard For
258. ieiceeceldeens 88 Deduplication SUNMIMGNY deauicacssecedetcetascnterselsdamoea ge wemutdedsumenesulaaebiecereaeesenaebsergeeuineuanvadeiaded 88 Deduplication Backup Repent s sicisestautceterngeabad ice tsvebcelicalscaia ena uensdeeire taunt tueweileateedaedeetentieee 88 Deduplication Cartridge Report version 37 saan sctsncincicuntsalstieatepniaaadetiarc ea iatenitadeereke 89 Deduplication System Capacity version 3 4 X ccccccccccccessssneeeeeeceseneeeeeeeseseaaeeeesesenssiseeeeeeees 90 seas seca cece aes EEE NSE N qe 7 Powering On VLS AItGyS acxswiianecaviaadcsoldeamaedioesatesramnantiaaheanesnoniueaielaapeamalmnaneanins 91 Powering On the VLS Svsteniacttsnthncleceteiskl terencetesstagt asvarcirecalatuxbtoveucetentrastespnteeten tena 94 Contents 5 Rebooting the VLS SySieiiicxie secs cteveteacete inseneri aaea E E ER R a 95 Powering Off the Ste UM oxidergs Me ticn aia ion deo nceee lec ewig dt onctatce awtredalehetdetevsteadeadenbecbasasaoieeleeescbenteese 96 Powering Ott VLS FUNC S steni rii SY lees EENE CE EEE T ERE T ER ves 96 SE E EAE A AE AOE O EEE sess ae 98 User Interface Requirement ccccccceeeseeeceeeeseseneeeeeeecessneeeeeeeseeseeeeeeceeseseeeeeseseesesieeeeeeeenaes 98 Command View VIG ase scasaletmntcns anssunnnusetadatianscons wn oaaadawstna suadintsiesy eutsuyaisiousiaquabandtedsinialaotancycunentses 98 Window Sty i a cscencc cease cecen vce cteieestaec rete annee esst tetas esett oe aldaaentacacuoacegas aantacsnnee
259. iewVLS Restarts Command View VLS restartSystem Shuts down and restarts the VLS node shutdownSystem Shuts down the VLS node so it can be powered off shut downNode Shuts down the VLS node so it can be powered off saveAllConfig Where the options are o lt s gt Saves the VLS virtual library configuration and network settings to the specified external configuration file h Displays command usage information optional restoreAllConfig Where the options are in lt s gt Restores the VLS virtual library configuration and network settings from the specified external configuration file h Displays command usage information optional i Monitoring Commands lt s gt string lt n gt number lt f gt filename Use the CLI commands in CLI monitoring commands to e View the VLS health status e View or delete notification alerts e Add view or delete E mail servers to route notification alerts e Add view or delete E mail addresses for notification alerts e Add view or delete SNMP management consoles to receive notification alerts Table 29 CLI Monitoring Commands Command Usage getHealth Returns the VLS health status as a number 0 good 1 degraded 2 critical 3 failed 4 missing getChassis Returns information about the VLS displayed on the Identity Tab window getNode Returns information on the node Where the options are a lt s gt Node name Head_0 r
260. igration interface provide the destination library URL l 2 3 4 From the navigation tree under Destination Libraries select the library with the URL to add From the task bar select Edit Management URL Type the URL into the Management URL field then select Submit If the management URL is accepted the Destination Library Details screen refreshes and displays the message The management URL was successfully changed If not the Edit Management URL screen refreshes and displays the error message Please enter a valid management URL If the URL is not changed repeat this procedure using a valid URL After the Management URL has been successfully added it creates a link to the management software Click on the URL in the Destination Library Details list to launch the management software in a new window Uploading SAN Destination Library or Tape Drive Firmware To load firmware for a physical library or disk drive to a destination library l 2 3 From the navigation tree select the appropriate destination library or disk drive From the task bar select Upload Firmware Select the firmware by either of these methods e Type the file name in the Select file to upload field e Select Browse to locate the appropriate file SAN Destination Library Operations 71 A Select Submit The SUMMARY FOR ALL DESTINATION LIBRARIES screen refreshes along with the message File file name successtu
261. in CLI connection commands to establish or close a VLS secure shell or serial user interface session Table 24 CLI Connection Commands Command Description bye done exit Terminates the CLI session logout quit close Closes the connection to the VLS getHost Displays the fully qualified name of the VLS and its IP address connect Connects to a host Where lt tag gt can be a lt s gt Host name localhost is default optional p lt s gt Password optional u lt s gt userid optional Commands 163 Output Commands Use the CLI commands in CLI output commands to control the output and display help information for the CLI commands Table 25 CLI Output Commands Command Description trace Displays the stack trace after an exception has occurred verbose Toggles verbose output on and off When on all messages are output to the screen version Indicates current CLI version If verbose is on the module revisions display also help Displays CLI command usage information Where lt tag gt can be c lt command gt Provides help information for the specified CLI command a11 Lists all CLI commands and their help information enableVlsLog Enables VLS logging Where the options are d lt n gt Debug level 1 to 9 optional h Displays command usage information optional disableVlsLog Disables VLS logging Where the options are d lt n gt Debug level 1 to
262. in the HP VLS Solutions Guide and the installation instructions in this guide each node on the VLS is connected to two fabrics zones which are each connected to the arrays by two paths This assures that the VLS can establish two paths per LUN each path on a separate fabric zone Load Balancing For load balancing the VLS system half of the data transfer from a specific node through a fabric to the array is conducted over one path half over a second fabric hence another path The paths are selected as follows Once configured the device recognizes all paths to each node on the device From all potential preferred paths and all potential secondary paths the array assigns one preferred path and one secondary path NOTE During each reboot the device is re analyzed and the preferred and secondary paths are reassigned To view the preferred path for each LUN in the Storage LUN Details 1 In Command View VLS select the System tab 2 Select Storage LUNs in the navigation tree 3 Select the View button for either All LUNs or the LUNs in the desired lt Storage Pool gt Summary information displays at the top of the list Preferred and secondary paths are listed after the summary information in the Storage LUN Details Per Node sections NOTE It may take several minutes to display this information if there are many LUNs 122 Management LUN Path Failover Private LUN path failover allows the VLS to automatically rerou
263. inch flathead screws into the slots Tighten them when instructed to do so Install rail hangers in the top and bottom holes of the front bracket and in the center hole of the rear bracket 11865 Repeat this procedure for the other side rail and for each enclosure to be added Installing Enclosure Rails into the Rack 24 l 2 SF No 10 11 Locate the VLS badge that came with the enclosure On the enclosure s right side pop off the MSA badge and replace it with the VLS badge Locate the 10 32 5 8 inch flathead and 10 32 3 4 trusshead screws from the rack mounting hardware kit contents Start at rack positions 3 and 4 when installing full arrays Leave rack space for future expansion for any partial array being installed On one front vertical post insert the rail hangers of the front rail bracket into the top and bottom holes of the 2U section of post NOTE Install the rails with the three beveled slots to the front of the rack and the ledge at the bottom of the rail Install one 10 32 5 8 inch flathead screw into the bracket slot that is slightly offset from center Do not tighten the screw completely In the rear of the rack keeping the rail level insert the rail hanger into the rear vertical post Push the bracket to the outside of the rack until snug Install two 10 32 3 4 inch trusshead screws into the top and bottom positions of the rear rail bracket Tighten the screws In the front of
264. ind the following The sizing factor should be based on the size of the physical tape or the tape type if possible Common tape types and their sizes are LTO 1 100 GB LTO 2 200 GB LTO 3 400 GB LTO 4 800 GB DLT IV 80 GB DLTI VS1 160 GB SDLT 320 GB SDLT Il 600 GB o HP recommends against setting the sizing factor too high for example 110 Although the virtual copy can be made if the drive compression is too low the data might not fit back onto the physical tape o The sizing factor applies to all operations except Load for Restore in which case the sizing factor is ignored and the virtual copy is exactly the size of the physical cartridge In general the virtual cartridge is approximately 90 of the actual cartridge size Base the size of the copy on the eventual maximum size of the actual cartridge that is to be copied Source cartridge size limit the size of all newly created source cartridges regardless of the physical cartridge size on VLS systems with deduplication enabled The default size is 200 GB the maximum size is 300 GB Certain operations such as loading physical cartridges into a copy pool with pre existing source cartridges will require you to accept resizing the existing cartridges if they exceed the size limit set here In this case a warning message indicates the number of cartridges to be resized if you proceed If you opt to continue and resize the source cartrid
265. ine pulse 3 axis 1 All temperature ratings shown are for sea level An altitude derating of 1 C per 300 m 1 8 F per 1 000 ft to 3048 m 10 000 ft is applicable No direct sunlight allowed 2 Storage maximum humidity of 95 is based on a maximum temperature of 45 C 113 F Altitude maximum for storage corresponds to a pressure minimum of 70 KPa 254 Specifications C Regulatory Information For the purpose of regulatory compliance certifications and identification this product has been a a unique Pae model number The regulatory model number can be found on the product nameplate label along with all required approval markings and information When requesting compliance information for this product always refer to this regulatory model number The regulatory model number is not the marketing name or model number of the product Product specific information HP VLS9000 Virtual Library System Regulatory model number FCLSEO701 FCC and CISPR classification Class A For important safety environmental and regulatory information see Safety and Compliance Information for Server Storage Power Networking and Rack Products available at hitp www hp com support Satety Compliance EnterpriseProducts These products contain laser components See the Class 1 laser statement in the document listed above Turkey RoHS material content declaration T rkiye Cumhuriyeti EEE Y netmeli ine Uygundur Ukraine RoHS material content
266. ing any installation procedure Power off the node See Powering Off the System Extend the node from the rack See Extending a VLS Node from the Rack Lift up on the hood latch handle which slides the panel toward the rear of the unit Lift up the panel to remove it Installing the VLS Node Access Panel 1 Set the access panel on top of the node about 0 2 inch from the opening with the hood latch open 2 Engage the anchoring pin with the corresponding hole in the latch 3 Push down on the hood latch 4 Slide the access panel into the closed position RwWN gt VLS Node Component Replacement Hard Drive A CAUTION To prevent improper cooling and thermal damage do not operate the node unless all bays are populated with either a component or a blank NOTE The node contains one of several possible hard drives The replacement hard drive must be the same or greater capacity as the original hard drive see the label on the front of the original hard drive for the correct supported replacement capacity and part number 1 Press the drive latch release button 1 216 Component Replacement 2 Pull the hard drive 3 out of the node by the latch handle 2 Figure 27 Removing a Node Hard Drive 11465 To replace the component pull out the latch handle 2 out as far as it can go and slide the drive into the bay until the latch mechanism engages the chassis Then firmly push in the latch handle to lock the drive
267. ing system type and revision level Detailed specific questions HP Contact Information For the name of the nearest HP authorized reseller See the Contact HP worldwide in English webpage http welcome hp com country us en wweontact_us html In the United States call 1 800 345 1518 In Canada call 1 800 263 5868 For HP technical support In the United States for contact options see the Contact HP United States webpage hitp welcome hp com country us en contact_us html To contact HP by phone o Call 1 800 HP INVENT 1 800 474 6836 This service is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week For continuous quality improvement calls may be recorded or monitored o If you have purchased a Care Pack service upgrade call 1 800 633 3600 For more information about Care Packs refer to the HP website http www hp com hps In other locations see the Contact HP worldwide in English webpage http welcome hp com country us en wweontact html Subscription Service HP strongly recommends that customers register online using the Subscriber s choice web site htto www hp com go e updates Subscribing to this service provides you with e mail updates on the latest product enhancements newest driver versions and firmware documentation updates as well as instant access to numerous other product resources 238 Support and Other Resources After subscribing locate your products by selecting Business support and then
268. ion alert Oversubscription is enabled when enabled 0 Oversubscription is disabled when enabled 1 getLibTypes Returns a list of available library emulation types Displays each library emulation s name type product revision and vendor information Where the options are 1 List only licensed types optional h Displays command usage information optional createLibrary Creates a new library with the specified maximum number of cartridge slots input export ports and tape drives Where the options are a lt n gt Node ID of the node on which the library emulation will reside 0 required 1 lt n gt LUN number to assign to library 1 to 128 optional n lt n gt Maximum number of tape drives required p lt s gt Product spaces allowed MSL6000 required pm lt n gt FC port to which this library is mapped 0 1 required pt lt n gt Maximum number of input export ports required r lt s gt Revision 0430 required sl lt n gt Maximum number of cartridge slots required t lt s gt Library type name required v lt s gt Vendor HP required y lt n gt Library type to emulate 2051 required h Displays command usage information optional getLibs Returns a list of the libraries defined on the VLS getLib Returns a summary of the specified library Where the options are a lt s gt Name of library Library_O required h Displays command usa
269. ion slots Select a slot number from the list After you select a slot from the available destination slots that slot no longer appears in the list Hover over each Select Slot link until you have selected a destination slot for each slot you want to edit Click Next Step The screen displays a confirmation Click Move The Move Media History screen displays the current status of the move The possible status messages are Moving Waiting Successful and Failed If the status of the move is still Waiting you can click Cancel to stop the move Ejecting Media from a Slot into an Empty Mailslot You can eject media from a slot into an empty mailslot within the same library using Eject Media From Command View VLS ARNS c Select the Automigration Replication tab In the navigation tree expand Destination Libraries and then the library of interest Select Slots to display the list of slots on that library From the task bar select Eject Media The screen displays a list of slots that are full From the list of full slots select the source slots of the media you want to eject The Available Mailslots displays the number of mailslots currently available As you select and deselect slot numbers from the list the number changes Click Next Step The screen displays a confirmation Select the Copy before Eject if Out of Syne box if you want to force a mirror of any cartridge before it is ejected This determines what the system
270. irtual drive configurations and re enter your other configuration settings such as the notification alert settings See Configuration Management and Monitoring NOTE If the node system board was ever changed and the virtual library configuration and network settings were not saved to a configuration file the persistent VLS serial number and Fibre Channel port WWPNs are lost and cannot be recovered The VLS firmware will automatically generate a new VLS serial number and new Fibre Channel port WWPNs based on the node system board s MAC address If this occurs any capacity licenses installed on the VLS will no longer work as they only work with the VLS serial number for which they were issued You can obtain new capacity licenses from HP technical support using the new VLS serial number You will also need to reconfigure your SAN to reflect the new Fibre Channel port WWPNs Recovering from a VLS Disk Array RAID Volume Failure If three or more hard drives have failed in a single VLS9000 disk array enclosure a disk array RAID volume failure has occurred Each disk array enclosure is configured as one RAID6 volume A disk array enclosure RAID volume failure will corrupt all the data stored on the VLS storage pool using that RAID volume making it unrecoverable NOTE Only perform this procedure if a RAID volume failure has actually occurred Other factors can result in a false RAID volume failure being reported such as a disk array encl
271. iscovering self configuring 250 Specifications ltem Media type Specification e Hot pluggable industry standard SFPs Small Form Pluggable for 4Gb ports e Hotpluggable industry standard XPAK optics or copper stacking cables for 10Gb ports Supported SFP types e Shortwave optical e Longwave optical Media transmission ranges 2 GB speeds Optical e Shortwave 500 m 1 640 ft e Longwave 10 km 6 2 mi Cable types 50 62 5 micron multimode fiber optic 9 micron single mode fiber optic Fabric latency e Less than 0 4 ps best case no contention e Cutthrough routing Fabric point to point bandwidth e 848MB s Full Duplex on 4 GB ports e 2400 MB s Full Duplex on 10 GB ports Fabric aggregate bandwidth e Single chassis Up to 144 Gbps full duplex end to end e Non blocking architecture Maximum frame sizes 2148 bytes 2112 byte payload Per port buffering e ASIC embedded memory non shared e Each port has a guaranteed 16 credit zero wait state buffer for full performance up to 10km 2 GB and 2 5km 10 GB Management processor Pentium class Management methods SNMP Telnet GS 3 Fibre Channel Switch 4 16q 251 ltem Access methods Diagnostics Specification e in band e Ethernet 10 100 BaseT with RJ45 e RS 232 serial port with DB9 e Power up self test of all functionality except media modules e Field sele
272. it 57 start mirror of Out of Synch cartridges 57 58 echo copy concepts 50 Edit Configuration 81 Edit Data Protector Configuration 87 Edit LAN WAN Replication Target Settings 78 Edit Policy 46 Edit Policy Window 64 Edit Virtual Library 118 editing workload assessment template 153 Eject Media 70 electrostatic discharge grounding methods 14 preventing 14 214 email settings 137 emergency login 102 emulations see VLS device emulations environmental specifications 254 Ethernet Switch replacing 225 Ethernet Switch 2510 24 cabling 36 front panel components 197 front panel LEDs 197 rack mounting 36 specifications 252 Ethernet Switch 2810 24G front panel components 199 201 front panel LEDs 199 201 specifications 253 Ethernet Switch 6600 24G cabling 34 rack mounting 31 Ethernet switches reconfiguring for ISL kit 40 expansion controller replacing 227 Export Cartridge Details 81 Export Log File 81 exporting CSV data 147 exporting data 74 F failover 123 warm 230 FC host port changing settings 165 Fibre Channel host port 165 changing the default settings 109 LUN management 111 Fibre Channel Switch replacing 224 Fibre Channel Switch 4 10q front panel components 191 front panel LEDs 192 rear panel components 195 263 rear panel LEDs 195 Fibre Channel Switch 4 16q front panel components 193 front panel LEDs 194 specifications 250 Fibre Channel Switch 8 24q rack mounting
273. jury or damage to the equipment before installing equipment be sure that e The leveling jacks are extended to the floor e The full weight of the rack rests on the leveling jacks e The stabilizing feet are attached to the rack if it is a single rack installation e The racks are coupled together in multiple rack installations e Only one component is extended at a time A rack may become unstable if more than one component is extended for any reason WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury or equipment damage when unloading a rack e At least two people are needed to safely unload a rack from a pallet An empty 42U rack can weigh as much as 115 kg 253 Ib can stand more than 2 1 m 7 ft tall and may become unstable when being moved on its casters e Never stand in front of a rack when it is rolling down the ramp from the pallet Always handle a rack from both sides Identifying the VLS Shipping Carton Contents Unpack the VLS shipping cartons and locate the materials and documentation necessary for installing the VLS All the rack mounting hardware and documentation necessary for installing a VLS node into a rack is included in the node shipping carton All the rack mounting hardware and documentation necessary for installing a VLS disk array into a rack is included in the disk array shipping carton All the rack mounting hardware and documentation necessary for installing a VLS connectivity kit into a rack is in
274. k or when the cartridge has not successfully migrated in the deduplication timeout limit or is being forced into a whole cartridge copy Forced Non Deduplicated Copy task NOTE The whole cartridge copy of the data will not deduplicate This data will consume additional space on the target VLS until the cartridge is overwritten with new data by the backup application Non Deduplicated Copy Task In Command View VLS 1 On the Automigration Replication tab expand the destination library in the navigation tree and select Slots to open the Summary for Slots screen 2 Select Non Deduplicated Copy from the task bar 3 On the Non Deduplicated Copy screen select the slots you want to replicate 4 Select Submit The system immediately registers the selected cartridges into the queue to replicate the whole cartridge when resources are available regardless of the policy windows Forced Non Deduplicated Copy Task In Command View VLS LAN WAN Destination Library Operations 75 1 On the Automigration Replication tab select Not migrated in Deduplication timeout limit Forced Copies from the Summary of All Cartridges screen 2 Select Forced Non Deduplicated Copy from the task bar On the Forced Non Deduplicated Copy screen select the cartridges you want to replicate 4 Select Submit The system immediately registers the selected cartridges into the queue to replicate the whole cartridge when resources are available reg
275. kup e Commvault Galaxy e HP DataProtector e HP DataProtector Express e Legato Networker e Tivoli Storage Manager e Veritas Net Backup e Veritas Backup Exec A CAUTION Automigration does not support tar formatting A tar file will not load if the first file on the tape is larger than 1 MB unless you perform a Load for Restore HP strongly recommends against using automigration with tar based backup software After connecting your destination library to the VLS and adding it as a Managed Library follow these steps to operate echo copy 1 Identify the Virtual Library you will associate with this managed library 2 Create an echo copy pool between the virtual library and this managed library Any cartridges loaded or already present in the managed library will be automatically detected and matching virtual cartridges will be automatically created in the associated virtual library NOTE The automatic scanning of new cartridges can take a long time if all the tape drives in the destination library are busy with higher priority operations such as copies For this reason it is best to load new tapes when copies are not running 3 Check for the auto created virtual cartridges in the virtual library On the Automigration Replication tab expand Source Cartridges in the navigation tree and then select the library of interest The screen displays the cartridges created by automigration 4 Any data written to the automigratio
276. lays decompression error details You may sort the table by selecting a column header You may delete errors by selecting the rows and then selecting Delete Selected When enclosure and or IP address calculations are pending select Refresh to refresh the information in the table Refresh Array Info updates cached array information on the server Use this if you make architectural changes such as adding arrays to the VLS 158 Monitoring The log monitor table displays Time the date and time the decompression error was logged in the system log SDev Number the Set Device number logged in the decompression error LBA Logical Block Address representing the hex value of the logical location of the error in the RAID set Offset the distance in Hex from the beginning of the LBA to the occurrence of the decompression error Length the length in Hex of the decompression error Hard Disks the calculated number of the bay in the enclosure in which the hard disk resides The numbers start at O in the upper left increase down and then increase to the right For example bay 11 is the most lower right drive bay in the enclosure Enclosure the calculated number of the enclosure in which the hard disk that produced the error resides IP the IP address of the array in which the enclosure and hard disk reside Drive part number the part number of the particular drive Log File Fields The log file is a comm
277. lding the storage pools Maintenance Mode reboots the system with deduplication disabled and the front fibre ports down A CAUTION Do not resume backup operations until the rebuilt arrays have finished initializing can take up to 24 hours View the Disk Array x details page on the Systems tab of Command View VLS to view the array state The disk array is still initializing when the array state is Initializing Managing VLS Capacity 47 Adding New Arrays to the Storage Pool If you add a new array or disk array enclosure and run the Discover Unconfigured Storage task see Adding VLS Capacity page 45 but cancel the process without adding the LUN capacity you can resume the process later 1 Select the System tab 2 Select Storage Pools in the navigation tree 3 On the Storage Pools screen select Run Pool Policy from the task bar The task is only available if you previously used the Discover Unconfigured Storage task or if you added storage and then rebooted the entire VLS system The VLS locates the new array or disk array enclosure and the screen displays the LUN capacity that will be added to the storage pools based on the storage pool policy as a result of the new storage 4 Click Accept to continue The VLS adds the new storage to the storage pools 5 Click Return to return to the Storage Pools screen Installing Additional Licenses 48 Your VLS system may require any of the following license
278. lication You can also copy virtual media using replication Replication provides automigration from the source VLS across the LAN WAN to a remote virtual destination library See Replication Concepts page 51 This section describes automigration topics from overall automigration concepts to specitic operations you can perform on your system NOTE Throughout the automigration windows a SAN library refers to a destination library that is connected to the source library through the SAN and uses the automigration feature A LAN WAN library refers to a remote destination library that is connected to the source through the LAN WAN and uses the replication feature NOTE When a list of slots is displayed the message items found displaying 1 to 20 appears If there are more than 20 items found scroll through them using the arrows pointing right and left at the far right hand side at the top of the list Also in some cases only available slots or only slots containing tapes appear in the list NOTE For each procedure described in this chapter at least one means of access to the relevant screen or menu is specified However links are often provided in the main window that can be used as a shortcut to other windows or menus Understanding Automigration Concepts Before using automigration review the information in this section This will allow you to create copy pools and automigration policies appropriate to meet your stora
279. lities required to operate the VLS To re install the operating system 1 Connect a keyboard to the keyboard connector 2 Connect a monitor to the video connector 3 Insert the VLS Quick Restore CD into the CD ROM or DVD CD drive The VLS Quick Restore CD auto starts 4 Press R on the keyboard to start the re installation The re installation takes 30 minutes or less to complete The screen may freeze during the last 10 minutes of the re installation This is normal The VLS Quick Restore CD is ejected and the system reboots when the re installation is complete 5 Restore the VLS The warm failover process automatically restores the node to its previous configuration including the serial numbers front end Fibre Channel WWPNs virtual device configuration and licenses No reconfiguration is required See Restoring the System by Warm Failover If the warm failover process does not restore the system you can manually restore using a configuration file See Manually Restoring the System If you are restoring a primary node a Power up the secondary nodes once the primary node fully reboots b Set it as the master node in Command View VLS See Configuring the Primary Node O The final step of setting the IP address and other public network configurations is not necessary c Re enter the IP addresses of the secondary nodes See Setting the Network Settings using Command View VLS NOTE If you have the iLO Advanced license in
280. ll ignore cannot access any virtual devices with LUN numbers that follow a gap in the LUN numbering on an Fibre Channel host port 120 Configuration NOTE You cannot destroy a library that is currently being accessed by a backup application When a virtual library is destroyed all the tape drives associated with the library are also destroyed The cartridges in the virtual library however are not destroyed They are moved to the Firesafe where they are stored until you either destroy them or associate them with a virtual library See Managing Cartridges page 127 To destroy delete a virtual library from Command View VLS 1 Click the System tab 2 Select the virtual library in the navigation tree The virtual library details window opens 3 Click Destroy Virtual Library in the task bar A Click Yes to confirm 5 Click Finish Destroying a Tape Drive NOTE Destroying a tape drive may create a gap in the default LUN numbering on the Fibre Channel host port to which it was mapped If a gap is created restart the VLS device emulations to remove the gap See Restarting VLS Device Emulations page 131 Most operating systems will ignore cannot access any virtual devices with LUN numbers that follow a gap in the LUN numbering on an Fibre Channel host port NOTE You cannot destroy a tape drive that is currently being used by a backup application To destroy a tape drive from Command View VLS
281. lly uploaded Deploying SAN Destination Library or Tape Drive Firmware After uploading the firmware for a physical library or disk drive on a destination library see Uploading SAN Destination Library or Tape Drive Firmware page 71 install the firmware 2 3 4 6 Place the appropriate library offline see Placing a Library Offline or Online page 69 From the navigation tree select the appropriate destination library or disk drive From the task bar select Deploy Firmware From the DEPLOY LIBRARY FIRMWARE screen firmware list select the firmware to install A dialog box displays to confirm the selection From the dialog box select OK The Destination Library Details screen displays along with the message File filename successtully deployed Place the library online see Placing a Library Offline or Online page 69 Generating a SAN Destination Library Support Ticket To generate a support ticket for a library l 2 4 Place the appropriate library offline see Placing a Library Offline or Online page 69 From the task bar in the Destination Library Details window select Support Ticket A dialog box displays to confirm the selection From the dialog box select OK The screen refreshes and displays the message Please wait action in progress Do not refresh this page When the support ticket has been generated the Support Ticket Results screen displays Select Download Supp
282. local library and or copy pools Choose options from the lists and select Submit The slots meeting your criteria are displayed Mailslot Details Select Mailslot from the expanded destination library list to view the destination library mailslots The screen displays the barcode and local library for each slot The task bar includes further actions you can take This screen is only available for SAN automigration libraries Copy Pool Details Select Copy Pools from the expanded destination library list to view the Echo Copy pools The screen displays the priority local library storage pools slot maps and policy windows for each copy pool Select a copy pool from the list to see more details and to access further actions Import Export Pool Details Select Import Export Pools from the expanded destination library list to view the destination library import and export pools The screen displays the priority local library storage pools slot maps and policy windows for each pool Select an import or export pool from the list to see more details and to access further actions This screen is only available for SAN automigration libraries Tape Drive Details 68 Select Drives from the expanded destination library to view the destination library tape drives The screen displays the drive status name drive type serial number availability state and barcode Select a drive from this list or from the navigation tree to see more detai
283. losure Components LEDs and Buttons 209 Rear Panel Components Base Enclosure ltem Description Status Fluttering green There is hard drive activity or the array is running a background parity check of the data in the RAID set Off The hard drive has no power is offline or not configured 4 Unit locator LED Blinking white Enclosure is selected for identification purposes only on for 3 4 seconds at Off Not active power up then off 5 Fault Service required Amber An enclosure level fault occurred Service action is required The event LED has been acknowledged but the problem still needs attention on for 3 4 seconds at Off No fault power up then off 6 Power On OK LED _ Green Enclosure is powered on with at least one power module operating on for 3 4 seconds at normally power up blinks for Off Both power modules are off up to 2 seconds during boot then on Item Description 1 Power module O 11735 RAID controller O RAID controller 1 Fibre Channel port O Fibre Channel port 1 not used Service port for service only CLI port not used Ethernet port OJ WO INIA Oa AJ OJN SAS output port Power module 1 o 210 Component Identification Capacity Enclosure 1 ltem Description Power module O 1173 Expansion controller O Expansion controller 1 SAS port O input port Ser
284. lowing hardware requirements e Minimum system disk size is 120 GB so systems with 60 GB drives must upgrade the drives e Minimum memory is 16 GB of RAM so systems with 4 GB of RAM must upgrade the memory Preparing for the Installation Tools for Installation e Two people e 1 and 2 Phillips screwdriver e Standard screwdriver e Allen wrench provided used with 6 mm screws and 12 24 x 3 8 inch sockethead screws e 3 Pozidrive screwdriver e 7 16 inch wrench e Box cutting knife A CAUTION Do not use any power tools They could strip or damage connections Taking ESD Precautions To prevent damaging the system be aware of the precautions you need to follow when setting up the system or handling parts A discharge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor may damage system boards or other static sensitive devices This type of damage may reduce the life expectancy of the device To prevent electrostatic damage e Avoid hand contact by transporting and storing products in static safe containers e Keep electrostaticsensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at staticfree workstations e Place parts on a grounded surface before removing them from their containers e Avoid touching pins leads or circuitry e Always be properly grounded when touching a static sensitive component or assembly Grounding Methods to Prevent Electrostatic Discharge Several methods are used for grounding Use one or m
285. ls and to access further tasks This screen is only available for SAN automigration libraries Automigration Replication Forcing a Replication Job The Copy Now task allows you to schedule a replication or automigration job that forces the cartridge to replicate immediately regardless of whether or not the cartridge is within the policy window You can only perform this task when the cartridge is holding in the Out of Synch state In Command View VLS l 2 3 4 On the Automigration Replication tab expand the destination library in the navigation tree and select Slots to open the Summary for Slots screen Select Copy Now from the task bar On the Copy Now screen select the slots you want to replicate Select Submit The system immediately registers the selected cartridges into the queue to replicate when resources are available regardless of the policy windows Placing a Library Offline or Online Place the library offline in order to deploy firmware create a support ticket or run a library assessment test You can place a LAN WAN destination library offline as well To do so l 2 From the navigation tree under Destination Libraries select the library to place offline From the task bar select Offline A dialog box opens to confirm the selection and warn that placing the library offline will cancel all active jobs Select OK from the dialog box The Destination Library Details screen refreshes and displays
286. lth LED power supply NIC 1 link activity LED Green Power supply health is normal Amber Power redundancy failure occurred Off Power supply health is normal when in standby mode Green Network link exists Flashing green Network link and activity exist Off No link to network exists If power is off the front panel LED is not active View the LEDs on the RJ 45 connector for status by referring to Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons NIC 2 link activity LED Green Network link exists Flashing green Network link and activity exist Off No link to network exists If power is off the front panel LED is not active View the LEDs on the RJ 45 connector for status by referring to Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons Rear Panel Components 11455 ltem Description Quad port FC card storage port port 4 Quad port FC card storage port port 3 Quad port FC card host port port 2 VLS9000 Node Components LEDs and Buttons 175 Item Description Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons 60600 00 DO 4 Quad port FC card host port port 1 5 Power supply 2 6 Power supply 1 7 NIC 2 on primary node connects to port 1 of switch 2810 24G 8 NIC 1 on primary node only connects to the customer provided external network array 9 Keyboard connector 10 Mouse connector m Video connector 12 Serial connector to access CLI 13 Rear USB conn
287. ly until the power supply is installed l 2 m e Remove the protective cover from the connector pins on the power supply Slide the power supply into the bay until it clicks 11464 Use the strain relief clip to secure the power cord Connect the power cord to the power supply Be sure that the power supply LED is green Be sure that the front panel external health LED is green VLS Node Component Replacement 219 Fan Module A CAUTION Do not operate the node for long periods without the access panel Operating the node without the access panel results in improper airflow and improper cooling that can lead to thermal damage l 2 3 Power off the node Extend or remove the node from the rack See Extending a VLS Node from the Rack or Removing a VLS Node from the Rack Remove the access panel To remove fan module 1 a Remove the power supply air baffle 11470 220 Component Replacement 5 To remove fan module 2 or 3 a Remove the power supply air baffle b Remove fan module 2 or 3 To replace the component reverse the removal procedure IMPORTANT After installing the fan module firmly press the top of the module connectors to ensure the connectors are seated properly FBDIMM 1 Power off the node 2 Extend or remove the node from the rack See Extending a VLS Node from the Rack or Removing a VLS Node from the Rack 3 Remove the access panel 4 Open the FBDIMM
288. m archival using a backup application VLS9000 Components A typical VLS system consists of the following components e VLS9000 nodes at least one e VLS9000 disk array enclosures at least one per node You can add capacity by adding full arrays one base enclosure and three capacity enclosures or individual capacity enclosures The enclosures come with the option of 1 TB or 2 TB drives e One VLS9000 20 port or 32 port connectivity kit The VLS9000 7 5 TB and 10 TB systems omit the connectivity kit The 20 port connectivity kit includes two 10 port Fibre Channel switches and two Ethernet switches The 32 port connectivity kit includes two 16 port Fibre Channel switches and two Ethernet switches The 40 port connectivity kit includes two 20 port Fibre Channel switches and two Ethernet switches By connecting two 40 port connectivity kits using an HP 9000 Virtual Library System Interswitch Link Kit you can expand the capacity of the VLS system beyond 12 arrays to a maximum of 16 arrays The two cabled connectivity kits function as one logical set of switches The VLS9000 7 5 TB and 10 TB systems consist of one node one Ethernet switch one base disk array enclosure and up to three expansion disk array enclosures 12 Introduction VLS9000 system scalability considerations Two Fibre Channel ports one Fibre Channel port on each Fibre Channel switch are required for each VLS node Two Fibre Channel ports one Fibre Channel port on eac
289. mber Amber FBDIMM in slot X is in a pre failure condition FBDIMM failure all Red One or more FBDIMMs has failed Test each bank of FBDIMMs by slots in one bank removing all other FBDIMMs Isolate the failed FBDIMM by replacing amber each FBDIMM in a bank with a known working FBDIMM Online spare memory Amber Bank X failed over to the online spare memory bank amber Online spare memory Red Invalid online spare memory configuration flashing amber Online spare memory Green Online spare memory enabled and not failed green Mirrored memory Amber Bank X failed over to the mirrored memory bank amber Mirrored memory Red Invalid mirrored memory configuration flashing amber Mirrored memory Green Mirrored memory enabled and not failed green Overtemperature Amber The Health Driver has detected a cautionary temperature level amber Red The server has detected a hardware critical temperature level Riser interlock amber Red PCI riser cage is not seated Fan module amber Amber One fan is failed or removed Red Two or more fans have failed or are removed Hard Drive LEDs tem Deception S O 1 Fault UID LED amber blue 2 Online LED green 180 Component Identification Hard Drive LED Combinations Online activity LED green On off or flashing Fault UID LED amber blue Alternating amber and blue Interpretation The drive has failed or a predictive failure alert has b
290. n Supply Table 9 Cabling Fibre Channel Switch 1 FC SW1 ltem Description Connects to 0 Port O FC Port 3 of primary node via FC cable 1 3 Ports 1 3 FC Port 3 of secondary nodes if present via FC cable 4 8 Ports 4 8 Port O of RAID controller 1 of additional arrays if present via FC cable 9 Port 9 Port O of RAID controller 1 of first array via FC cable 10 13 Port 10 13 FC Port 3 of secondary nodes if present via FC cable 14 19 Ports 14 19 Port O of RAID controller 1 of additional arrays if present via FC cable 20 23 Ports 20 23 XPAK transponders from the interswitch link kit if present 24 Ethernet port Port 23 of Ethernet Switch 1 SW1 via Ethernet cable Table 10 Cabling Fibre Channel Switch 2 FC SW2 ltem Description Connects to 0 Port O FC Port 4 of primary node via FC cable 1 3 Ports 1 3 FC Port 3 of secondary nodes if present via FC cable 4 8 Ports 4 8 Port O of RAID controller 2 of additional arrays if present via FC cable 9 Port 9 Port O of RAID controller 2 of first array via FC cable 10 13 Ports 10 13 FC Port 4 of secondary nodes if present via FC cable 14 19 Ports 14 19 Port O of RAID controller 2 of additional arrays if present via FC cable 20 23 Ports 20 23 XPAK transponders from the interswitch link kit if present 24 Ethernet port Port 23 of Ethernet Switch 2 SW2 via Ethernet cable Table 11 Cabling Fibre Channel Switch 3 if
291. n briefly after the switch is powered on or reset at the beginning of switch self test If this LED is on for a prolonged time the switch has encountered a fatal hardware failure or has failed its self test Blinking orange A fault has occurred on the switch one of the switch ports or the fan The Status LED for the component with the fault will blink simultaneously Off The normal state indicates that there are no fault conditions on the switch Power LED Self test LED Green The switch is receiving power Off The switch is NOT receiving power Green The switch self test and initialization are in progress after you have power cycled or reset the switch The switch is not operational until this LED goes off Blinking green A component of the switch has failed its self test The status LED for that component for example an RJ 45 port and the switch Fault LED will blink simultaneously Off The normal operational state the switch is not undergoing self test Fan status LED Blinking green The cooling fan has failed The switch Fault LED will be blinking simultaneously Off The cooling fan is operating normally Mode select button Press the button to step from one mode to the next The current mode setting is indicated by the Mode select LEDs near the button Mode select LEDs Act Indicates that the port Mode LEDs are displaying network activity information FDx Indicates tha
292. n including the cartridge state last written date destination library and destination slot Echo Copy Pool Operations 6l Viewing Automigration Cartridges in the Firesafe When a cartridge is ejected from the destination library its matching virtual cartridge is automatically ejected out of the virtual library and moved into the device s firesafe The firesafe acts as a virtual offline location for the automigration virtual cartridges Once they are in the firesafe the automigration virtual cartridges are retained according to their automigration policies which define how many days the virtual cartridges remain in the firesafe before being automatically deleted NOTE From the Automigration Replication tab of Command View VLS the firesafe in the window shows items placed in the firesafe by automigration only items placed in the firesafe from different functions of the VLS are not shown here To view cartridges in the firesafe from the Automigration Replication tab select Firesafe from the navigation tree For mirror copies the firesafe date is the date of the most recent copy When the physical tape is moved back into the physical library the corresponding virtual tape is immediately moved from the firesate back to the appropriate location based on the location of the physical tape The physical tape is not read upon load and is not synchronized to the virtual tape Therefore if you have modified the physical tape while it wa
293. n target over the LAN WAN Similar to automigration Storage area network A network of storage devices available to one or more servers Serial Advanced Technology Attachment Small Computer Systems Interface A standard intelligent parallel interface for attaching peripheral devices to computers based on a device independent protocol A computer node that provides secondary administrating and control for backup and restore operations on a server cluster and provides additional storage and multi pathing capabilities on the system Allows control of the virtual tape library by a connected destination library for the purpose of implementing automigration SMI S support allows applications attached to the VLS to detect the virtual library configuration and to allow some users to change the state of the VLS Simple Network Management Protocol A widely used network monitoring and control protocol Data is passed from SNMP agents which are hardware and or software processes reporting activity in each network device hub router bridge and so on to the workstation console used to oversee the network The agents return information contained in a MIB Management Information Base which is a data structure that defines what is obtainable from the device and what can be controlled turned off on and so on Secure Sockets Layer certificate A protocol designed to enable applications to transmit information back and forth securely Applicatio
294. n virtual cartridges will be automatically mirrored onto the matching destination tapes based on the automigration policy settings Monitor the status Echo Copy Pool Operations 55 of the mirror by using a Command View VLS Console and viewing the destination tapes in Slots in the expanded list under Destination Library In order to restore from a destination cartridge either load it into a physical drive that is visible to the backup application or perform a Load for Restore Load for Restore copies the destination tape back into the virtual cartridge so that the backup application can then restore from the virtual cartridge Creating an Echo Copy Pool Echo copy pools are created from physical library slots after a destination tape library is added to the VLS automigration configuration Each echo copy pool defines The single destination library The single source virtual library The slot range The echo copy pool policy Each virtual library has a SAN policy and those used as a replication library will also have a LAN WAN policy These policies are set up during the creation procedure To create an echo copy pool l 2 3 10 T On the Automigration Replication tab expand Destination Libraries on the navigation tree so that you can see all the related items Expand the destination library for which you want to create a pool Select Copy Pools on the navigation tree From the task bar select Create Echo Copy Pool
295. nam maamaa Description Status Power supply LED Green Normal Off System is off or power supply has failed UID button LED Blue Identification is activated Flashing blue System is being managed remotely Off Identification is deactivated iLO NIC activity LED Green Activity exists Flashing green Activity exists Off No activity exists iLO NIC link LED Green Link exists Off No link exists Fibre Channel Switch 4 10q Components LEDs and Buttons This section provides images and descriptions of the front and rear panels of the Fibre Channel Switch 4 10q Front Panel Components m pat oea O Fibre Channel port O through 9 numbered from left to right Ethernet port Fibre Channel Switch 4 10q Components LEDs and Buttons 191 Front Panel LEDs and Buttons EE a A E AAT Os Ane nent An Ga 192 Component Identification ltem Description Status 1 Maintenance button Dual function momentary switch Its purpose is to reset the switch or to place the switch in maintenance mode To reset the switch use a pointed tool to momentarily press and release less than 2 seconds the Maintenance button The switch will respond as follows 1 All the chassis LEDs will illuminate except the System Fault LED 2 After approximately 1 minute the power on self test POST begins extinguishing the Heartbeat LED 3 When the POST is complete
296. nch the Certificate Wizard Select Next Make sure that Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate the default is chosen and select Next Select Finish A Security Window opens Select Yes 9 Select OK or Finish on each window that displays until the Command View VLS login window displays On Er G N 10 Restarting Command View VLS To restart Command View VLS 1 Under the System tab select Chassis in the navigation tree 2 Under Maintenance Tasks select System Maintenance 3 Click Restart Command View VLS in the task bar The Restart Command View VLS window opens 4 Click Restart to confirm Closing a Command View VLS Session To close a Command View VLS session click Logout in the status banner or simply close the web browser Secure Shell and Serial User Interfaces The secure shell user interface provides remote configuration and management of your VLS over a LAN using the VLS command line interface CLI command set The serial user interface provides local configuration and management of your VLS through the serial connector on the rear of the VLS node O using the same VLS CLI command set Secure Shell and Serial User Interfaces 101 A secure shell or serial session provides the following Setting the VLS network settings Configuration and management of VLS virtual devices libraries and tape drives and cartridges Changing of the default Fibre Channel host port set
297. nd VLS9000 Node Components LEDs and Buttons This section identities and describes the front and rear panel components LEDs and buttons of the VLS nodes Front Panel Components ltem Description 1 DVD CD drive Front USB connector HP Systems Insight Display Video connector Hard drive blank Hard drive blank Hard drive 2 Hard drive 1 COI NI a na AJ wl rn Front Panel LEDs and Buttons 11454 ten pen SSS Power On Standby button and system power LED Green System is on Amber System is shut down but power is still applied 174 Component Identification ltem Description Status Off Power cord is not attached power supply failure has occurred no power supplies are installed facility power is not available or disconnected power button cable UID button LED Blue Identification is activated Flashing blue System is being remotely managed Off Identification is deactivated Internal health LED Green System health is normal Amber System health is degraded To identify the component in a degraded state refer to HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations Red System health is critical To identify the component in a critical state refer to HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations Off System health is normal when in standby mode External hea
298. nd assign them enclosure IDs based on their rack positions Follow these steps from Command View VLS Click the System tab Select the disk array in the navigation tree with the new capacity enclosure Record either RAID controller s IP address displayed on the disk array details window Open a secure shell session See Opening a Secure Shell Session page 102 Telnet to one of the RAID controllers in the array by entering telnet lt IP address of RAID controller gt and then press Enter oanga At the Login as prompt enter manage and then press Enter At the Password prompt enter manage and then press Enter Enter rescan and then press Enter gt a m i Verify that the new capacity enclosure s ID is correct j Power off the new capacity enclosure leaving the power switch off for at least 60 seconds Then power the capacity enclosure back on Confirm that the disk array enclosures are all functioning normally by observing the condition of their status LEDs The LED status should match those shown in the following tables If an LED status does not match the status shown in the following tables a component needs attention Powering On VLS Arrays 91 92 Figure 2 Base and Capacity Enclosure Front Panel LED Status Normal Operation oe C_1a Ci Ce EE lt lt ih 11767 ltem Location LED LED state 1 Hard drives Status blue or yellow Off or blue 2 Power
299. nd displays a message indicating the hosts were renamed successfully The new names are visible in the box To disable or enable host WWPNs l 2 3 Open the Host Setup window Select the hosts to change Select Disable Hosts or Enable Hosts as appropriate The window refreshes and displays a message indicating the hosts were disabled or enabled successfully Note that the state now reflects the change To remove host WWPNs l 2 3 Open the Host Setup window Select the hosts to remove Select Remove Hosts The window refreshes and displays a message indicating the hosts were removed successfully The hosts no longer appear on the list Managing Virtual Device LUNs 115 Dual Port Virtual Devices When creating a library robot LUN or tape drive LUNs you can present the virtual devices to a pair of host ports rather than just one port Both ports must be on the same node The Port Mapping list displays selections for each individual port plus possible port pairs for example 0 1 0 amp 1 The benefit of dual port virtual devices is that they are still accessible when one path fails A CAUTION Many operating systems and backup applications do not support more than one path to a tape library device Only use this feature if you are certain that it is supported When creating dual port virtual devices the LUN numbering on both ports follows the conventions for default LUN numbering see Default LUN Numbering p
300. ndaiekaiminareniadetianuannrininaincn 68 WAcailS leat Details eae E aoa calmeunaperadic E 68 Copy Fool MO AIS a artcetecs raced ctearessncteene siento nsupudevaneliedmuemeusnees Gace DEAETE OOTES EE SESA 68 Import Export Pool DSS leant ec baiech he eel dai iectee dd diced bulerenhetedetinvdlaeaundetnledinediebaueiets 68 Tap Drive DetdilS aeeeeeee eae ne ne cee ne entre riei osian Sr eters Erie r rieni tr eee rene nnn err ett ers 68 Forcing a Replication JOD iacocsenscansdasoueeadenstadardiniioedadandatnensenegansdedsuiancmahdaadlnenninedatgadawtoiaantees 69 Placing a Library Offline or Onilitessicccs lt icncscaveitemictevannieeaiseneeienctatanieei aie aaecedens 69 Moving Media from One Slot to Another 0cccccccccceseccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeesnaeeeeeeesenssseeeeesesseseeeess 69 4 Contents Ejecting Media from a Slot into an Empty Mailslot cccccccccssseeeceesteeeeeeneeeeeesneeeeeeteeeesenaees 70 Ejecting Media from a Drive into an Empty Mailslot ccccccccessseceeeeeeeeeeeeceeesesteaeeeeeesenaes 70 Restarting Automigtation Replication SSIvicGs iei cies lt hcasavtsedcenceeseedeeiw eden eriearenicinidiebtiees 71 Scanning a SAN Destination Day vencscsusseueed seq sincsaouedieetdesa diode ardsesdessvaipdaenedeucdetaxeousermeerends 71 Editing the Management UR be incnideceecsstersecatecateu cra secnacityss ncerhtoctavelectlatenstreudelaieleiereigteueanics 71 Uploading SAN Destination Library or Tape Drive Firmwatre ccc
301. neiiicsc ciiceropnaicedateinita ioe a a 211 Base HEC OSU 56s cached tic deat euedtneaac dba oe dmpacneete theca pauedaadcOid le dnadaipueadendteanntGeaniels 21 Capacity BING OS asc esisaccercicnatenenidsanesctencteuceuisannheble lt diimestsmniedassolonibyanalieiencionsestoenands 212 14 Component Replacement cccccccceccccceeeeeesseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesaseasaaaeeeeees 214 Safety Considerations iseis en tntecastecatessenaben cat tsantsncncecennanaralecneneearencinetie EEA Ear Eia 214 Preventing Electrostatic Dischige x icevontsnstsaiencledvoasagd seewicueiiadss ckeaatveinneaaloudies 214 Grounding Methods to Prevent Electrostatic Damage cscsccceeeeceesseeeeeeeeesesteeeeeceeesnseeeees 214 Warnings dnd GUTOTIS sesasi ietin iii i E EAE E EA 215 Preparation PRO oo oe sce scascaicce teas eesidntic seeder none w emucnnbeeese tien itn ae eee ewe renr 215 Extending a VLS Node from the ROG cocccicecnsadcectcndsaneeaadduntteacssMiedeecrancsenae ceases 215 Contents 9 Removing a VLS Node from the RACK es ansierz otcnstee tareterevcteiatie teen neeeslotsncauar et adadSiueneaeates 216 Removing the VLS Node Access Poel 2 snss diarduncaesisarsearacdurnnnnecaccsvadh oeutinsaacennzexoteeaisacedsens 216 Installing the VLS Node Access Panel ccsscereetavsncctateletn cnr trectalitchactvaciteeteiiiineielnateteennen 216 VLS Node Component REpIQCSWiChh descisussececcreuiconssnceteteses nasinuerseadoescedeaveusinenicelemecmoustebeirelanenns 216 Hard Dive s
302. ngs using the CLI Command Set c cceceesseeeeeetteeeeeeneeeeeeeteeeeeeeas 106 Setting the Network Settings using Command View VLS cccceceesteeeceeteeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeas 107 Setting the User Preferences ccccccccccceeeseeneeeeeeceenneeceeeeceeesseeeeecceseseaeeeseceeesseeeeeeesentsaaeees 108 Editing the Default Fibre Channel Host Port SettingS ccccccccecceeeeseceeeeeeeesseeeeeeesesesteeeeesenes 109 Managing COVETSUIDBSNID ON axacsceaien ayau cient hedeancdaoranhaveadacadedenmtesus en deoensnmnenetadendeoremnenavensleniaciaanns 109 Enabling and Disabling Oversubseriptiottict cicicusncivieetsthctviencsdiel ody ieee ceawteieen cee 110 Shutdown at 98 C BCCINY ite bec xitaussnesldaseouncisuccdesdonieetenvssiebideel Srmencausscctuelslshomesiouslelednaneouss 110 Reclaiming Storage 2S GCC ecient eneddt a aldavnt cid dev dereererradadalaunikisunitnletetnanerieeielonate 11 Managing Virtual Device WUMSs ccsc ozassconascertaesecdespardedistineseaedmeneeSockinceencanienRietieesdeextieetaneiatsens 111 Default LUN Iori iG ristect Peis oalees ater nnieelaidaqecieeyscevtedaielaameenieevedtaionavanienenlaiaioencte 111 Operating System LUN Requirements and Restrictions c ccccesceeseeeceeeeeseeseeeeeseeessseeeees 112 LUN Masking senienas E eco E E e TE E EE 112 IUN Mapping ax occas wesasalien seen wereweptsiticne saqiesieenausy dead van suas EE AEE EA EEEa T ea 112 Setting the Default LUN Map ING xc cccnrsccasantncencs
303. node into the rack See Installing the VLS Node into a Rack Reconnect the cables to the new node exactly as they were connected to the previous node Configure the node See Configuring the Secondary Nodes Reboot the system See Rebooting the System Replacing All VLS9000 Nodes with VLS9200 Nodes Prior to the node replacement l 3 4 The VLS9000 system must be running firmware version 6 1 0 If your system is not on 6 1 0 follow the procedure in the HP Virtual Library System Firmware Version 6 1 0 Release Notes to upgrade Schedule sufficient time for the node replacement The time needed depends on the number of nodes and the wiring assume a minimum of 30 minutes per node and an additional two hours for configuration Stop any in process backups and restores and disable the VLS in the backup applications to suspend operations during the node replacement Create a firmware version 6 1 0 Quick Restore DVD Having one DVD for each node will speed up the Quick Restore process To replace the nodes l 2 3 Attach rails to all of the replacement VLS9200 nodes see the instructions in the rail kit As a best practice save the configuration on the live VLS system Shut down all VLS nodes You will start the replacements with the master node Replacing a Secondary Node 223 10 11 12 13 17 18 Disconnect all power cords from the node From the back of the node make a note of all cable connections then
304. not contain unwritten data 12 Expansion Port Status green On Figure 5 VLS9000 Capacity Enclosure Rear Panel LED Status Normal Operation Item Location LED LED state 1 Power module AC power good green On 2 DC Fan Fault Service Required yellow Off 3 Expansion controller SAS In port status green On 4 Fault Service Required yellow Off Powering On VLS Arrays 93 Power On OK green SAS Out port status green Powering On the VLS System To power on the system l 2 A 94 Operation Power on the two private LAN switches connected to the VLS VLS9000 7 5 TB and 10 TB systems only include one LAN switch Power on the two private Fibre Channel switches connected to the VLS VLS9000 7 5 TB and 10 TB systems do not include Fibre Channel switches Power on all arrays in the VLS See Powering on VLS Arrays page 91 Press the Power On Standby button on all of the secondary nodes After the secondary nodes are powering up press the Power On Standby button on the primary node Confirm that the VLS components are all functioning normally and the VLS is cabled correctly by observing their status LEDs The LED status should match those shown in the following table If it does not a component needs attention ltem Location LED LED state 1 Power module Voltage Fan Fault Service Required amber Off 2 Input Source Pow
305. ns are 10 50 100 default 500 or 1024 cartridges Click View beside the category The cartridges parameters window opens From the Cartridges Parameters window select the Select box next to each cartridge that you want to edit Select the desired access from the Access box Click Update in the cartridge row To change the read write access for all cartridges displayed l 2 3 Select the Select All box Select the read write setting for the cartridges from the Change selected box Click the Go button next to the Change selected box Moving Cartridges You can move one or more cartridges at a time from one library to another or from a library to the firesafe You may delete replication cartridges on either the source or the target VLS with the following results Moving a source cartridge from its existing slot to a different slot in the same library does not move the target cartridge Moving a target cartridge from its existing slot to a different slot in the same library within the same replication target and copy pool results in the source cartridge moving to the new slot 128 Management e Moving a source cartridge from its existing library to a different library or to the firesafe results in the target cartridge disappearing from the echo copy pool and moving to the firesafe e Moving a target cartridge from its existing library to a different library or to the firesafe or to a different slot that is not part of
306. ns that use this protocol inherently know how to give and receive encryption keys with other applications as well as how to encrypt and decrypt data sent between the two Some applications that are configured to run SSL include web browsers like Internet Explorer and Netscape mail programs like GroupWise Outlook and Outlook Express FTP file transfer protocol programs etc These programs are automatically able to receive SSL connections To send an SSL connection however or to open a secure connection your application must first have an encryption key assigned to it by a Certification Authority Once it has a unique key of its own you can establish a secure connection with every other application that can speak the SSL protocol Multiple disk arrays logically grouped together from which the dynamic disk filesystem allocates storage The disk arrays in a VLS are automatically configured into one storage array 1 A device that reads data from and writes data onto tape 2 A software emulation of a tape drive is called a virtual tape drive 259 V virtual tape virtual tape drive virtual tape library W WWNN WWNN WWPN 260 Glossary A disk drive buffer that emulates one physical tape to the host system and appears to the host backup application as a physical tape The same application used to back up to tape is used but the data is stored on disk Also known as a piece of virtual media or a VLS cartridge Dat
307. nsmitted faster and easier Data is encoded so it takes up less storage space and less bandwidth for transmission The process of moving data from one storage device to another such as migrating data from virtual media to physical media To recover data files stored on virtual or physical media The length of time data is retained stored on virtual or physical media The storing of sequential blocks of incoming data on all the different disk drives in a virtual disk This method of writing data increases virtual disk throughput because multiple disks are working simultaneously retrieving and storing data RAID O 3 5 6 10 and 50 use striping deduplication disk array disk mirroring disk striping disk to disk backup The process of eliminating duplicate data from the backups on a virtual cartridge to reduce the amount of disk space required Two or more hard drives combined as a single logical unit for increased capacity speed and fault tolerant operation Disk arrays are logically grouped into a storage pool Also known as data mirroring The process of dividing a body of data into blocks and spreading the data blocks across several partitions on several disks The backing up data on disks rather than on tape Disk to disk backup systems provide a very fast single file restore capability compared with disk to tape backup disk to disk to tape backup dual port virtual devices dynamic disk filesystem E e
308. nstalling the node into a telco rack order the appropriate option kit at the RackSolutions com web site http www racksolutions com hp Follow the instructions on the web site to install the rack brackets 1 Locate the rail kit 2 Install the two outer slide rails to the rack If your rack contains single phase PDUs you will install the node in rack positions 35 and 36 If your rack contains 3 phase PDUs you will install the node in rack positions 33 and 34 On both sides of the rack align the rail holes with the holes in the rack and secure with thumbscrews 3 Attach the inner rails to the sides of the node Align the holes in the rail with the round tabs on the side of the node and secure with thumbscrews 4 Align the rails on the node with the rails in the rack and slide the node fully into the rack 5 Tighten the thumbscrews 6 Repeat this procedure to install all of the nodes in the rack See NOTE page 30 for details NOTE If your rack contains single phase PDUs e Install up to two nodes in the first rack starting in positions 35 and 36 working up the rack e Install up to four nodes in the second rack starting in positions 35 and 36 working up the rack e Install up to two nodes in the third rack starting in positions 35 and 36 working up the rack If your rack contains 3 phase PDUs e Install up to three nodes in the first rack starting in positions 33 and 34 working up the
309. nstructions and HP 9200 Virtual Library System 10 TB and 20 TB SAS Capacity Enclosure Installation Instructions Install nodes using HP 9200 Virtual Library System 4 Gb Node Installation Instructions shown or HP 9200 Virtual Library System 4 Gb High Performance Node Installation Instructions Install Ethernet switches using HP 9000 Virtual Library System 40 port Fibre Channel Connectivity Kit Installation Instructions shown or HP 9000 Virtual Library System Entry level Connectivity Kit Installation Instructions Install Fibre Channel switches using HP 9000 Virtual Library System 40 port Fibre Channel Connectivity Kit Installation Instructions Cable all components using the installation instructions provided with each component Install and cable XPAK transponders if applicable using HP 9000 Virtual Library System Interswitch Link Kit Installation Instructions NOTE Not all systems use all of the components listed above Installing PDUs If the rack you are using already has PDUs power distribution units installed skip this procedure NOTE This procedure is for racks using single phase PDUs If your rack uses 3 phase PDUs see the instructions that came with the PDUs 20 Hardware Installation gt Determine the numker of PDUs to install e The number of PDUs you install is based on the number of arrays to install e Install up to four arrays in one rack e Install up to a maximum of four additional arrays in racks t
310. o turn on LEDs by enclosures or arrays This can help identify a specific disk that needs to be replaced To access the disk beaconing screens from Command View VLS 2 3 4 amp Select the System tab In the navigation tree expand Chassis In the navigation tree select Disk Arrays In the task bar select Disk Beaconing The screen opens to the Summary of all Disks in the VLS screen and displays details about the virtual disks including the total number of disks number of disks in an error state and the number of disks with beaconing set to On Drill down from Disk Beaconing in the navigation tree to view the disk arrays enclosures within an array or disks within an enclosure Select the array enclosure or disks you want to change The default is disk beaconing off Click ON or OFF to change the status of the disk beaconing The screen lists the disks that have changed Managing Cartridges You can change the following parameters for existing cartridges from the Cartridge Parameters window Library with which they are associated Capacity Write access Accessing the Cartridge Parameters Window To access the Cartridge Paramenters window from Command View VLS l Click the System tab Managing Cartridges 127 Select Cartridges in the navigation tree The Cartridge Details window opens Select the number of cartridges to display from the Cartridges per Page list beside the group of cartridges
311. of the rack Remove the switch from the rack Install the new switch into the rack See Installing the 100 Mb Ethernet Switch 2510 24 into a Rack page 35 or Installing the Ethernet Switch 6600 24G into a Rack page 31 Reconnect all cables to the new switch exactly as they were connected to the failed switch Power on the new switch VLS9200 Disk Array Component Replacement This section describes the processes for replacing the hard drive power module and RAID or expansion controller components of the VLS disk array enclosures Hard Drive A CAUTION Before removing a hard drive from the disk array ensure that a replacement hard drive is immediately available Removing a hard drive causes a significant change in the airflow within the disk array and the disk array could overheat if a replacement hard drive is not installed within a relatively short time Be careful when replacing a drive The drives in the disk array are fragile l Press the drive latch release button Fibre Channel Transceiver Replacement 225 Pull the drive out of the disk array by its latch handle about 3 cm 1 inch so that it is disconnected from the backplane connector CAUTION A drive with a rapidly spinning disk can be difficult to hold securely To decrease the chance of dropping the drive do not remove it completely from the disk array until the disk has stopped rotating This usually takes a few seconds When the
312. of the Policy Window page 75 e Forced Non Deduplicated Copy see Copying the Whole Cartridge Outside of the Policy Window page 75 e Reset Deduplication Timer resets the system s timer default is 48 hours If the time limit is reached again the system forces a whole cartridge replication e Refresh refreshes the current screen e Restart Broken Mirror see Restarting a Broken Mirror page 61 e Restore Media see Restoring from a LAN WAN Virtual Cartridge page 60 e Pause Job pause one or more Mirror jobs See page 76 80 Automigration Replication Cancel Job cancel one or more Mirror jobs See page 76 Resume Job resume one or more paused Mirror jobs See page 76 From the summary screen you can also click a specific barcode or an echo copy pool to see the details of that selection Cartridge Details View the details of a particular cartridge by clicking the barcode from the cartridge summary screen The details include the last time the cartridge was in the In Sync state the current physical and logical size and the job history Some Cartridge Status categories provide a section of Additional Details on the cartridge details screens The additional details depend on the category For example cartridges in the Pending category display a list of dependent cartridges while cartridges in the Out of Sync category display whether or not the cartridge is ready to replicate You can expor
313. of the secondary nodes show a degraded state run the Clear All Faults task on the Chassis screen All nodes should now be up and in the green Good state Fibre Channel Switch Replacement To replace a Fibre Channel Switch 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 Th Power off the switch Make a note of all cable connections to the switch then disconnect the cables Remove the 1U cover plate for the switch from the front of the rack Remove the four bolts from the rail flanges on the rear rack uprights using a 2 Phillips screwdriver Loosen the two nuts securing the rail ends to the adjustable mounting flanges which are mounted on the front rack uprights using a 7 16 inch wrench Slide the switch out the rear of the rack CAUTION Make sure the switch is supported below either by equipment mounted in the next rack slot or with your hand before sliding the switch off the adjustable mounting flanges that support it Disconnect the AC power cables from the back of the switch Remove the rack rails from the switch Install the rack rails on the new switch and then mount the switch in the rack See Installing the Fibre Channel Switch 8 24q into a Rack Reconnect all cables to the new switch exactly as they were connected to the failed switch Re install the 1U cover plate for the switch to the front of the rack 224 Component Replacement 12 Power on the new switch Fibre Channel Transceiver Replacement To replace a
314. on Replication tab To view the automigration status of a particular destination library 1 Select the Automigration Replication tab 2 In the navigation tree select the destination library to view This opens the Destination Library Details screen This screen displays the state of the destination library For SAN automigration libraries the options are Good Degraded Critical Failed or Missing for LAN WAN replication libraries SAN Destination Library Operations 65 the options are Connected Configuration Out of Sync and Unreachable The screen also provides the name and model of the library number of simultaneous transfers number of slots management URL and availability 3 Expand the destination library in the navigation tree to access more specific information Cartridge Status and Slot Details To view the status of the destination library s slots expand the library in the navigation tree and select Slots The Summary for Slots screen displays the drive name barcode cartridge status local library copy pool and last mirrored date for each slot number in use Select a barcode from the list to see more details on the job history and status for that barcode Quickly locate slots of interest using the Advanced Search See Advanced Search for Slots page 68 You can also select Slots State Summary from the navigation tree to see which of all the possible statuses have slots in that status if a status is not listed t
315. on which the library emulation to which the tape drive is associated resides required 11 lt n gt LUN number of the library associated with the tape drive to delete required h Displays command usage information optional addBarCodes Creates a new barcode template Where the options are b lt s gt Barcode prefix to use for the barcode up to 5 alpha characters upper case and or numeric required i lt n gt Starting numeric value for the cartridges created with this template 1 to 1024 required u lt n gt Barcode suffix length Number of digits for cartridge sequencing 1 to 16 required s lt n gt Barcode suffix to use for the barcode upper case and or numeric required h Displays command usage information optional getBarCodes Returns a list of all the barcode templates and their settings that have been defined Displays each barcode template s name prefix start index and suffix length deleteBarCode Deletes the specitied barcode template Where the options are a lt s gt Barcode prefix required Force This parameter is ignored and is present only for backward compatibility optional h Displays command usage information optional getCartsBySP Gets cartridges by storage pool name Where the options are a lt s gt Storage pool name StoragePool_ optional h Displays command usage information optional VLS Commands 167 Table 27 CLI Configuration Commands continued
316. ond the switch is operational Other blink patterns indicate critical errors e 2 blinks internal firmware failure e 3 blinks Fatal power on self test error e 4 blinks configuration file system error e 5 blnks over temperature A critical error also illuminates the System Fault LED System Fault LED Amber a fault exists in the switch firmware or hardware See the Heartbeat LED blink pattern for details Maintenance button e To reset the switch press and hold the Maintenance button for less than two seconds This action clears any temporary error conditions that may have occurred and executes the switch self test e To place the switch in Maintenance mode press and hold the Maintenance button for several seconds until the Heartbeat LED illuminates and then extinguishes Port Logged in LED on left for each port Green The port is properly connected and able to communicate with its attached devices Off One of these conditions exist e The port connection is broken e An error occurred that disabled the port Port Activity LED on right for each port Green data is passing through the port Port Logged in LED on top for each port 196 Component Identification Green The port is properly connected and able to communicate with its attached devices ltem Description Status Off One of these conditions exist e The port connection is broken
317. one network value can be set at a time or you can set them individually eu To reset a value enter quoted space as the value NOTE If you need to clear the DNS completely set the DHCP to false and enter 0 0 0 0 for both the first and second DNS server addresses 4 When all the network parameters are set to your desired values save the settings by entering commitConfig NOTE The system automatically reboots after any change 5 Verify the network settings have been changed by entering showConfig Setting the Network Settings using Command View VLS To set the network settings using Command View VLS set either the e DHCP usage and host name or e Fully qualified host name or host name and DNS domain name separately DNS server address IP address gateway and netmask To set the network settings using Command View VLS 1 Click the System tab 2 Select Chassis in the navigation tree 3 Select Set Network Configuration under Maintenance Tasks Setting the Network Settings 107 4 Current network configuration NTP settings and time zone settings are displayed Modify these as needed Figure 9 page 108 Figure 9 Set Network Configuration Wizard window Administrator O Command View VLS Identity otificatior o Network Settings Wizard a WARNING Changing any SRE node network setting imposes an automatic reboot of the entire system Node Network Settings U
318. or another backup you can have the cartridge reclaimed by temporarily disabling the one remaining backup job Disabling the backup type disables all instances of that backup type on all cartridges that have not yet been delta differenced When you re enable the backup type it allows deduplication for future instances of that backup type Deduplication System Capacity version 3 4 x You can view specific details about the system capacity using deduplication Select System Capacity from the navigation tree or from the task bar of the Deduplication Summary screen The screen displays the following information e Total physical capacity the capacity of the entire VLS system e Reserved for system the amount of capacity needed to perform system functions for example storing the meta data e Usable capacity the total capacity that can be used for deduplication Total Physical Capacity minus Reserved for System e Used capacity the capacity currently in use e Available capacity the capacity currently available Usable Capacity minus Used Capacity e Logical Data the amount of backup data sent to the VLS before deduplication and compression e Used Capacity the capacity currently in use e System Ratio the ratio of the Logical Data divided by the Used Capacity e Space Savings the percentage of capacity saved by deduplication 90 Deduplication 7 Operation This section describes how to power
319. or details Configuring Deduplication Options 86 You can include or exclude specific backups or types of backup e g server type from the deduplication process and choose the deduplication algorithm used NOTE These options are not available until you have installed the appropriate number of deduplication licenses 1 Select the System tab 2 On the navigation tree navigate to Chassis gt Deduplication gt Configuration The Configuration screen displays 3 For each data type select the appropriate deduplication algorithm from the list The defaults depend on the backup application and the file type in each case the algorithm most likely Deduplication to result in the best deduplication ratio is used Depending on your current setting the options are e Backup Useful when file level differencing is less space efficient for example if the file server is full of very small files e File Useful for file servers e Enhanced Backup Useful for databases that are Striped Multiplexed o Large greater than 14 TB o Flat file with deduplication speed or ratio problems NOTE Once you change the algorithm from Backup to Enhanced Backup you cannot revert to Backup again However you can still disable the policy e Enabled Available if the algorithm is currently set to Disabled e Disabled Turns off deduplication Select Policy Based Matching for data types where appropriate
320. or pane Select the appropriate copy pool to display the copy pool details screen From the task bar select Edit Slot Maps On the Edit Slot Map screen in the Add Additional Slots section enter a start slot and end slot for the copy pool from the available slot ranges listed Select Add The copy pool details screen refreshes and the message The slot map was successfully added to copy pool name displays To change slot mapping on a copy pool that already has slots mapped l 2 On the System tab check the capacity of the copy pool to ensure there is room for copies From the copy pool details screen on the Automigration Replication tab select Edit Slot Maps on the taskbar The Edit Slot Map window displays In the Current Slots section select Edit for the slots you want to edit The EDIT SLOT MAP window opens Change the Start and End slots Select Submit If the change is successful the copy pool details window displays including the message The slot map was successfully changed If the start and or end slot is outside the available range the EDIT SLOT MAP window refreshes and displays The start and end slot define an invalid range If the slot map is not changed due to a slot range error repeat this procedure and select slots within an available range Changing the Slot Mapping for a LAN WAN Library Slot mapping in the case of replication refers to the assignment of virtual slots in a librar
321. or use with mini GBIC transceivers Memory and Processor Freescale PowerPC 8540 666 MHz 4 MB flash 256 MB compact flash 256 MB DDR SDRAM packet buffer size 36 MB QDR SDRAM total 18 MB for 1 GbE 10 GbE ports Ethernet Switch 2810 24G 253 ltem 1000 Mb Latency Specification lt 3 4 us FIFO 64 byte packets 10 Gbps Latency lt 2 4 us FIFO 64 byte packets Throughput up to 75 7 million pps 64 byte packets Routing Switching capacity 101 8 Gbps Switch fabric speed 105 6 Gbps Routing table size 10000 entries MAC address table size 64000 entries Maximum heat dissipation 697 BTU hr 735 33 kJ hr Voltage 100 120 200 240 VAC Idle power 167 6 W Maximum power rating 204 3 W Frequency 50 60 Hz Environmental Operating Non operating Shipping Temperature 10 C to 35 C 50 F 40 C to 66 C 40 F 40 C to 66 C 40 F to 95 F to 150 F to 150 F Relative humidity noncondensing 2 40 to 60 10 to 95 5 to 95 sine pulse 3 axis Altitude 1000 ft to 10 000 ft 1000 ft to 10 000 ft 1000 ft to 40 000 ft Vibration 5 1000 5 Hz 0 25 g 5 1000 5 Hz 1 0 g 5 1000 5 Hz 2 0 g sinusoidal 1 sinusoidal 1 sinusoidal 1 Octave min 3 axis Octave min 3 axis Octave min 3 axis Shock 5 g every llms 1 2 25 g every 11ms 30 g every 11ms 1 2 sine pulse 3 axis 1 2 s
322. ore of the following methods when handling or installing electrostaticsensitive parts e Use a wrist strap connected by a ground cord to a grounded workstation or computer chassis Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of 1 megaohm 10 percent resistance in the ground cords To provide proper ground wear the strap snug against the skin e Use heel straps toe straps or boot straps at standing workstations Wear the straps on both feet when standing on conductive floors or dissipating floor mats 14 Hardware Installation Use conductive field service tools Use a portable field service kit with a folding static dissipating work mat If you do not have any of the suggested equipment for proper grounding have an authorized reseller install the part For more information on static electricity or assistance with product installation contact your authorized reseller Unpacking Place the shipping carton as close to the installation site as possible Before unpacking the VLS inspect the shipping carton for damage that may have occurred during shipment If you detect any damage notify the carrier and HP before unpacking the unit Removing the Packing Materials To unpack the VLS l 2 3 4 5 6 Open the top of the shipping cartons Caretully lift the units out of the boxes and remove the packing materials Place the units on a stable work surface NOTE Inspect the units for any damage that may have occurre
323. ores were successful Loading Blank Media into an Echo Copy Pool To move a blank tape or a tape that should be considered blank from a mailslot on a destination library into an echo copy pool use Load Blank Media From Command View VLS l a a a c N 10 Th Select the Automigration Replication tab In the navigation tree expand Destination Libraries and then the library of interest Select Mailslot to display the list of mailslots on that library From the task bar select Load Blank Media to open the Load Blank Media screen From the drop down box select the copy pool you want to load the media into You can also choose unmanaged slots that are not in a copy pool For all mailslots the destination slots are automatically populated with the first available slots To keep the automatic assignment skip to Step 10 To assign the destination slots manually continue to the next step If the Destination Slot Number for each mailslot displays None the copy pool you selected is full Select another copy pool and the Destination Slot Number column will show the automatic assignment Click Clear All to clear the automatic assignments Hover over the first Select Slot link to display a list of the available destination slots Select a slot number from the list After you select a slot from the available destination slots that slot no longer appears in the list Hover over each Select Slot link until you have select
324. ormation optional getStorageLunsByNode Returns a list of the storage LUNs on the node Where the options are a lt n gt Node ID 0 1 2 default is 0 optional h Displays command usage information optional createStoragePool Creates a new storage pool Where the options are n lt n gt maximum number of cartridges 1 to 8000 optional h Displays command usage information optional deleteStoragePool Deletes a storage pool Where the options are a lt s gt Storage pool name StoragePool_ required h Displays command usage information optional deleteAllStoragePools Deletes all storage pools on the VLS and all the LUNs in all storage pools getStoragePoolNames Returns a list of the storage pool names on the VLS getStoragePool Returns information about the storage pool such as primary LUN name allocated capacity capacity extent size used capacity and number of LUNs Where the options are a lt s gt Storage pool name StoragePool_ optional h Displays command usage information optional getStoragePoolSummary Returns summary of storage pool information for all storage pools on the VLS addHost Adds the specified host in the SAN list listHostState Lists the current host state for all hosts in the SAN list setHostState Sets the host state for specified host setHostStateAll Sets the host state for all hosts in the SAN li
325. ort Ticket Results File to view the command sent to the library Place the library online see Placing a Library Offline or Online page 69 Generating a SAN Destination Library Drive Support Ticket To generate a support ticket for a drive 1 2 3 5 6 Place the appropriate library offline see Placing a Library Offline or Online page 69 Select the appropriate drive from the navigation tree under Destination Libraries and the library containing the drive From the task bar in the TAPE DRIVE DETAILS window select Support Ticket A dialog box displays to confirm the selection From the dialog box select OK The screen refreshes and displays the message Please wait action in progress Do not refresh this page When the support ticket has been generated the Support Ticket Results screen displays From this screen you can select Display results of executing the LTT command to view the command sent to the library or Download support ticket to download the actual support ticket file Select Finish Place the library online see Placing a Library Offline or Online page 69 Running a SAN Destination Library Assessment Test 72 To run a library assessment test l Place the appropriate library offline see Placing a Library Offline or Online page 69 Automigration Replication 4 5 6 From the task bar in the Destination Library Details window select Library Assessment Test A dialog
326. ory 154 SAN health history 154 system capacity 154 automigration cancelling a job 76 concepts 50 configuring job reports 82 defined 50 destination library 52 echo copy 50 firesafe 62 job history 82 exporting to CSV file 83 job status 81 job summary 83 pausing a job 76 replication 51 reporting 79 restarting services 71 resuming a job 76 supported library configurations 52 viewing cartridges in source libraries 61 availability window editing 64 B barcode templates adding 130 167 assigning 119 removing 130 167 base disk array enclosure shipping carton contents 16 17 beaconing disk 127 C cabling Ethernet Switch 2510 24 36 Ethernet Switch 6600 24G 34 VLS9200 external connections 30 management ports 30 Cancel Tape Transport 74 capacity adding 45 changing cartridge 128 creating tape drives 118 installing license 48 managing 45 storage pools 46 removing 46 cartridge see cartridges cartridge parameters window accessing 127 cartridge status In Use Deduplicating 80 Initializing 80 Mirror Active 80 Mirror Complete 80 Mirror failed corrective action needed 80 Not migrated in Copy Pools threshold limit 79 Not migrated in Deduplication timeout limit Forced Copies 80 Paused 80 Pending 80 Waiting for first backup 80 Waiting for policy window 80 cartridges changing capacity 127 128 170 changing library association 127 170 changing read write access 128
327. ose 1 Select a location category 2 Select the specific locations of interest from the Available Locations box You can select multiple devices by using Ctrl click 3 Using the gt gt button or by double clicking move the locations of interest into the Selected Locations box These are the locations that will display in the report You can use lt lt button to remove locations from the Selected Locations box 4 Select another location category and repeat steps 2 and 3 5 Enter a name for this view in the Create a New View field 6 Select Create View This view is now available as a selection in the Views list on the Job History screen To update an existing view select it from the Update existing view list adjust the selected locations rename the view if desired in the name field and select Update View Select Delete View if you want to remove that view from your pre defined options At any time you can change any of these default settings Viewing the Job History 82 The Job History screen displays the history of the completed library jobs It defaults to SAN jobs only and displays the number of days set as the default on the Configuration screen The job history table displays for each job e Barcode e Start and end times e Size in MB e Data transfer time e Total processing time Automigration Replication e Transfer rate e Source and target locations e The node the job is running on e Completion
328. osure being powered down or the disk array enclosure external cabling being disconnected at either end To recover from a disk array enclosure RAID volume failure 1 Repair the failed RAID volume for example replace the failed hard drives in the RAID volume See Hard Drive 2 Erase all the virtual media from the disk array enclosures and rebuild all the RAID volumes on the storage pool affected a Select Storage Pools in the navigation tree then select the storage pool that needs recovery b Click Rebuild Storage Pool in the task bar c Click Rebuild d Click Yes to confirm 3 Recreate the cartridges that existed on the VLS storage pool VLS cartridge configurations are stored on the disk arrays and have been erased Recovering from a Node RAID Volume Failure To recover from a node RAID volume failure which occurs when both node hard drives fail 1 When restoring a primary node power down all of the secondary nodes 2 Replace the failed node hard drives 232 Disaster Recovery 3 Install the operating system on the new hard drives and restore the VLS See Recovering from Operating System Failure Recovering from a Primary Node Failure using a Cold Spare Primary Node On a multi node VLS the primary node maintains the configuration for the entire VLS library In the unlikely event of a primary node failure the VLS library would be unavailable until the node is replaced or repaired To avoid extended downtime you can
329. ot restore from this virtual tape Restarting a Broken Mirror The mirror broken state can occur when there is not enough room on the virtual tape to create the copy there are no available slots to create the copy the library cannot read the header of the physical tape the library cannot determine that a tape without a header is blank or the library cannot successfully write the header to the virtual tape When a physical cartridge in a destination library is in this state you must restart the broken mirror for the automigration to continue The Restart Broken Mirror task triggers a job to run which clears out the problem l 2 3 From the task bar select Restart Broken Mirror The Restart Broken Mirror screen opens and displays all cartridges with the Mirror Broken status Select the cartridges you want to restart Select Submit The Result screen indicates that the operation was successful The cartridge is now in the UpToDate status Viewing Cartridges in Automigration Source Libraries When a tape is still present in the destination library you can view the matching automigration virtual cartridge in the associated source virtual library To view cartridges in the source libraries iF 2 On the Automigration Replication tab select Source Cartridges from the navigation tree The right hand pane then shows all the automigration virtual cartridges alphabetically by bar code in the source libraries and informatio
330. ount of replication data transferring across the LAN WAN Select the report format you prefer Some reports only use CVS format while some include HTML as an option Select the frequency of the automated report The options are one time as of the moment you add the report hourly daily weekly and monthly The Time Day of Week and Day of Month lists appear based on the frequency you selected For example if you select Weekly you can then set the Time and Day of Week you want the reports fo run Select Add The system will run the report and email it to you at the next opportunity based on your settings Repeat the steps above to receive multiple reports Stress Testing Hard Disks using the Storage Exerciser Systems running some VLS firmware versions can stress test physical storage to ensure the integrity of the hard disks using the Storage Exerciser tool Because it can affect overall performance however HP recommends not running the Storage Exerciser unless it is advised by HP support personnel The Storage Exerciser provides two types of test jobs Background enables a user to initiate a low resource test job that continually writes and reads a small amount of data at regular intervals Read only reads and decompresses all data currently residing on the VLS by opening each non empty non hidden cartridge All data is decompressed but not copied to any other location or made available to any other device NOT
331. pe Drives box defaults to the standard number of drives for the library type NOTE All the tape drives created at one time are mapped to the same Fibre Channel host ports Make sure to load balance the tape drives across the Fibre Channel host ports to obtain maximum performance Tape drives in a library do not have to be mapped to the same port as the library Click Create Tape Drive A summary window opens and displays details about the tape drives created 118 Configuration 8 Choose one of the following options To perform LUN mapping for the virtual tape drive click Map LUNs and proceed to LUN Mapping page 112 for further instructions To create more tape drives click Create More Tape Drives To add cartridges to the virtual library click Create Cartridges and proceed to Creating Cartridges page 119 To exit the wizard click Cancel At this point the library and tape drives have been created but the library does not contain any cartridges You can add cartridges later Creating Cartridges To add cartridges to a virtual library If you are already in the Create Library Wizard window select Create Cartridges l The Cartridge Parameters window opens Figure 12 page 119 If not a Click the System tab b Select the virtual library in the navigation tree to which you are adding cartridges c Click Create Cartridge in the task bar Figure 12 Create Virtual Library Wizard window 8 o
332. pends on the amount of data changed between the backup sets In addition not all data is deduplicated For example files less than 32 KB in size and backup sets less than 1 MB are ignored If your data sets do not change significantly between backups or if they contain many small files the compression ratio may be low This is expected behavior and does not indicate a problem None The deduplication compression ratio was fine but suddenly went down significantly After 50 versions of a backup set have been deduplicated the VLS automatically restarts the deduplication process as though starting from scratch As a result the compression ratio will drop In time the ratio will improve as more backup sets are deduplicated The restore performance is degrading The restore performance will continue to degrade as you restore older and older versions of a backup After 50 versions of a backup set have been deduplicated the VLS automatically restarts the deduplication process as though from scratch The restore performance will then improve because the restore versions are more recent Deduplication Issues 245 B Specitications This section provides the basic VLS node Fibre Channel switch Ethernet switch and disk array enclosures specifications For a complete list of specifications see the HP QuickSpecs for each product VLS9O00Node ltem Specific
333. physical tape library exporting the data uses the same number of barcode characters as the physical tape library that will import the data If the barcodes do not match exactly the import process will not work See your tape library user manuals for information on checking and configuring the number of barcode characters used l 2 3 Create a LAN WAN replication target on the remote site See Creating a LAN WAN Replication Target page 76 Create a virtual library on the source site See Creating a Virtual Library page 116 On the source site create an echo copy pool on the newly created LAN WAN replication target See Creating an Echo Copy Pool page 56 Be sure to check the Initialize via Tape Transport box From the Copy Pools screen select the newly created copy pool to open the Echo Copy Pool Details screen Note that the state of the copy pool is Awaiting Initialization Allow your regularly scheduled full backups to complete Cartridges that need to be transported via physical tape become Out of sync From the task bar select Initiate Tape Transport The Create Tape Export Pool screen opens From the SAN Automigration Library list select the physical library from which you want to copy the tapes Enter a Start and End Slot from the available slot range Select Submit The status of the copy pool changes to Exporting From the navigation tree select Import Export Pools and then select the ne
334. plication Without the license you may replicate whole backups across the LAN WAN However you need the replication license to replicate backups that have been deduplicated Deduplication enabled replication requires one license per node on the target site Storage Configuration Secure Erasure When you delete a cartridge this feature overwrites deleted cartridge data with a specific data pattern so the data cannot be recovered This is comparable to tape shredding of physical tapes This only applies to firmware version 6 0 and higher iLO 2 Advanced VLS nodes are shipped with the HP Integrated Lights Out iLO Standard feature for remote management However you need a license to use the iLO 2 Advanced features including Virtual Media and Remote Console Follow these steps to install the licenses described above l 2 NOOR 10 11 12 13 14 Use Command View VLS to obtain the VLS system serial number from the Identity tab Locate the paper or email entitlement certificate for the licenses you purchased You selected the delivery method during the ordering process HP recommends purchasing electronic certificates over physical certificates for faster delivery and the convenience of not having to manage either file away or throw away confidential paper certificates Log on to http www webware hp com Select Generate Licenses Sign in If you are a new user follow the onscreen instructions Enter the order
335. ploading firmware 71 SAN health report 150 SAN library editing availability windows 64 editing the policy 64 managing 53 unmanaging 54 Scan destination library 71 Secure Erasure installing license 48 secure erasure 129 secure shell session closing 102 opening 102 Send notification if cartridge not migrated in 57 Send notification if cartridge not replicated in 58 serial number VLS 133 warranty 109 serial user interface closing a session 102 emergency login 102 opening a session 102 Set RAID Mode 126 shipping carton contents 40 port connectivity kit 19 base disk array enclosure 16 17 VLS9000 node 18 VLS9200 node 18 Sizing factor 56 slot mapping adding LAN WAN 64 SAN 63 automigration 62 changing LAN WAN 64 SAN 63 removing LAN WAN 63 SAN 62 replication 63 slots locating with Advanced Search 68 replication target 77 SMI S modifying users 139 SNMP edit community string 138 edit settings 138 notification 138 Source cartridge size limit 57 specifications 246 20 port Fibre Channel Switch 249 disk array enclosure 248 environmental 254 Ethernet Switch 2510 24 252 Ethernet Switch 2810 24G 253 Fibre Channel Switch 4 16q 250 node 246 SSL certificate installing 100 Start Day 58 Start mirror of Out of Synch cartridges 57 58 Start Time 58 status of cartridges 79 status of virtual disks 124 Stop Tape Export 74 storage configuration 45 storage exerciser back
336. port on Ethernet switch 2 SW 2 via Ethernet cable Cable secondary nodes to the switch ports 2 through 8 in sequential order 4 NIC 3 Primary node connects to port 1 of Ethernet switch 1 SW1 via Ethernet cable Secondary nodes connects to the next available port on Ethernet switch 1 SW1 via Ethernet cable Cable secondary nodes to the switch ports 2 through 8 in sequential order 5 NIC 1 Primary node connects to your system s external network via Ethernet cable Secondary nodes connects to your system s external network when using replication via Ethernet cable NOTE Not all systems use all of the components listed in Table 3 page 29 The primary node node O is on the bottom of the stack of nodes From the bottom to the top they are node 0 node 1 node 2 node 3 The number of nodes will vary from system to system 1 Cable the primary node using Table 3 page 29 2 If you are installing more than one node cable the nodes using Table 3 page 29 Start at node 1 just above the primary node node 0 and work your way up the rack 3 Using Velcro secure the cables to the left side of the rack 4 Install loopback plugs on the nodes in all unused Fibre Channel ports IMPORTANT Do not touch the Fibre Channel cable tips Do not secure Fibre Channel cable with cable ties Cabling the Node 29 Installing the VLS High Performance Node into a Rack NOTE If you are i
337. pports using the HP VLS emulation for TSM version 5 5 1 or higher The HP VLS emulation is not intended for use with other backup applications 6 Click Next Step The window displays the default library name and the default number of Maximum Slots Maximum Ports and Maximum Drives based on the physical tape library emulation selected Figure 11 page 117 116 Configuration 10 11 12 13 Figure 11 Create Virtual Library Wizard window 2 of 12 Administrator O Command View VLS Identity Notifications Automigration Replication Help Step 2 of 12 for the library s cartridge slots import export ports and tape drives These set the maximum brary Help Cancel PrevStep CEA Change the library name if you prefer You can use letters numbers and underscores no blank spaces Enter the maximum number of cartridge slots that may be added to the library in the Maximum Slots box The default values in the Maximum Slots box is based on the physical tape library you selected CAUTION Changing the defaults can have unpredictable results if your backup application expects a certain number of slots in a specific library type Enter the maximum number of input export ports on which the library may be configured to be visible in the Maximum Ports box Enter the maximum number of tape drives the library may contain in the Maximum Drives box NOTE The maximum values entered cannot be changed l
338. present FC SW1 of a second kit ltem Description Connects to 8 9 Ports 8 9 Port O of RAID controller 1 of additional arrays via FC cable 18 19 Ports 18 19 Port O of RAID controller 1 of additional arrays via FC cable Table 12 Cabling Fibre Channel Switch 4 if present FC SW2 of a second kit Ports 8 9 Port O of RAID controller 2 of additional arrays via FC cable Ports 18 19 Port O of RAID controller 2 of additional arrays via FC cable Cabling Fibre Channel Switches NOTE Fibre Channel switch 1 is on the bottom and switch 2 is on the top If present Fibre Channel switch 3 is on the bottom and switch 4 is on the top l 2 Connect the Fibre Channel switches to the nodes base array enclosures and Ethernet switches if not already connected using Table 9 page 39 and Table 10 page 39 If you are installing more than one array a Connect a Fibre Channel cable from Fibre Channel switch 1 to port O of each additional RAID controller 1 array 1 array 2 etc Use the switch 1 ports in this order 19 8 18 7 17 6 16 b Connect a Fibre Channel cable from Fibre Channel switch 2 to port O of each additional RAID controller 2 array 1 array 2 etc Use the switch 2 ports in this order 19 8 18 7 17 6 16 If installing a second connectivity kit in rack 4 a Connect a Fibre Channel cable from Fibre Channel switch 3 to port O of each additional RAID controller 1 array
339. ptional getEmailServer Returns the E mail server configuration settings for notification alerts deleteEmailServer Deletes the specitied E mail server from the E mail notification alerts settings Where the options are a lt s gt E mail server address required c lt s gt VLS node IP address required Force This parameter is ignored and is present only for backward compatibility optional h Displays command usage information optional addEmail Adds an E mail address and desired report formatting to the E mail notification alert settings Where the options are a lt s gt E mail address required c lt s gt VLS IP address required s lt n gt Severity l Error 2 Warning 4 Info or 8 Unknown optional y lt n gt E mail type l Long with attachment 2 Long 4 Short or 8 Reports optional h Displays command usage information optional lt n gt Notification frequency O0 None 1 Daily 2 Weekly 3 Bi weekly or 4 Monthly optional getEmail Returns the report settings for each E mail address configured for notification alerts deleteEmail Deletes the specified E mail address from the E mail notification alert settings Where the options are a lt s gt E mail address required c lt s gt VLS node IP address required f Force This parameter is ignored and is present only for backward compatibility optional y lt n gt Email type 1 long with attachment 2 long 4 short 8 reports
340. r gt wwnn lt numerical wwnn gt e A double path failure that occurs upon booting the system results in the critical alert Missing Storage LUN paths on node This means the node can not communicate with the LUN at all If the failed paths are on the primary node the whole storage pool containing that LUN is off line if the failed paths are on a secondary node the storage pool is on line until reboot but the storage pool is inaccessible from that node In this case you can still get to the LUNs but only from a different node To repair double path failure assuming there has been no reboot during the failure 1 Determine the cause of the failures and repair them if needed 2 In Command View VLS access the System tab 3 Select Storage LUNs from the navigation tree 4 Select Fix Primary Paths from the task bar to display the Fix Primary Paths Wizard 5 Select Apply to set all paths back to their original settings LAN Dual Pathing The private LAN on the VLS has dual pathing which consists of a cable from each switch to each node If a LAN switch or a path to a LAN switch fails the data transfer will automatically fail over to the other available switch e The primary path is through NIC 2 of the switch and is referred to in the error notification as eth1 If the LAN switch associated with NIC2 fails the Notifications tab will display all eth1 failures e The secondary path is through the USB LAN cable and is identified
341. r m The node will then run cable checks and configuration checks After the checks are complete the node will reboot automatically Wait for the node to fully boot The new primary node will reboot once more atter it has retrieved the old configuration from the backend storage Wait until the new primary node boots up with the correct hostname and configuration 6 Log into Command View VLS and check e VIS identity e Chassis general information e General information for the primary node such as name serial number memory Ethernet etc e Fibre Channel configuration for the primary node host ports and storage ports e Virtual library configuration e Storage pool general information e EVA storage LUNs 234 Disaster Recovery e Cartridges configured e Automigration configuration e Host LUN mapping configuration 7 Power up all secondary nodes The boot up can take 10 to 20 minutes 8 Verity all secondary nodes At this point your VLS system is up and in working order Do not connect the old primary node to the VLS because its configuration will be out of sync with the system 9 Repair the old primary node and then Quick Restore it do not configure the node after the Quick Restore Power down the old node and keep it as the cold spare NOTE If your primary node failed within an hour of making a configuration change your most recent change may not be reinstated on the spare node Check your configuration settings
342. r supply has failed System Board Components ltem Description 1 System maintenance switch SW1 2 NMI switch 3 FBDIMM slots 1 8 4 Processor socket 2 5 Processor socket 1 6 DVD CD drive connector 7 Power button connector 8 Fan module 3 connectors 9 Fan module 2 connectors 10 Fan module 1 connectors T SAS hard drive backplane power connector 12 Integrated Smart RAID controller connector 13 Power supply connector 1 VLS9000 Node Components LEDs and Buttons 177 ltem Description 14 Power supply connector 2 15 Internal USB connector 16 System battery 17 PCI riser board connector 2 18 PCI riser board connector 1 Accessing the HP Systems Insight Display To eject the HP Systems Insight Display 1 Press and release the display 2 Extend the display from the chassis 11606 HP Systems Insight Display and LEDs The display provides status for all internal LEDs and enables diagnosis with the access panel installed To view the LEDs access the HP Systems Insight Display 178 Component Identification OVER TEMP 11440 tiem Description Status 1 Online spare memory LED Green Protection enabled Flashing amber Memory configuration error Amber Memory failure occurred Off No protection 2 Mirrored memory LED Green Protection enabled Flashing amber Memory configuration error Amber Memory failure occur
343. r system contains fewer than four full arrays start at rack position 9 Count down two rack positions for each available capacity enclosure and install the first capacity enclosure at the lowest point NOTE Install full arrays whenever possible A partial array one base enclosure and 1 2 capacity enclosures should be installed above the full arrays 11854 Lift the enclosure and slide it onto the rail ledges you previously installed 2 Attach the front of the enclosure to the front vertical posts using two 10 32 x 3 4 inch trusshead screws on each side Do not tighten the screws 3 In the rear of the rack align the enclosure side bracket arm holes with the holes in the rail Install two 6 32 x 1 4 panhead screws NOTE You may need to remove the power supplies to install these screws Installing the Disk Array Enclosures into a Rack 25 NOS Tighten all four screws Repeat this procedure to install up to two more capacity enclosure above the previous one At the top of the capacity enclosures install the base enclosure Install the remaining base and capacity enclosures If you are installing four full arrays continue installing three capacity enclosures beneath each base enclosure working up the rack If you are installing fewer than four full arrays begin at rack position 17 Count down two rack positions for each available capacity enclosure and begin installing them at the lowest point Then ins
344. rack e Install up to five nodes in the second rack starting in positions 33 and 34 working up the rack Cabling External Connections 30 NOTE Ethernet port 1 NIC 1 and Fibre Channel ports 1 and 2 on the nodes are only to be used for external connections On the nodes 1 Connect one end of a Fibre Channel cable to Fibre Channel port 1 on the node Connect the other end to your system s SAN 2 Connect one end of a Fibre Channel cable to Fibre Channel port 2 on the node Connect the other end to your system s SAN Hardware Installation 3 Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to NIC 1 on the primary node Connect the other end to the external network If your configuration contains one connectivity kit the VLS9200 hardware installation is complete Continue installation by configuring the identities of each node and array See the HP 9200 Virtual Library System User Guide If your configuration contains two connectivity kits see the HP 9000 Virtual Library System Interswitch Link Kit Installation Instructions to install the XPAK transponders and cable the switches in racks 1 and 3 Installing the Ethernet Switches 6600 into a Rack Installing the switch into the rack involves installing the rails in the rack attaching the mounting brackets to the switch and installing the switch into the rack Install the switches immediately above the Fibre Channel switches previously installed l nO Locate the follo
345. rack 2 Extend the node on the rack rails until the node rail release latches engage 3 After performing the replacement procedure slide the node back into the rack a Press the node rail release latches and slide the node fully into the rack b Secure the node by tightening the thumbscrews Preparation Procedures 215 Removing a VLS Node from the Rack To remove the node from a rack 1 Power off the node See Powering Off the System 2 Disconnect the cabling 3 Extend the node from the rack See Extending a VLS Node from the Rack 4 Remove the node from the rack For more information refer to the documentation that ships with the rack mounting option 5 Place the node on a sturdy level surface Removing the VLS Node Access Panel A WARNING Pressing the Power on Standby button sets the node to the standby position which removes power from most areas of the node However portions of the power supply and some internal circuitry remain active until the AC power cord is removed WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury from hot surfaces allow the internal system components to cool before touching them A CAUTION Do not operate the node for long periods without the access panel Operating the node without the access panel results in improper airflow and improper cooling that can lead to thermal damage CAUTION Electrostatic discharge can damage electronic components Properly ground yourself before beginn
346. rack position 33 5 Tighten the thumbscrews 6 Repeat this procedure to install all of the nodes in the rack See NOTE below for details NOTE If your rack contains single phase PDUs e Install up to four nodes in the first rack starting in position 35 working up the rack e Install up to four nodes in the second rack starting in position 35 working up the rack If your rack contains 3 phase PDUs e Install up to six nodes in the first rack starting in position 33 working up the rack e Install up to two nodes in the second rack starting in position 33 working up the rack Hardware Installation Cabling the Node Tg g a Ea Ea Table 3 Cabling the Node ltem Description Connects to 1 FC port 4 Primary node connects to port O of Fibre Channel switch 2 in rack 1 FC SW2 via FC cable Secondary nodes connects to the next available port on Fibre Channel switch 2 FC SW2 via FC cable Cable secondary nodes to the switch ports in this order 10 1 11 2 12 3 13 2 FC port 3 Primary node connects to port O of Fibre Channel switch 1 in rack 1 FC SW1 via FC cable Secondary nodes connects to the next available port on Fibre Channel switch 1 FC SW1 via FC cable Cable secondary nodes to the switch ports in this order 10 1 11 2 12 3 13 3 NIC 4 Primary node connects to port 1 of Ethernet switch 2 SW2 via Ethernet cable Secondary nodes connects to the next available
347. rall data reduction compression plus optional deduplication of your VLS is displayed by the ratio provided under the various views Capacity Manager screens are accessible to both the administrator and guest users The Capacity Manager provides storage statistics based on the existing backup data on your VLS The Capacity Manager screens are interactive and allow real time reporting to facilitate information sharing The comprehensive view of storage capacity allows you to keep track of the amount of storage that has been allocated to the different storage pools The Capacity Manager is designed to assist you in identifying future storage requirements from a storage pool perspective Accessing the Capacity Manager To access the Capacity Manager screens with different capacity usage views 1 Log into Command View VLS 2 From the side bar Navigation Tree select Capacity to display the System Capacity screen Figure 18 System Capacity Screen Expand Collapse Refresh E Chassis vis300n0 usa hp com E gt Capacity gt Storage Pools lt gt Virtual Libraries Manager System Capacity lews Cartridges T gt Deduplication H e gt Nodes LUN Mapping m Virtual Libraries m I Storage Pools Storage LUNs Cartridges E tgs Disk Arrays Statistical Graph 40 000 30 000 ron Jo o Logical Data Used Capacity Available Capacity of Storage Details
348. rays The Update Firmware screen lists the available disk array firmware upgrade It provides the disk model and revision numbers of the disks that are able to receive the upgrade Only disks meeting the upgrade criteria display on this screen To update the firmware on the array disks Managing Disk Arrays 125 1 Navigate to the Manage Virtual Disks screen see Managing Disk Arrays page 124 2 Select Update Firmware from the task bar 3 Select the disks you want to update to the new firmware To narrow the list of disks displayed by disk array enclosure or revision use the Select Disks list then select Update 4 Select Submit A warning message displays 5 Review the warning and select Continue The Update Firmware screen displays You can select Cancel to cancel the update process or select different disks 6 If necessary click the De select disks pending for update link to remove certain disks from the update process 7 Reboot the system See Rebooting the System page 95 The firmware update begins after the reboot 8 Goto http lt vls hostname gt where lt vls hostname gt is the hostname of the system running the firmware update to open the Disk firmware update progress screen and monitor the progress If you are only updating SAS drives when all of the disks have been updated to the new firmware the VLS automatically reboots If you are updating any SATA drives when all of the disks have b
349. red Off No protection All other LEDs Amber Failure Off Normal For additional information detailing the causes for the activation of these LEDs refer to HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations NOTE The HP Systems Insight Display LEDs represent the system board layout HP Systems Insight Display LEDs and Internal Health LED Combinations When the internal health LED on the front panel illuminates either amber or red the server is experiencing a health event Combinations of illuminated system LEDs and the internal health LED indicate system status Internal health LED Status color HP Systems Insight Display LED and color Processor failure Red One or more of the following conditions may exist socket X amber e Processor in socket X has failed e Processor X is required yet not installed in the socket e Processor X is unsupported e ROM detects a failed processor during POST Amber Processor in socket X is in a pre failure condition VLS9000 Node Components LEDs and Buttons 179 HP Systems Insight Internal health LED Status Display LED and color color PPM failure slot X Red One or more of the following conditions may exist amber e PPM in slot X has failed e PPM is not installed in slot X but the corresponding processor is installed FBDIMM failure slot X Red FBDIMM in slot X has failed a
350. ree The device status possibilities are e Good The component part of the component or the virtual device is operating normally e Degraded The component or one or more parts of the component has failed or is operating outside of its normal range but is still operational e Critical The component or one or more parts of the component has failed or exceeded its limits Although it is still operational VLS failure is imminent e Failed The component or one or more parts of the component has failed and the VLS is inoperable Immediate service is needed e Missing The VLS cannot detect the component or a part of the component In addition to the device status a red or yellow alert bar will highlight specific parts of a component when that particular element within the component has failed red or is operating outside its normal range yellow To view the status information for a VLS hardware component or virtual device from Command View VLS 1 Click the System tab 2 Click the object in the navigation tree that represents the hardware component or virtual device that you want to view The status information for the object selected and its subobjects in the navigation tree is displayed in the status pane Status Icons The current overall status of the VLS is displayed on Command View VLS as an icon in the status banner In addition components or parts of a component whose condition is not Good are marke
351. riate row to cancel a Read only job To delete jobs from the status table check the jobs in the Select column and then click Delete Selected Starting and Reviewing Background Jobs To run a Background job from the Configuration tab l Make changes to the default configuration if necessary see Configuring the Storage Exerciser page 155 Stress Testing Hard Disks using the Storage Exerciser 157 2 Select the Background Job tab This tab displays information for all previous and current Background jobs The Storage Pool Number of Concurrent Jobs and Compressibility Ratio fields contain the default information entered in the Configuration tab 3 If you want the job to stop after a particular time period enter it in the Test Duration field Otherwise leave the Unlimited box checked to allow the test to run indefinitely 4 If you want to restrict the maximum amount of data the job will write enter the amount in GB in the Max Data to Write field Otherwise leave the Unlimited box checked to allow it to write any amount of data 5 If you want to choose which nodes will be tested follow the steps below Otherwise all available nodes are selected by default a Click the Select Nodes link b Select the nodes you want to test c Click Done 6 Click Start The job appears in the status table and will run reading and writing data continuously until the job duration is complete if you added one or until you cancel th
352. rimary node connect to the serial port or use the keyboard and mouse ports to connect to a console b Power on the primary node After several minutes a menu will appear on your monitor asking whether the node is a primary master m or secondary slave s node c Enter m The node will then run cable checks and configuration checks d After the checks are complete the node will reboot automatically Wait for the primary node to fully boot Rebooting is complete when you receive the Initializing node and then Initializing for node completed messages in the systems notifications if you have DHCP enabled of Command View VLS or when you see the login prompt on the terminal The warm failover feature will now automatically restore the original configuration and licenses Replacing a Secondary Node A CAUTION Each VLS node weighs 17 9 kg 39 5 Ib full At least two people are required to lift and move each node To replace a secondary node l oF a Sei Remove the existing node from the rack a Power off the system See Powering Off the System b From the back of the node make a note of all cable connections then disconnect the cables c From the front of the node loosen the captive thumbscrews until the thumbscrews are free of the rack d Pull the node out from the rack until it stops e s the release brackets see Figure 30 page 222 then pull the node free from the rails Install the new
353. rnet Switch 4 if present SW2 of a second kit ltem Description Connects to 17 20 Ports 17 20 Ethernet port of RAID Controller 1 of additional base array enclosures via Ethernet cable NOTE Ethernet switch 1 is on the bottom and switch 2 is on the top If present Ethernet switch 3 is on the bottom and switch 4 is on the top 1 Connect the Ethernet switches to each other and to the Fibre Channel switches using Table 4 page 34 and Table 5 page 34 2 Connect the Ethernet switches to the nodes and base array enclosures if not already connected If installing multiple arrays a Connect an Ethernet cable from Ethernet switch 1 to RAID controller 2 of additional arrays in order array 1 array 2 etc Use the switch 1 ports in this order 20 17 18 15 16 13 14 b Connect an Ethernet cable from Ethernet switch 2 to RAID controller 1 of additional arrays in order array 1 array 2 etc Use the switch 2 ports in this order 20 17 18 15 16 13 14 NOTE Each rack supports up to four arrays 3 If installing a second connectivity kit in rack 4 a Connect an Ethernet cable from Ethernet switch 3 to RAID controller 2 of additional arrays in order array 13 array 14 etc Use the switch 3 ports in this order 19 20 17 18 b Connect an Ethernet cable from Ethernet switch 4 to RAID controller 1 of additional arrays in order array 13 array 14 etc Use the switch 4 ports in this order 19
354. rray A group of disks in one or more disk enclosures combined with controller software that presents disk storage capacity as one or more virtual disks The process in which the virtual tape library acts as a tape copy engine that transfers data from virtual cartridges on disk to a physical tape library connected to the virtual tape device An application used to create manage and monitor backups Also known as data transfer rate The amount of data that can be carried from one point to another in a given time period A real communications path usually consists of a succession of links each with its own bandwidth If one of these is much slower than the rest it is said to be a bandwidth bottleneck 1 A removable storage module that contains magnetic or optical disks magnetic tape or memory chips 2 Software emulation of the behavior and contents of a physical tape cartridge on alternate media such as disk is called a virtual tape or virtual media See also virtual tape A metal box that houses computer hardware Command line interface An interface comprised of various commands which are used to control operating system responses The activity of copying files or databases so that they will be preserved in case of equipment failure or other catastrophe The retrieval of files you backed up is called restoring files A software or hardware process that shrinks data files so that they occupy less storage space and can be tra
355. rred and executes the switch self test 3 Locator LED Blinking blue Locate function is active Firmware controlled can be set to on or blinking Off Locate function is disabled 4 Fault LED Orange The switch has encountered a fatal hardware failure or has failed its self test This LED comes on briefly after the switch is powered on or reset at the beginning of switch self test Blinking orange A fault has occurred on the switch one of the switch ports or the fan The status LED for the component with the fault will blink simultaneously If just the Fault LED is blinking the switch could be attached to an RPS but not receiving power Off Indicates that there are no fault conditions on the switch Ethernet Switch 2810 24G Components LEDs and Buttons 199 Item Description 5 Power LED Status Green The switch is receiving power Off The switch is not receiving power 6 RPS status LED Green An HP ProCurve EPS RPS unit is connected and operating correctly The EPS RPS could be powering the unit Blinking green The EPS RPS is connected but may be powering another switch or the EPS RPS has experienced a fault Off The EPS RPS is not connected or is not powered 6 Fan status LED 6 Self test LED Green The cooling fan is working properly Off One of the unit s fans has failed The switch Fault LED will be blinking simultaneously Green The switch self test and
356. rt Freeing up Storage Space 131 e After adding a virtual tape drive and the default LUN number assigned to it is not consecutive with the other virtual tape drives in the same library e After deleting external array LUNs CAUTION Restarting VLS device emulations changes the default virtual device LUN numbers if there is a gap in the LUN numbering or if there is a tape drive whose LUN number is not consecutive with the other tape drives in the same library The firmware changes the LUN numbers as necessary to remove the gap or to make the virtual tape drive LUN numbers consecutive in each library so that the virtual device LUN numbering meets the operating system LUN requirements When this occurs on each host e Rescan the SAN with the operating system for hardware changes e Rescan for new devices with the backup application and update the backup application device files CAUTION Restarting VLS device emulations places the VLS cartridges back into the same library slots and tape drives they were in at the time of reboot restart To move the cartridges from tape drives back into the appropriate slots use Force Unload from the task bar visible when you select the tape drive from the navigation tree To restart the VLS device emulations from Command View VLS Click the System tab Select Chassis in the navigation tree Select System Maintenance under Maintenance Tasks Select Restart Emulations in the task bar The
357. s e Capacity A VLS capacity license must be installed on the VLS when you add additional disk array enclosures Each enclosure whether a base or capacity enclosure comes with its own capacity license This is new for the VLS9200 Previously the node and the capacity bundle each came with a base license that covered an array If you are in a license violation state all VLS read write operations are disabled until either sufficient licenses are installed to support the storage or the excess storage is removed When you have cleared a license violation by installing an upgrade capacity license the VLS read write operations are automatically enabled without requiring a reboot The base license on the node enables the storage that is part of the base SKU The capacity bundle includes the capacity license and the registration materials necessary for installing capacity licenses NOTE Do not discard the registration materials included in the capacity bundle e Deduplication A VLS deduplication license must be installed on the VLS before you can use the deduplication feature The number of deduplication licenses must match or exceed the number of capacity licenses installed After you install the deduplication licenses the VLS system automatically enables the deduplication feature for all supported backup types e Replication A VLS replication license must be installed on the VLS before you can use deduplication enabled re
358. s instead of purchasing a capacity kit containing an array An array contains one base enclosure and three capacity enclosures Each base enclosure can support three capacity enclosures so purchase accordingly For example if you have a base enclosure and one capacity enclosure purchase 1 2 capacity enclosures If you have a base enclosure and two capacity enclosures purchase one additional capacity enclosure for more capacity purchase another base enclosure and up to three more capacity enclosures Each VLS9200 node can support up to two arrays If you intend to add base and capacity enclosures that exceed that limit purchase an additional node NOTE The VLS sequentially numbers arrays as they are added starting with Array 1 Array numbering previously began at O Starting at array 1 is new to VLS firmware 6 1 0 Only add one VLS array at a time so you can control the number assigned to each array NOTE The Fibre Channel and Ethernet switches should be powered on before adding storage capacity To add a VLS9200 disk array enclosure 1 Install the capacity licenses See Installing Additional Licenses page 48 Each base and capacity enclosure comes with its own capacity licenses 10 TB enclosures require one license while 20 TB enclosures require two A CAUTION Ifa base or capacity enclosure is added to a VLS system without sufficient capacity licenses installed a capacity license violation will occur If t
359. s outside of the library then it is now out of sync with the virtual tape in the firesafe If you want to keep these modifications to the physical tape you will need to ensure that the data is copied to the virtual tape Either manually delete the virtual tape from the firesafe or perform a Load Media for Restore This forces the system to read the physical tape upon load and causes automigration to create a new virtual copy See Restoring from a SAN Physical Cartridge page 59 Editing Copy Pools The following sections describe the copy pool edit operations available to the user Moving a Copy Pool When there is not enough space left on a virtual library a copy pool can be moved to a different virtual library To move a copy pool from one virtual library to another 1 Select the Automigration Replication tab and expand the task bar of the navigation tree 2 Under Destination Libraries select Copy Pools 3 From the Name column in the copy pools lists select the copy pool to be moved 4 From the Copy Pool Details window task bar select Change Local Library 5 From the CHANGE LOCAL LIBRARY window verify the current local library on which the pool resides 6 Select the new local library then select Submit The Echo Copy Pool Details window displays along with the message The local library was successtully changed NOTE When an echo copy pool moves to a different local library the associated automigration tapes a
360. s physically installed This feature called oversubscription permits configuring your system for anticipated storage growth configure cartridges beyond your current capacity and then seamlessly add physical storage later By default oversubscription is disabled NOTE Using oversubscription you run the risk of running out of physical storage capacity and requires careful planning of your storage needs and a review of your current storage policy Editing the Default Fibre Channel Host Port Settings 109 Enabling and Disabling Oversubscription To enable oversubscription In Command View VLS 1 Select the System tab 2 Select Chassis in the navigation tree The chassis details window opens 3 In the Oversubscription section select Enabled 4 The Notify when storage capacity is x Full box defaults to 90 You may change the value or leave it at 90 This percentage value is the threshold of storage space consumed that when reached triggers a storage capacity notification alert If this threshold is set to zero 0 an alert will be sent only when existing capacity has been reached 5 Click Apply Settings To disable oversubscription deselect the Enabled box NOTE Oversubscription cannot be disabled while cartridge capacity is oversubscribed Shutdown at 98 Capacity The system displays warnings on the Notifications screen when the backend storage capacity consumed reaches the user defined threshold determined w
361. scovered by the scan Those with the box checked in the configured area already have a working IP address and cannot be configured Those that do not may be Configured All the devices may have their beacon activated Configured Description gt Type Device IP Serial Number VLS visxxxxxxx none 00 0 0 xx xx xx xx xx xx a a Configure Beacon Exit 3 To visually identify a device listed select the device from the list and click Beacon This will illuminate an LED on the device for the specified length of time In the case of the VLS the UID LED button on the VLS node illuminates 4 Select the VLS from the list of devices and click Configure The Device Configuration window opens 5 Leave the default host name or enter a new host name in the Host Name box The default VLS host name is VLS lt VLS serial number gt The host name cannot contain spaces Enter an IP address in the IP Address box 7 Enter the subnet mask in the Subnet Mask box O NOTE To display the correct subnet mask gateway DNS server and domain name settings for the VLS open a DOS window on the computer running the VLS discovery utility and type ipconfig all 8 Enter the gateway in the Gateway box 9 Enter the DNS server IP address in the DNS IP Address box 10 Enter the domain name in the Domain Name box 11 Click Configure to save the network settings to the VLS 12 Click Exit to close the VLS discovery utility
362. se DHCP IP Address Gateway Address Het Mask Primary DUS Secondary DUS Node0 15 38 72 170 15 38 721 255 255 248 0 16 110 135 52 16 110 135 51 Chassis Network Settings Host Name vistst05 Domain Name gr hp com NTP Settings Priman Serwer 15 6 91 162 dary NTP Server 15 6 91 163 Click Finish to apply the settings NOTE The system automatically reboots after any change NOTE If you need to clear the DNS completely clear the Use DHCP checkbox and enter 0 0 0 0 for both the primary and secondary DNS server addresses Setting the User Preferences Setting the user preferences allows you to Set the frequency at which the system state is checked and the browser is refreshed Add the VLS administrator s name company mail and phone number and the VLS location to the Identity tab window Set the maximum number of notification alerts to store To set the user preferences from Command View VLS l 2 3 Ore From the System tab select Chassis in the navigation tree Click User Preferences under Maintenance Tasks The User Preferences window opens Enter a value in seconds in the State Polling Frequency box The default state polling frequency is 15 seconds Enter the appropriate numeric value in the Number of Notifications dialog box Enter the company name in the Company dialog box Enter the city and state where the VLS is located in the Location dialog box This is displayed on
363. se two 8 32 x 3 16 inch flathead screws on each side 5 11852 Locate the enclosure side brackets and screws from the rack mounting hardware kit contents Position the enclosure side bracket with the long edge down and the arms flush with the top of the enclosure Line up the outermost beveled slots of the enclosure side bracket with the rear holes in the enclosure The rear arm extends slightly past the back of the enclosure Install two 8 32 x 3 16 inch flathead screws into the slots Tighten both screws NOTE Using screws longer than 8 32 x 3 16 inch may result in interference with the power supply Repeat this procedure for the other side bracket and for each enclosure to be added Attaching the Front to the Rear Rail Pieces To attach the front and rear rail pieces use three 8 32 x 3 8 inch flathead screws for each complete rail 11855 Installing the Disk Array Enclosures into a Rack 23 6 Locate the front and rear rail pieces and screws from the rack mounting hardware kit contents NOTE The front rail piece has three long beveled slots The rear rail piece has holes Slide the rear rail piece behind the front rail piece so the brackets are at opposite ends and bend away from you Line up the center of the beveled slots on the front rail piece with the first third and fifth holes in the rear rail piece counting from the unbent end Install but do not completely tighten three 8 32 x 3 8
364. sed Capacity The physical storage used for data whether or not it is deduplicated Available Capacity The physical storage currently available for additional backup data This is the total Usable Capacity less the Used Capacity Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity Viewing Additional Information about a Library To view additional capacity information about a Library e On the information screen click the Library name field The Library Capacity screen displays capacity information for this Library which is a graphical representation showing the Logical Used and Available storage capacity Monitoring Storage Capacity 143 Figure 21 Library Capacity Screen Expand Collapse Refresh ed E Chassis vis300n0 usa hp com Peai Capicity Library_2000 Capacity Storage Pools gt Virtual Libraries a200 30 000 gt Cartridges SES gt lt Deduplication 25 000 m e Nodes 22 500 6 LUN Mapping 20 000 W Virtual Libraries 17 500 E Storage Pools Sacer 12 500 Storage LUNs 10 000 Cartridges 7 500 E tye Disk Arrays 5 000 2 500 o Logical Data Used Capacity Available Capacity Library Library_2000 Allocated Capacity Logical Data Used Capacity Available Capacity Ratio 22 50 TB 32 06 TB 9 82 TB 12 68 TB 33 11 Cartridges Library_2000 1 100 of 500 Last Page Next 100 Barcode Allocated Capacity Logical Data Used Capacity Ratio D
365. sensas 157 log Monitor SUMMIGIY 1 1215 cctwencrtlanciavededonntesiatvaquledieataiavs anauetecadealanelennendinosaineeinniiats 158 Koto MEARE as rae E E 159 Clearing All Systemi Fa lisnrreiiiiirornineiiiicsriin i EEn E EEE E E 160 Clearing the Hardware Compression FOUMts siccccesncvacoueedseucencessasonctdcesss neusenssntedvesdsteueeunseeidevistowes 160 Trace log Fel ete cated aed nrnna E EEE EE E ENE EEEREN aia 161 Viewing Trace Log PINGS apex ncst ree sopersaretunbicinrecoundsedecraadononseedcntueeneeuncicsaeetocuinrdemesa ae teeeisneen 161 Saving a Trace Log FG hscsini ae d A ayeudocnctieeleentuenaneociiaoasenduciountencaeteancnenenetenieeie otenctancenlises antes 161 Creating a Support WGK scntce tcdventvebereinantenceneiatien anew E ERa 161 12 CU Command Sef ssiri isesi nss esA sanji rire aeure iirin icine iiie nesia 163 C mmand Sss ee n a E E EEE a E EAER 163 Conven CNIS 55 15 sia eevee nd ENEE E NEE E E EE rrien EE EEDE E E TEE IRERE 163 Uo Commands erase enn e severe EEEE EER ede 163 Connection Command Sissies iiaa a a aa E E 163 Output Se 111 1 6 eee Re een TRO eee ee See tetett teses enC Renn nen wee nD ee Ce ene eee EE 164 VIS C OnmIMCisivcysinteratanitsuileaerchcesisasindaalaredtanciainanio en dgies siete amas 164 Network Settings Configuration Command ccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesccesteeeeeeesesesiseeeeeeees 164 Configuration Connie Syce 5cecctseeecterseeeteeeirieocaneetuhiwertinmimeuemiaeua 165 Management Gaines ja
366. sitive 6 Click Login Installing the SSL Certificate into your Web Browser The first time you open a Command View VLS session and the first time you open a Command View VLS session after changing the fully qualified name of the VLS a message that reads There is a problem with this website s security certificate appears on the screen Although you can continue to the login screen you will get this message every time you access the login screen until you install the SSL certificate into your web browser The following procedure describes how to install the certificate for Internet Explorer 7 Other browsers may have a different process 1 Select Continue to this website not recommended A pink Certificate Error appears to the right of the URL Your browser window may look slightly different from the images below aga v i Certificate Error 4 Xx pe 2 Select the Certificate Error An Untrusted Certificate window opens 100 User Interfaces x e x Untrusted Certificate dh Pag Otol R OB The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted certificate authority This problem may indicate an attempt to fool you or intercept any data you send to the server We recommend that you close this webpage About certificate errors View certificates Select View certificates A Certificate window opens Select Install Certificate to lau
367. slot latches 5 Remove the FBDIMM A CAUTION Use only Compaq branded or HP FBDIMMs FBDIMMs from other sources may adversely affect data integrity To replace the component reverse the removal procedure VLS Node Component Replacement 221 NOTE FBDIMMs do not seat fully if turned the wrong way When replacing a FBDIMM align the FBDIMM with the slot and insert the FBDIMM firmly 1 pressing down until the FBDIMM snaps into place When fully seated the FBDIMM slot latches 2 lock into place a Da 11472 Replacing a Primary Node A CAUTION Each VLS node weighs 17 9 kg 39 5 Ib full At least two people are required to lift and move each node To replace a primary node 1 Remove the existing node from the rack a Power off the system See Powering Off the System b From the back of the node make a note of all cable connections then disconnect the cables c From the front of the node loosen the captive thumbscrews until the thumbscrews are free of the rack Pull the node out from the rack until it stops e Squeeze the release brackets see Figure 30 page 222 then pull the node free from the rails Figure 30 Rail Release Bracket 11163 Install the new node into the rack See Installing the VLS Node into a Rack 2 3 Reconnect the cables to the new node exactly as they were connected to the previous node 4 Configure the node 222 Component Replacement 5 a On the p
368. sseccecseeeeessseeeecssseeeeesseeeceseeesensaaes 82 Viewing the Job PISO Y xcceeriscsavatnahcvcnsica cad ascutiny semi aaden ecdeinbennahee ennai uaumuanian 82 Exporting the Job History to a CSV File ssc cccccesanoncccusacseaveasnementneaesoseencaun ntuosedas sendanvcnecenelas 83 Viewing the oles 10 1a a s erent aCe te ee ere mer ee eon ee eA Mer eee 83 Configuring the GUI Displays aicevarzcncencueneuacereteanesticyenmtencces siuiaentiatbadees wledasnecndetereiandnganenttecds 83 Testing the VLS oC ShneGHVIIN gt Acecxeetseeccdecetenetlceceardeelsadeta ietentelladeeainevieiaeeeicaee 84 eSNG er A EE 85 How lt Works sssssssseissseeessseetisssttssssetsstttttstttsssstttst ttt tSS tEE ESSE eu ga SEEE SS SEE ESSEE S ie essre rasten ees reen nt 85 Getting Deduplication Running on the ViSwsrsisicaisieicecectensesaieedcicnctsastineie oie nhwwiincialnk 85 C nsiderdtiOnS essasi nin a ikae i ai aaea ai anaa nT yee fret shart ai aieiaa 85 Installing the Firmware saisssnierisessrysiiieiii aien E EE E EEEE RE 86 Installing the Deduplication eeise secs nciccusscuccivsasnnseoencveedecasmedvomesseberioouenxtieeeadeavinuseameneeds 86 Configuring Deduplication Options icscect dh totbndeceliethtannscelecalsceridocnisatecaladerntoneuceleca niaubbertacalets 86 Editing the Data Protector COnnguration ti steucsseiecenseyieesicasiedtedornnngoetaseaseutenieheerdessinenemeclanties 87 Viewing Deduplication Statistics and RE SOS ccicstideiccicniaiialaricetcmendetineane
369. ssword and then retype it in the next field Select Add Availability Windows to open a new screen This takes you to a new screen In the Add Availability Window section of the screen select the day and enter the time the replication process should begin Enter the allowable duration of the replication jobs in hours and minutes Replication jobs can only begin during the availability window When the availability window ends any replication jobs currently in progress will continue until they complete No replication jobs can begin until the next availability window opens Click Add The window refreshes and the availability window you just added is moved to the Current Availability Windows section of the screen Repeat steps 12 through 14 for as many availability windows as you need Click Submit The screen returns to the selected library s list of LAN WAN replication targets Assign the LAN WAN replication target to the source library See Managing a LAN WAN Replication Library page 53 NOTE When you configure a virtual library as a LAN WAN replication target with Echo Copy you may also need to hide it e g using LUN masking or port mapping zoning from the front end SAN in the case where the same backup application instance sees both the source and destination VLS devices The backup application must not see the same tape barcode in two places at the same time See LUN Mapping page 11 2 for details Viewing the R
370. st start time e Time of last update to the job e Test end time e Number of the storage pool tested e Total amount of data written during the test at this point e Direction read or write e Result success or fail e Message if any associated with the failed job e External connect error if any e Source barcode of the job e Target barcode of the job Clearing All System Faults If the VLS system is showing a degraded status even after the fault that lead to the degraded status has been cleared you can force a rescan of the VLS system From Command View VLS 1 On the System tab select Chassis in the navigation tree 2 On the task bar select Clear All Faults The screen refreshes and the correct status is displayed If the status does not change it was already correct All fault notifications are cleared from the Notifications tab NOTE This operation clears all of the arrays from Command View VLS In about five minutes the arrays return with an updated view Clearing the Hardware Compression Faults If the VLS node is showing a hardware compression status that you think is incorrect or if you want to verify the status shown you can force a rescan of the node From Command View VLS 1 On the System tab expand Chassis in the navigation tree 2 Expand Nodes 3 Select the node of interest in the navigation tree 160 Monitoring 4 On the task bar select Clear Compression Faults T
371. st to the state specified VLS Commands 169 Table 27 CLI Configuration Commands continued Command Usage listAccessMode Lists the current host access mode for all enabled hosts in the system setAccessMode Sets the host access mode for all enabled hosts in the system setAlias Sets the alias for the hostname of the specified host removeHost Deletes the specified host from the SAN list addLunMap Adds the specified device to the host listLunMap Lists the host LUN map for specified device deleteLunMap Deletes the specified device from the host getTapeSerialConpatibiLityodk Returns the compatibility mode for the virtual serial numbers setTapeSerialConpatibilityvbde Sets the compatibility mode for the virtual serial numbers Upgrading to VLS firmware version 3 3 0 cause the colons in serial numbers to change to periods m lt s gt Compatibility mode e Standard default keeps change of using periods instead of colons e Legacy changes periods to back to colons getWwnnCompatibilityMode Returns the firmware version compatibility mode for the WWNNs l lt s gt string lt n gt number lt f gt filename Management Commands Use the CLI commands in CLI Management commands to e Change the account passwords e Manage cartridges e Restart the VLS device emulations e Save configuration settings e Restore configuration settings Table 28 CLI Management Commands Command
372. stalled you can Quick Restore your system using the Virtual Media feature see the iLO user guide for details Restoring the System with Warm Failover After any configuration or license change the VLS automatically saves within one hour the updated configuration and licenses to a hidden virtual cartridge stored on the back end disk arrays When you replace the node or node hard drives or re install the operating system the VLS uses this information to automatically restore the system to a configuration identical to what it had before This automated process eliminates the need to manually restore the configuration 230 Disaster Recovery Manually Restoring the System After re installing the operating system the warm failover feature restores the licenses and configuration settings However if the warm failover does not occur for example due to a corrupt or missing file the VLS virtual library configuration and network settings can be quickly restored from the configuration file created by performing a Save Configuration See Restoring the Configuration from a Configuration File If a configuration file was not created you must reconfigure the network settings and rebuild the virtual library and virtual drive configurations The cartridge configurations however do not have to be rebuilt as they are stored on the disk arrays See Manually Rebuilding the Virtual Library Configuration In either case begin by re installing the l
373. sts iLO 3 NIC link LED Green Link exists Off No link exists UID button LED Blue Identification is activated Flashing blue System is being managed remotely Off Identification is deactivated Power supply 2 LED Green Normal Off System is off or power supply has failed Power supply 1 LED 184 Component Identification Green Normal Off System is off or power supply has failed System Board Components Item Description 1 NMI jumper 2 System maintenance switch 3 10 Gb sideband connector 4 SATA DVD ROM drive connector 5 SAS cache module connector 6 Power button connector 7 Hard drive data connector 1 drives 1 4 8 Hard drive data connector 2 drives 5 8 9 Processor 1 DIMM slots 9 10 Fan module 4 connector T Processor socket 1 populated 12 Fan module 3 connector 13 Fan module 2 connector 14 Processor socket 2 15 Fan module 1 connector 16 Processor 2 DIMM slots 9 17 SD card slot 18 Internal USB connector 19 Hard drive power connector 1 20 Hard drive power connector 2 21 Power supply connector 1 22 System battery 23 Power supply connector 2 VLS9200 Node Components LEDs and Buttons 185 Item Description 24 PCI power connector 25 TPM connector 26 PCle riser board connectors 2 Accessing the HP System Insight Display You access the HP Syst
374. t Mail Server Settings in the task bar The Edit Mail Server Settings window opens 3 To add a mail server a Enter the domain name for a mail server with an SMTP gateway that will process mail from the VLS in the Outgoing Mail Server box b If you want to change the From address which defaults to administrator lt device name gt type the preferred address in the Sender Email Address box c Click Add d To add another email server repeat these steps 4 To delete an email server from the list click the Remove button for the email server 136 Monitoring Edit the Email Settings Email notification is sent to the persons you include on the email distribution list in the email settings You specify the email notification alert severity and format settings for each person on the distribution list To create an email distribution list for notification alerts add an email address to the list or remove an email address from the list 1 Log in to Command View VLS as the administrator See Opening a Command View VLS Session from a Web Browser page 99 2 Click the Notifications tab The Notifications window displays 3 Click Edit Email Settings in the task bar The Edit Email Settings window opens Figure 17 page 137 Figure 17 Edit Email Settings window KA Command View VLS Notifications Setup Help Cancel aaa F 4 To add an email address a Enter an email address in the Email Address box b Select
375. t the details displayed on the screen to a text file by selecting Export Cartridge Details in the task bar You can view the activity log of the cartridge which lists the important events operations and state transitions by selecting View Log in the task bar The list displays the most recent activity first To download the entire log file select Export Log File from the task bar Configuring the Cartridge Status To configure the cartridge status Summary of all Cartridges Managed by Automigration Replication screen l 2 3 4 5 6 Select the Automigration Replication tab In the navigation tree expand Configuration Summary Select Cartridge Summary from the expanded list Enter the time you want the system to check for cartridges not migrated within the copy pools threshold limit Use the HH MM format then select AM or PM from the list Each day at the specified time if one or more cartridges have not migrated within the threshold limit the system sends a notification that indicates the number of cartridges that have not migrated in time Check the Send Notification box if you want a notification when cartridges are not migrated in the copy pools threshold limit Unselect it to cancel notifications Click Submit Viewing the Current Status of Jobs To view the current status of jobs l 2 Select the Automigration Replication tab In the navigation tree select Job reporting The screen opens to the
376. t the port Mode LEDs are lit for ports that are in Full Duplex Mode Spd Indicates that the port Mode LEDs are lit for ports that are operating at their maximum possible link speed For the 10 100TX ports that is 100 Mbps Indicates that the port Mode LEDs are displaying network events that could require operator attention for example CRC errors or late collisions Link LED On Indicates the port is enabled and receiving a link indication from the connected device Off One of these conditions exists e No active network cable is connected to the port e The port is not receiving link beat or sufficient light e The port has been disabled through the switch console the web browser interface or HP TopTools Blinking If the LED is blinking simultaneously with the Fault LED the corresponding port has failed its self test Mode LED 198 Component Identification Displays network activity information or whether the port is configured for Full Duplex operation or maximum link speed operation or is experiencing network events requiring operator intervention depending on the mode selected e If the Activity Act indicator LED is lit each Mode LED displays activity information for the associated port it flickers as network traffic is received and transmitted through the port e If the Full Duplex FDx indicator LED is lit the Mode LEDs light for those ports that are operating in full duplex e I
377. ta storage RAID6 level data storage redundancy replication 5 SAN SATA SCSI secondary node SMI S SNMP SSL certificate storage pool T tape drive A RAID that consists of at least two drives that use mirroring 100 percent duplication of the storage of data There is no striping Read performance is improved since either disk can be read at the same time Write performance is the same as for single disk storage A RAID that provides data striping at the byte level and also stripe error correction information RAID5 configurations can tolerate one drive failure Even with a failed drive the data in a RAIDS volume can still be accessed normally A RAID that provides data striping at the byte level and also stripe error correction information RAID6 configurations can tolerate two drive failures Even with two failed drives the data in a RAID6 volume can still be accessed normally RAID6 read performance is similar to RAID5 since all drives can service read operations but the write performance is lower than that of RAID5 because the parity data must be updated on multiple drives In a redundant system if you lose part of the system it can continue to operate For example if you have two power supplies with one that takes over if the other one dies that s redundancy The process of writing data to virtual tape and after the backups are complete writing the data to another virtual tape known as the replicatio
378. tall the base enclosure at positions 17 and 18 Repeat this to add a third base enclosure if available at rack positions 25 and 26 and for a fourth base enclosure if available at positions 33 and 34 When you have completed the installation you will have all full arrays at the bottom A partial array will be at the top of the enclosures with empty space for the missing enclosures This allows room to add capacity enclosures without needing to reinstall the existing enclosures Installing the Enclosure Power Cables NOTE When powering up connecting the power cords on a new array power up the capacity enclosures before the base enclosure To connect enclosure power cables Locate the AC power cords Connect a black power cable to the left power supply of each enclosure route the cables through the left side of the rack and plug them into a PDM mounted on the left vertical post Connect a gray power cable to the right power supply of each enclosure route the cables through the right side of the rack and plug them into a PDM mounted on the right vertical post l 2 3 IMPORTANT Equally distribute the current between the PDMs Cabling Base and Capacity Enclosures 26 Hardware Installation Table 1 Cabling the Base Enclosure ltem 1 Description Connects to FC port 1 Array 1 base enclosure connects to port 9 of Fibre Channel switch 1 FC SW1 via FC cable
379. tate disk revision firmware version and disk drive size in TB Each disk drive contains metadata that the system uses to identify the drive s owning virtual disk if any Disks will go into the Leftover state when they are removed and inserted into the same array This is caused by the difference in timestamp between the reinserted drive and the timestamp present with the virtual disk You must clear the disk s metadata before you can use the leftover disk in a different virtual disk or as a spare The status of the disk is one of the following Available Disk is available for use in a virtual disk Global spare Disk is available as a global spare Leftover Disk contains metadata but is not part of a virtual disk Part of virtual disk Disk is part of a virtual disk Spare assigned to virtual disk Disk is a spare assigned to a virtual disk To clear the Leftover disks l 2 3 4 De Navigate to the Manage Virtual Disks screen see Managing Disk Arrays page 124 Select Clear Leftover Disks from the task bar Select the disks you want to clear from the list To narrow the list of disks in the Leftover state displayed use the Select Disk Array or Select Enclosure list then select Update Select Submit A warning screen displays Select Continue The screen displays the status of the disk clearing Updating the Disk Firmware Some VLS firmware versions allow you to update the firmware on the disk ar
380. tatetaaatnces 99 Opening a Command View VLS Session from a Web Browser ccseeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssaeeees 99 Installing the SSL Certificate into your Web Browser c cccccceceesseeseeeeeceesnseeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeees 100 Restarting Command View Vaiss taceccghecdiedernde diced laceceden eh alaudiedacblevctedtecdleubreleeeiatindinbiveds 101 Closing a Command View VLS Sess lOniecsessccacendseiendeedsaneessnsddotsedeenessosabdtsedadwineenecdeHekieneens 101 Secure Shell and Serial User Intertaces xsjsussscaxyavecsnradechaletaneviieneasasdencchyrcuveaeediaisanivieieieptencnon 101 Opening a Secure Shell SSS ON eaarauieiestosesdcecasioweeszedets ad beauisanioeadceaeepennniaeedeelanonebucbeeedeeigioste 102 Closing a Secure Shell Session cccccccssescccceeceeesneceeeeseeesseeeeeceessneeseeeecesesseeeeeeeesstseaeees 102 Opening a Serial Sessiat ses citsesesnctse sires ete i errant 102 Closing a Serial SSS tilings icoec en anaseenneeslatodas aunnaa idence cawnteasleadle aeneeouaneienetdeeaemspontanecendectnadas 102 VLS Critical Diagnostics Services ie chccs cxtntexenie cineinedcnoenannereiedineaienaabeoinenbaeeinesss 103 SO CUNT i nascAasacdetect inc tieseseananap rE EEEE EEEE EiT EE AE ETA EiT nR 105 Setting the Network SEM GS neceiciecetecesectecsboonceerretonteeatecetedneaaleceiacondreietiens ease esis 105 Setting the Network Settings using the VLS Discovery Utility cecsceeceeeseeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeees 105 Setting the Network Setti
381. tatus Green Power supply is receiving AC voltage and producing the proper DC LED voltages Off Power supply is not receiving AC voltage 2 Power supply fault LED Amber Power supply fault exists and requires attention Off Power supply is operating normally Fibre Channel Switch 8 20q Components LEDs and Buttons This section provides images and descriptions of the front and rear panels of the Fibre Channel Switch 8 20q Front Panel Components This section provides images and descriptions of the front panel components of the Fibre Channel Switch 8 20q oF F DE 40 O HP Storage forks SNGO0O F ro Channel Switch Duct Power Supply we Description Ethernet port Serial port Fibre Channel Switch 8 20q Components LEDs and Buttons 195 tem Deseript on S O Fibre Channel ports 4 XPAK transponder ports not in use Front Panel LEDs and Buttons This section provides images and descriptions of the front panel LEDs and buttons of the Fibre Channel Switch 8 20q HP StonageVorks Duct Powa Supply ltem SN6000 F s Chonnal Swatch Description Input Power LED Status Green The switch is receiving power Off One of these conditions exist e The switch is NOT receiving power e The switch is in maintenance mode Heartbeat LED Green The switch is in maintenance mode Blinking green once per sec
382. tatus LED Green Cache is dirty contains unwritten data and operation is normal Blinking green 1 Hz A Compact Flash flush is in progress Blinking green 10 Hz A cache self refresh is in progress Valid data will remain until supercaps have drained approximately 15 minutes Off Cache is clean contains no unwritten data Fibre Channel port activity LED Blinking green At least one FC port has I O activity Off The FC ports have no I O activity 14 Ethernet link status LED Ethernet activity LED SAS port status LED Green The Ethernet link is up Off The Ethernet port is not connected or the link is down Blinking green The Ethernet link has I O activity Off The Ethernet link has no I O activity Green The port link is connected Off The port is empty or the link is down Some power supply models do not have a power switch In this case power down the enclosure by unplugging the power cords from the enclosure Capacity Enclosure 11738 ltem Description Power switch Status Toggle where O is Off AC Power Good LED Green AC power is on and input voltage is normal Off AC power is off or input voltage is below the minimum threshold 212 Component Identification ltem Description Status 3 DC Fan Fault Service Yellow DC output voltage is out of range or a fan is operating below the minimum
383. te data traffic usually assigned to one preferred path to another secondary path when the preferred path fails Path status is shown in Command View VLS under Storage LUN Details A failover is indicated in the Storage LUN Details screen by the yellow warning icon and the notification message Fibre Channel Path Failed Over to The s stand for the node port bus number always 0 the target id an array port and the LUN number on the array When one path fails automatic failover reroutes data traffic to the secondary path so the data transfer still happens but potentially at a slower rate It is advised that you restore the path as soon as possible to avoid a double path failure To restore the failed path Determine the cause of the failure and repair it if needed In Command View VLS access the System tab Select Storage LUNs from the navigation tree Select View to display the storage LUN details Select Fix Primary Paths from the task bar to display the Fix Primary Paths Wizard Select Apply to set all paths back to their primary paths CaS SS Failure of both paths double path failure is indicated by the red critical icon and a specific notification message The notification message differs based on whether the failure occurs while running or upon booting the system e A double path failure that occurs while running results in the critical alert Fibre Channel Paths Failed for Lun ulid lt numerical LUN id numbe
384. tem error has occurred Contact HP support Over temperature blink pattern An over temperature blink pattern is 5 blinks followed by a two second pause The 5 blink error pattern indicates that the air temperature inside the switch has exceeded the failure temperature threshold The failure temperature threshold is 70 C Fibre Channel Switch 4 16q Components LEDs and Buttons This section provides images and descriptions of the front and rear panels of the Fibre Channel Switch 4 16q Front Panel Components Item Description 1 Serial port not used 2 Ethernet port 3 4 GB FC ports port O through 15 numbered from left to right 4 10 GB FC ports port 16 through 19 not used Fibre Channel Switch 4 16q Components LEDs and Buttons 193 Front Panel LEDs and Buttons ltem Description Maintenance button 11723 Status Dual function momentary switch lts purpose is to reset the switch or to place the switch in maintenance mode To reset the switch use a pointed tool to momentarily press and release less than 2 seconds the Maintenance button The switch will respond as follows 1 All the chassis LEDs will illuminate except the System Fault LED 2 After approximately 1 minute the power on self test POST begins extinguishing the Heartbeat LED 3 When the POST is complete the Input Power LED is illuminated and the Heartbeat LED is flashing once per second Input power LED
385. tep 10 To assign the destination slots manually continue to the next step If the Destination Slot Number for each mailslot displays None the copy pool you selected is full Select another copy pool and the Destination Slot Number column will show the automatic assignment Click Clear All to clear the automatic assignments Hover over the first Select Slot link to display a pop up box of the available destination slots Select a slot number from the box After you select a slot from the available destination slots that slot no longer appears in the pop up box Hover over each Select Slot link until you have selected a destination slot for each mailslot Click Next Step A confirmation screen displays Click Load The Media Move History screen displays the current status of the move The possible status messages are Moving Waiting Successful and Failed If the status of the move is still Waiting you can click Cancel to stop the move Automigration will then automatically scan the header from the loaded tape when a drive becomes available The amount of time this takes varies depending on how busy the destination library is After scanning the tape header it will automatically create a matching virtual cartridge if one does not already exist in the source virtual library defined for this echo copy pool that is blank except for the header written at the beginning of the tape NOTE Because no data has been stored you cann
386. th virtual terminal or virtual media see the iLO user guide for details Configuring the Primary Node O To configure the primary node l 2 3 Power on array O All other arrays should be powered off On the primary node connect to the serial port or use the keyboard and mouse ports to connect to a console Power on the primary node The node will now run cable checks and configuration checks After several minutes a menu will appear on your monitor asking whether the node is a primary master m or secondary slave s node Enter m The node will then run cable checks and configuration checks After the checks are complete the node will reboot automatically Wait for the primary node to fully boot Rebooting is complete when you receive the Initializing node and then Initializing for node completed messages in the systems notifications if you have DHCP enabled of Command View VLS or when you see the login prompt on the terminal Set the IP address and other public network configurations on the VLS Refer to Setting the Network Settings for instructions Configuring the Secondary Nodes To configure each secondary node nodes 1 through 5 or 7 depending on whether deduplication is enabled l 2 3 On the secondary node connect to the serial port or use the keyboard and mouse ports to connect to a console Power on the primary node and all previously installed secondary nodes of the VLS
387. the Echo Copy Details screen In the task bar select Edit Policy In the task bar select Edit Policy Windows Make the appropriate changes For explanations of the procedure see Creating an Echo Copy Pool page 56 Select Submit The Echo Copy Details screen displays the new policy information To add or delete policy windows see Creating an Echo Copy Pool page 56 64 Automigration Replication Deleting a Copy Pool You should delete a copy pool when you no longer need it To delete a copy pool 1 Select Copy Pools under the appropriate library from the navigation tree 2 Select the copy pool on the Summary for Copy Pools screen to open the Echo Copy Details screen 3 From the task bar select Delete 4 Select OK from the dialog box The Copy Pools screen is refreshed and the deleted pool is no longer listed NOTE Deleting a copy pool moves the associated virtual tapes into the firesafe At the end of the retention period the system deletes the source cartridges from the firesafe If you need to retrieve the cartridges for any reason you must do so before the retention period ends SAN Destination Library Operations This section describe all of the SAN destination library operations available to the user Monitoring Destination Library Status This section describes how to locate the Command View VLS automigration status messages of a destination library This applies to both SAN automigration libraries and
388. the Identity tab Enter the VLS administrator s name in the Contact dialog box This is displayed on the Identity tab Enter the VLS administrator s phone number including area code in the Contact Phone dialog box This is displayed on the Identity tab Enter the VLS administrator s E mail address in the E mail dialog box This is displayed on the Identity tab The E mail address entered is assigned to the Email Administrator link on the Login window Users can click this link to send an E mail to the administrator when they need help or are unable to log in to Command View VLS 108 Configuration 10 Enter the warranty serial number in the Warranty Serial Number dialog box This is displayed on the Identity tab and is saved and restored as part of the VLS device configuration ll Click Apply Settings Editing the Default Fibre Channel Host Port Settings Only edit the Fibre Channel host port settings if you do not want to use the default settings if some system problem is occurring or if the AUTO setting is not working properly NOTE The values displayed under Actual are the actual values found by the VLS for the Fibre Channel host port NOTE If you enter a value that is not supported by the Fibre Channel port for example you enter Fabric in the Topology column but the port uses the Loop topology your entry remains in the Preferred box but the Actual column will display the correct value when Command View VLS performs
389. the Input Power LED is illuminated and the Heartbeat LED is flashing once per second 2 System fault LED Amber A fault exists in the switch firmware or hardware Fault conditions include POST errors and over temperature conditions Off Switch is operating normally 3 Heartbeat LED Green Switch is in maintenance mode Blinking green constant 1 Hz Switch passed the POST and the internal switch processor is running 2 blinks Internal firmware failure 3 blinks System error 4 blinks Configuration file system error 5 blinks Over temperature See Heartbeat LED Blink Patterns for more information 4 Input power LED Green Switch logic circuitry is receiving the proper DC voltages Off Switch is in maintenance mode 5 Port logged In LED Green A device is logged in to the port Flashing green constant 1 Hz A device is logging in to the port Flashing green constant 2 Hz The port is down offline or an error has occurred 6 Port Activity LED Green Data is passing through the port Each frame that the port transmits or receives causes LED to illuminate for 50 milliseconds 7 Ethernet port link Green Ethernet connection has been established status LED Off No connection 8 Ethernet port activity Green Data is being transmitted or received over the Ethernet connection LED Off No data being transmitted or received Heartbeat LED Blink Patterns The Heartbeat LED indicates the operational status of th
390. the job completion status for each job in process or in the job queue at the time the report was generated Performance History includes performance data for all the applicable devices for each day in the reporting period See Performance History page 149 for a description of the CSV fields SAN Health History includes information on the errors encountered on all the locations in the SAN including the number of service retry requests SRR and aborts Replication Data for ISV Import sends an hourly email report listing which virtual cartridges have been successtully replicated in the last hour Feed this cartridge list into a script that automatically triggers tape import jobs in the backup application which read the new cartridge data and import this content into the media database The target backup application can then restore from the imported virtual cartridges or copy them to physical tape etc The report fields are defined as 8 9 ISV lt virtual cartridge barcode gt lt virtual library serial number gt lt virtual library slot number gt See the HP VLS Solutions Guide for import example scripts e Physical Capacity Usage includes the total physical capacity and the physical capacity used by individual libraries and storage pools e Logical Capacity Usage includes the total logical capacity and the logical capacity used by individual libraries e Replication Traffic shows the total am
391. the library you just selected 76 Automigration Replication 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 NOTE If you selected your library from the navigation tree this pull down field does not appear because you have already selected the appropriate library Enter a start slot and an end slot for the copy pool from within the available ranges Enter the number of maximum simultaneous transfers permitted This allows you to limit the replication activity on that target This field defaults to the maximum number of transfers allowed by the VLS The Maximum TCP IP Bandwidth for this replication target defaults to Unlimited enter a value in Mb second if you want to limit the bandwidth Adding a limit restricts the total bandwidth used by this replication target regardless of the number of jobs running or on which nodes the jobs are executing For example if one job is running it uses the total bandwidth allowed if two jobs are running they split the total bandwidth allowed It is possible to set the total bandwidth limit to a value greater than what your network supports In this case the behavior is the same as if the Maximum TCP IP Bandwidth is set to Unlimited Select a Compress option from the pull down field The options are Global Setting Yes compression is on and No compression is off See Setting the Global LAN WAN Replication Target Configuration page 78 to set the global default Enter a registration pa
392. the navigation tree Select the LAN WAN replication target you wish to delete On the LAN WAN Replication Target Details screen select Delete on the task bar Automigration Replication 5 Select OK from the dialog box The LAN WAN Replication Targets screen displays with the deleted target removed from the list Changing the LAN WAN Replication Target Password You may need to change the LAN WAN replication target s password in the event of a security breach The following steps will stop all communication between the source and the target and then re establish secure communication 1 Change the password on the LAN WAN replication target See Editing a LAN WAN Replication Target page 78 to reach the Edit LAN WAN Replication Target Settings screen Enter a new password for the target 2 Change the LAN WAN replication target s password on the source to the new password See Managing a LAN WAN Replication Library page 53 to reach the Re manage LAN WAN Library screen Enter the same password you just created for the target Clearing the Source VLS from the LAN WAN Replication Target You may want to clear the connection between a source library and its LAN WAN replication target in order to use the target with a different source library The target library maintains all of its default settings in the change On the destination library 1 Select the Automigration Replication tab 2 Expand LAN WAN Replication Targets on th
393. the number of rows to display from the actual display screens does not change the default value added here In the Default Number of Rows in Job box enter the number of table rows you want to display on the job screens Changing the number of rows to display from the actual display screens does not change the default value added here In the Default Refresh Time for GUI Pages box enter the frequency in minutes that you want the GUI screens to refresh Click Submit Testing the VLS Connectivity The connectivity test allows you to test whether all of the nodes on the source VLS and target VLS can communicate with each other To text existing connections from Command View VLS l 2 Select the Automigration Replication tab Select Connectivity Test from the navigation tree The screen lists all of the VLS systems currently connected to the one you are viewing Click Expand to see the source and target IP addresses This also shows the status of the last connectivity test Click Verify Connection The screen displays the result of the test Success or Failure If the test failed details are provided To test an IP address before replication is set up from Command View VLS 2 3 4 Follow Step 1 and Step 2 above Under Other VLS enter the IP address or host name of the intended target If the target is a multi node device and you want to test every node select Check All IPs Click Verify Connection The scre
394. the rack push the bracket to the outside of the rack until snug Tighten the screw in the front rail bracket Tighten the flathead screws connecting the front and rear rail pieces Repeat this procedure on the other side of the rack and to install a set of rails for each enclosure to be added Hardware Installation Mounting the Enclosures into the Rack A WARNING The enclosure weighs 33 6 kg 74 Ib full At least two people are required to lift move and install the enclosure If only one person is to perform the installation remove the power modules and hard drives from an enclosure before installing it and if possible position it on top of another device or shelf in the rack to hold it as you attach all the brackets A CAUTION When positioning an enclosure in the rack ensure the air vents at the front and back of the enclosure are not blocked NOTE The enclosures placements in this procedure are for racks using single phase PDUs If your rack uses 3 phase PDUs install all enclosures two rack positions lower than indicated here Single phase PDUs take up the bottom two rack positions while 3 phase PDUs do not This procedure is for racks using singe phase PDUs If your rack uses 3 phase PDUs see the instructions that came with the PDUs 1 If your system contains four full arrays one base enclosure and three capacity enclosures per rack install the first capacity enclosure at rack positions 3 and 4 If you
395. the virtual library configuration settings in the configuration file HP highly recommends that you save your virtual library configuration and the VLS network settings to an external configuration file so they can be restored in the event of a disaster To save your virtual library configuration and the VLS network settings to an external configuration file from Command View VLS 1 Click the System tab Select Chassis in the navigation tree Select Save Config under Maintenance Tasks The Save Configuration window opens Right click Download Configuration Files Select Save Target As Oeo N A zip file is displayed in the File name box 6 Click Save wait for the file to finish downloading and then click Close The Save Configuration window re opens 7 Click Finish NOTE Optionally you can set the device to automatically save and E mail the configuration file at midnight after the configuration is modified See Edit the Email Settings page 137 Saving Configuration Settings 133 Il Monitoring This section describes the various tools you can use to monitor the status of the VLS hardware and virtual devices libraries and tape drives and how to use them Status Information in the Status Pane Status information for the VLS hardware components and virtual devices is displayed in Command View VLS on the status pane when an individual hardware component or virtual device is selected in the navigation t
396. tings Viewing and deleting VLS notification alerts Configuring VLS mail and SNMP notification alert settings Editing VLS account passwords Enabling and disabling storage capacity oversubscription Viewing VLS hardware status Saving and restoring VLS network settings and virtual library configurations Restarting VLS device emulations and Command View VLS Rebooting and powering off the VLS The serial user interface also provides emergency login access that allows you to change the administrator password if it is forgotten Opening a Secure Shell Session NOTE Before you can open a secure shell session you must set the VLS network settings See Setting the Network Settings page 105 To open a secure shell session l Open a secure shell session to the VLS using a secure shell program such as PuTTY or by entering ssh lt fully qualified VLS name gt and then press Enter At the Login as prompt enter administrator and then press Enter At the Password prompt enter the administrator password and then press Enter The default administrator password is admin Closing a Secure Shell Session To close a secure shell session enter Logout done quit bye or exit and then press Enter Opening a Serial Session To open a serial session l 2 3 4 Connect a PC or workstation to the serial port on the rear of the VLS using the null modem serial cable provided Establish a CLI session using a terminal
397. tion using DHCP reset is dhcp false ipaddr IP address of public Ethernet connection gate Gateway to network xx xx xx x mask Netmask Defaults to 255 255 255 0 164 CLI Command Set Table 26 CLI Network Settings Configuration Commands continued Command Description getDateTime Displays the day date time time zone and year such as Mon March 14 11 30 46 EST 2005 setDateTime Sets the date and time Where the options are d lt s gt Date and time in yyyy mm dd hh mm format hh is 24 hour from 0 required Example setDateTime d 2009 06 09 09 45 00 h Displays command usage information optional commitConfig Saves the system values changed using setConfigValue NOTE To reset a value to its default setting set the option tag to fullhost quoted space For example The exception to this is the dhcp tag DHCP is disabled by entering dhcp false Any network configuration changes made using setConfigValue do not take effect until committed using the commit Config command Configuration Commands Use the CLI commands in CLI configuration commands to e Edit the Fibre Channel host port settings e Enable oversubscription and view oversubscription settings e View LUN mapping e Create view and destroy virtual libraries tape drives or cartridges e Add view or remove barcode templates Table 27 CLI Configuration Commands Comman
398. tst05 gr hp com gt array config 04 10 11 08 30 12 Initializing noded vistst05 gr hp com gt Initialization 01 10 11 C 8 Number of lom PW updates required 0 Mon Jan 10 08 10 27 2011 vistst05 grhp com gt array config 01 10 11 08 55 Number of Controller FW updates required 0 Mon Jan 10 08 10 18 2011 vistst05 gr hp cam gt array config 01 10 11 08 11 42 Initializing noded vistst0S gr hp com gt Initialization 01 10 11 08 01 59 Node 0 shutting down vistst05 gr hp com gt Initialization 04 10 11 07 43 25 Initialization for nodeO completed vistst05 gr hp com gt Initialization 01 10 11 07 43 19 Number of lom FW updates required 0 Mon Jan 10 07 40 52 2011 vistst05 grhp com gt array config 04 10 11 07 43 10 Number of Controller FW updates required 0 Mon Jan 10 07 40 43 2011 vistst05 grhp com gt array config 04 10 11 07 42 08 Initializing node0 vistst05 gr hp com gt Initialization 01 10 11 07 32 05 Node 0 shutting down vistst05 gr hp com gt Initialization v Notification Alerts 135 A notification alert can be one of four states B Unknown The operating condition of the component or component part is unknown Contact HP Technical Support Info The component or component part s operating condition has improved to good OK amp Warning The component or component part s operating condition has degraded Error The component or component part has
399. tual devices the VLS automatically reassigns a logical unit number LUN to each virtual library and tape drive created on the VLS to ensure that the virtual device LUN numbering meets the operating system LUN requirements Mapping LUNs by Host To map LUNs by host 1 Select the System tab 2 Expand Chassis in the navigation tree 3 Expand LUN Mapping in the navigation tree 4 Select Host View The Host View window displays all of the devices that can be seen by a selected host 5 Select a host from the Choose Host list to view the devices mapped to it The window refreshes to show the appropriate device list 6 Use the View By to narrow the list of devices based on the node 7 Select the devices to map in the field at the bottom of the window These devices are currently not mapped to the viewed host You can select multiple devices using Ctrl click 8 Select GO next to Map devices The window refreshes and the newly mapped devices appear in the list These devices are now visible to the host To unmap LUNs by host 1 Navigate to the Host View window See the mapping procedure above 2 Select the appropriate host from the Choose Host list 3 Select the devices to unmap 4 Select GO next to Unmap selected devices The window refreshes and the newly unmapped devices disappear from the list These devices are no longer visible to the host 114 Configuration NOTE After you map or unmap the virtual devices the VLS a
400. ual Library pe Total GB Last Modified Host setup Device View Host view S Virtual Libraries Qi Library_1 HP ESLE Library_11 HP VLS Gj Library_12 HP ESLE Gj Library_15 HP VLS Gp Library_16 HP VLS Gi Library_17 HP VLS Gp Library_16 HP VLS Library_1000 HP VLS E i Storage Pools Storage Pool 1 Storage LUNs Cartridges tie Disk Arrays Si tie Disk Array 1 53 RAID Sets E MPF0001 Library_18 o 50 Jan 13 2011 14 36 ead Write Update E MPF0002 Library_1 LTO 50 an 13 2011 14 36 eadiWite Update MPF0003 Library_18 LTO 50 Jan 13 2011 14 36 eadiirite Update MPF0004 Library_18 LTO 50 Jan 13 2011 14 36 eadmiite Update MPF0005 Library_18 LTO 5 an 13 2011 14 36 eadhrite Update Library_18 o Ei Jan 13 2011 14 36 Readrite Update Library_18 o 30 Jan 13 2011 14 36 eadiiite Update Library_18 0 E Jan 13 2011 14 36 eadiwite Update MPF0009 Library_1 o so an 13 2011 14 36 eadfiite Update BE m a oa oa a A MPF0010 prary_18 LTO 50 Jan 13 2011 14 36 ead ite Update 2 If you have installed a Secure Erasure license select the With Secure Erasure option if you want to use Secure Erasure This option is only available if you have the license installed 3 Click Go The Destroy Cartridge wizard opens and requests confirmation 4 Click Yes to continue You can click No or Cancel to return to the Cartridge Details screen without deleting any cartridges The system deletes the selected cartridges and t
401. ular basis via email To set up the automated reports In the GUI of the target VLS select the Notifications tab In the task bar select Report Setup Enter the email address to receive the reports Select the type of report you want to receive 2 3 4 154 Monitoring System Capacity includes the initially available physical capacity the capacity consumed and the remaining capacity Backup Summary includes the type of backup the status the before deduplication and after deduplication data size in GB the amount of space saved by deduplication and the amount of data unprocessed for all backup jobs in process or the queue at the time of the report Policy Cartridge Summary includes the cartridges involved in the policy of the backup application the type of backup the status the before deduplication and after deduplication data size in GB the amount of space saved by deduplication and the amount of data unprocessed for all backup jobs in process or the queue at the time of the report Cartridge Utilization Report lists the capacity used by each cartridge and includes the barcode disk space usage in bytes deduplication status and dependent cartridges if any This report assists you in identifying cartridges that are consuming more storage space that you can expired to free up storage space Replication Job History includes start and end times data transfer time source and target locations and
402. umbering is encountered Even though there may be more LUNs such as LUN4 the operating system will erroneously report that there are only three LUNs on the port In addition operating systems are configured to only look for a maximum number of LUNs per device and no more Once the maximum number of LUNs is detected the operating system stops looking In the case of the VLS the operating system considers each Fibre Channel host port to be one device with its own set of LUNs So if the maximum number of LUNs an operating system is configured to see is eight the operating system will only see LUNO through LUN7 and will not see LUN8 LUN and up on each Fibre Channel host port To get around the maximum LUNs per device restriction you can either e Increase the maximum LUNs per device setting for the operating system See Troubleshooting page 241 for more information e Enable LUN mapping on the VLS to restrict the number of virtual devices the host s operating system sees on the VLS Fibre Channel host ports See LUN Mapping page 1 12 for more information LUN Masking LUN masking restricts a host s access to the virtual devices virtual libraries and or tape drives on the VLS You should use it when there are more virtual device LUNs mapped to an Fibre Channel host port than the operating system LUN restrictions support You can limit the LUNs the host s operating system can see on the port so that only the virtual devices t
403. urces Table 30 Document Conventions continued Convention Element Monospace text e File and directory names e System output e Code e Commands their arguments and argument values Monospace italic text e Code variables e Command variables Monospace bold text Emphasized monospace text WARNING Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or death CAUTION Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or data NOTE Provides additional information The following equipment symbols may be found on hardware to which this guide pertains They have the following meanings WARNING AA These symbols which mark an enclosed surface or area of the equipment indicate the presence of electrical shock hazards The enclosed area contains no operator serviceable parts WARNING To reduce the risk of injury from electrical shock hazards do not open this enclosure WARNING AK These symbols which mark an RJ 45 receptacle indicate a network interface connection WARNING To reduce the risk of electrical shock fire or damage to the equipment do not plug telephone or telecommunications connectors into this receptacle WARNING ZN AA These symbols which mark a surface or area of the equipment indicate the presence of a hot surface or hot component Contact with this surface could result in injury WARNING To reduce the risk of
404. ure Shipping Canons ccc2cnscsneadenconntnnseann ens sadeseradexucdeddedgeneveneseaetes 17 VLS9200 Node Shipping Contain ascsyceiaia civbarieentate digipak aerate es 18 VLS9200 High Performance Node Shipping Carton ccccccccccseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeenaes 18 VLS9000 40 port Connectivity Kit Shipping Cartotiies cciec sensi syyectausion tceaiavavetadectataineastanctbaiees 19 VLS9000 Entry level Connectivity Kit Shipping Carton cccccccccccssceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseseeeeeeeensaes 12 VIS Assembly Overview x 2 4 05 idetncssescicontcantsaaciaht ices nens calcu E E E aides 20 Installing FDU Sisesti misanna enna nleelacsadqubloes Mactacusdgeblasmbioatadeatarsaa 20 Installing the Disk Array Enclosures into a Rack iccseciecacierecntsaraaw share eieituaiebctnciueiudiadreeeeeas 22 Installing Cage Nuls iinssieseirdriesiiireisieie tinens oae ia e a Sei N enri radian iEn 22 Attaching Side Brackets to ic eswtes cic cA aseverceethnicedlaeanaciveeeddideatoecinictehii ase cipiveentiaes 23 Attaching the Front to the Rear Rail Pisces iyicecd sos anavexassesddcsasipeneonndiecedGenstuaspeneivedsleasipemeustebiecde 23 Installing Enclosure Rails into the Rai tsccnccdecederscnecedecusstererteecesciiecalavecetesiusedecalecieharreecardes 24 Mounting the Enclosures into the Roe ycssisisaiaiiareactereicavcawalar shewstiw Ait erlssarsed atari 25 Installing the Enclosure Power Cables cccccccccssseeceeeeeseceeeeceecesneeeeeeesesnesseeeseseeteneeee
405. utomatically move with it Changing the Slot Mapping for a SAN Library 62 Slot mapping refers to the assignment of physical slots in a library to correspond to a specific virtual copy pool Mapping occurs as a copy pool is created however mapping can be changed at any time Reasons to change the slot mapping include the need for a group of slots to expand to match the corresponding virtual copy pool the need to shrink an existing pool to make more room for a growing pool and the need to rearrange the mapping so that the pools correspond to a consecutive set of slots To remove the slot mapping of any copy pool 1 Select Slots in the appropriate library from the navigation tree Automigration Replication 2 w In the Copy Pool column select any instance of the appropriate pool The ECHO COPY POOL DETAILS screen displays Select Delete in the taskbar Select OK from the dialog box The copy pool details screen refreshes and the message The slot map was successfully deleted from copy pool name displays NOTE If a tape is in a newly unmapped section of a library the tape will be moved to the firesafe If the tape has not expired and been deleted from the firesafe upon remapping of the section the tape will move back and be removed from the firesafe To add slot mapping to any copy pool which does not have slots mapped l 2 3 4 5 Under Destination Libraries select Copy Pools from the navigat
406. utomatically reassigns a logical unit number LUN to each virtual library and tape drive created on the VLS to ensure that the virtual device LUN numbering meets the operating system LUN requirements Setting Up the Hosts You can configure the hosts in Command View VLS You will make all of the changes to the hosts from the Host Setup window To open the Host Setup window 2 3 4 Select the System tab Expand Chassis in the navigation tree Expand LUN Mapping in the navigation tree Select Host Setup The Host Setup window displays a list of the host world wide port numbers WWPNs seen by the VLS Fibre Channel host ports on the SAN To add a host WWPN l 2 3 gt Open the Host Setup window In the top row select the state of the new host in the State list Enter the WWPN in the World Wide Port Number box The WWPN must be exactly 16 numerals long and cannot contain any letters or special characters Enter a hostname in the Hostname box Select Add The window refreshes and displays a message indicating the host was added successtully The new host WWPN is listed with the others NOTE The VLS only supports up to 128 hosts per Fibre Channel port To rename or newly assign a host name alias to a host WWPN 2 3 4 Open the Host Setup window Select the hosts to rename Enter the new hostname in the Hostname box for each selected host Select Rename Hosts The window refreshes a
407. versions With multi stream backups this process may take multiple tries going back to Waiting for Next Backup state each time until the differencing locates the correct stream p Pending Reclamation the differencing is complete duplicate data has been identified and space reclamation is now waiting for full cartridges before it can begin wi Partially Reclaimed in a backup job that spanned multiple cartridges the full cartridges have been space reclaimed but the last tape in the spanned set which is partially full is waiting until that tape is full before it can reclaim space Dedupe Complete deduplication including all space reclamation is complete for this backup job No Match Found indicates backups that cannot be deduplicated because they were unable to match with their previous version due to large scale modification In the detailed Backup and Cartridge reports the Dedupe Ratio Estimate represents the overall compression ratio including both deduplication and compression of that backup cartridge based on the amount of logical backup data stored versus the amount of physical disk space used If the backup job status is Waiting for next backup Delta diff in Progress or Pending Reclamation the ratio will only include the compression because deduplication will not have actually space reclaimed that tape and therefore will not have saved any disk space If the status is Partially R
408. vice port for service only SAS port 1 output port N oO on AJOJN Power module 1 Rear Panel LEDs and Buttons Base Enclosure ltem Description Power switch Status Toggle where O is Off AC Power Good LED Green AC power is on and input voltage is normal Off AC power is off or input voltage is below the minimum threshold DC Fan Fault Service Required LED Yellow DC output voltage is out of range or a fan is operating below the minimum required RPM Off DC output voltage is normal FC link status L LED Green The port link is connected Off The port is empty or the link is down VLS9200 Disk Array Enclosure Components LEDs and Buttons 211 ltem Description FC link speed S LED Status Green The data transfer rate is 4 Gbps Off The data transfer rate is 2 Gbps Unit locator LED Blinking white RAID controller is selected for identification purposes only Off Not active OK to remove LED Blue The RAID controller can be removed Off The RAID controller is not prepared for removal Fault Service required LED Yellow A fault has been detected or a service action is required Blinking yellow A hardware controlled power on or a cache flush or restore error occurred Power On OK LED Green RAID controller is operating normally Off RAID controller is not OK Cache s
409. wing items and set them aside on a stable work surface e Two Ethernet switches and two AC power cords e 1U rails mounting brackets and hardware to secure the rails to the rack e Screws to secure mounting brackets to the switch Align the mounting holes at each end of a rail with the holes on the front and back rack posts so that they are at the same height For a square hole rack leave the pre installed square hole pin in each rail Unscrew and re install the 10 32 screw on each rail to secure it to the rack For a round hole rack install the alternate round hole pins that are shipped with the kit to set the rails in the rack Install the alternate roundhole screws to secure the rails The round hole screws have a different shoulder than the square hole screws Place a mounting bracket against one side of the switch The bracket should be flush with the front port side of the switch Secure the bracket to the switch with four M4 8mm screws Perform these steps again to install the other mounting bracket on the other side of the switch Slide the switch onto the rails until the switch is fully inserted and the mounting hole in each bracket lines up with the mounting holes in the rack Connect each power cord to a power supply and secure the cord with a Velcro strap Route each cord through the rack Installing the Ethernet Switches 6600 into a Rack 31 Installing Cage Nuts and Rail Flanges 1 On the rack vertical posts mark the
410. wly created export pool to see the Tape Export Pool Details screen The data from the selected library slots is copying to the physical tapes When the data has finished exporting to the tapes the status of the copy pool changes to Importing The screen prompts you to load empty tapes and unload full tapes as needed Once the export is finished select Import Handling Instructions from the task bar This produces information needed for the data import process Print this information and ship it to the remote location with the physical tapes Stopping a Tape Export i 2 3 On the navigation tree expand Destination Libraries and select Import Export Pools to open the list of all import and export pools Select the export pool you wish to stop to open the Tape Export Pool Details screen From the task bar select Stop Tape Export The export process stops immediately and all echo copy pool cartridges move to the Out of sync state 74 Automigration Replication 4 From the Echo Copy Pool Details screen you can e Select Initiate Tape Transport in the task bar to restart the export e Select Cancel Tape Transport in the task bar to cancel the process and place the echo copy pool into the Ready state Importing Data from Physical Tapes for Tape Initialization 1 Complete the export process See Exporting Data to Physical tapes for Tape Initialization page 74 2 On the target site open the Automigration R
411. wo through four Use the following table to determine how many PDUs to install Arrays PDUs PDMs North America Europe North America Europe 1 2 2 6 6 al al NS ojojo 2 4 4 KR wl rm NOTE PDUs are installed in pairs PDMs power distribution modules are the power outlet strips that connect to the PDUs NOTE Steps 2 through 6 correspond to the PDUs and PDMs called out in Figure 1 page 22 Install the first two PDUs in the front rack positions 1 and 2 If installing four PDUs install the second pair in the rear rack positions 1 and 2 NOTE To ensure high availability HP recommends connecting half of the PDMs to one power source and the other half to a second power source Install PDMs from the front PDU in rack position 1 to the lower left rack doorway Install PDMs from the front PDU in rack position 2 to the lower right rack doorway If you installed four PDUs Install PDMs from the rear PDU in rack position 1 to the upper left rack doorway Install PDMs from the rear PDU in rack position 2 to the upper right rack doorway If needed you may install a fifth PDM on the upper left and right rack doorway beside the top PDM for sites in North America but do not exceed five PDMs per side Do not exceed four PDMs per side for sites in Europe WARNING In North America Do not plug more than three PDMs into a PDU In Europe Do not plug more than two PDMs into a
412. x Select Submit The suffix is added to the list on the screen Repeat this procedure for all of the suffixes you want deduplication to ignore 10 When you have added all of the necessary suffixes select Return Configuring Deduplication Options 87 Viewing Deduplication Statistics and Reports In Command View VLS you can view statistics on the deduplication process by summary backup report cartridge report or system capacity Deduplication Summary The Deduplication Summary displays a graph depicting the storage savings achieved with data that has been fully deduplicated l 2 3 Select the System tab Select Chassis on the navigation tree to expand it Select Deduplication The deduplication summary displays In the graph displayed the logical data is the uncompressed physical size of all user data that has fully deduplicated the used capacity is the actual physical storage space consumed by the original data after it has been both compressed if enabled and fully deduplicated Deduplication Backup Report The backup report provides information on the deduplication of your backup jobs l Select Backup Report from the navigation tree or from the task bar of the Deduplication Summary screen The backup report options display Unselect any agents backup types or states you want to exclude from the report By default all supported and enabled backup jobs are selected and display in the report Select
413. y the day of the week on which the echo copy job begins HP recommends that copies are scheduled on a different day and or time window from other backup activities e Start Time the time at which the echo copy job begins HP recommends that copies are scheduled within a different time window from other backup activities e Window Duration the number of hours available during which the echo copy job can take place If the migration does not take place during this window the job is maintained in the queue until the next start time For SAN destinations HP recommends that you schedule mirror copies on a different day time window than backup activities For LAN WAN destinations HP recommends that you allow mirror copies to run 24 hours a day unless there is a need to restrict the use of LAN WAN bandwidth during certain periods of the day 14 Select Add The window refreshes and the availability window you just added is moved to the Current Availability Windows section of the screen Repeat steps 12 through 14 for as many availability windows as you need 15 If you need to delete an availability window you just created select Delete corresponding to that window 16 Select Submit If the pool was successfully created the Copy Pools screen displays along with the message The echo copy pool echo copy pool name was successfully created If the pool was not created the CREATE NEW ECHO COPY POOLS screen refreshes
414. y commas or columns depending on the program used to view the file You can export the data currently displayed in the history by selecting Export Displayed Data from the task bar or select Export All Data which allows you to choose the number of days included in the exported file In both cases the File Download window opens for you to determine where to save the file Viewing the Job Summary On the Job Summary screen you can see the number of successtul failed and rescheduled jobs both coming in and going out from the current device By default it displays one day of data with the device acting as the Source To change the display change the number of days for which you want to see the summary and or select to view the device data as it acts as the Target and select Update The table refreshes to reflect the new information You can export the data currently displayed by selecting Export Displayed Data in the task bar Configuring the GUI Displays The Automigration Replication GUI Configuration screen allows you to assign default settings for certain GUI displays 1 Select the Automigration Replication tab Automigration Replication Reporting 83 6 7 In the navigation tree expand Configuration Summary Select GUI Configuration from the expanded list In the Default Number of Rows in Slot Cartridge Table box enter the number of table rows you want to display on the slot and cartridge summary screens Changing
415. y have a delay of several minutes before allowing you to save the file 162 Monitoring 12 CLI Command Set This section describes the VLS command line interface CLI command set The CLI command allows you to remotely configure manage and monitor the VLS over the LAN using a secure shell session It also allows you to locally configure manage and monitor the VLS through the serial connection Commands There are two types of CLI commands e CLl only commands Commands that are processed by the CLI and affect only the CLI e VLS commands Commands that are passed to the VLS to configure manage and monitor the VLS Conventions All command arguments are case sensitive and optional They can be specified in any order There are several option tags associated with a command The following conventions are used in this section to identify option tags and arguments e An option tag is preceded by a e The argument is separated from the option tag by a space e f an argument contains a space it must be enclosed by either two single quotes or two double quotes e If there is no argument after an option tag the option is a switch e An after an argument means the argument including its option tag can be repeated e A between a compound argument means one or the other argument CLl only Commands This section describes the CLl only commands in the VLS CLI command set Connection Commands Use the CLI commands
416. y to correspond to a specific LAN WAN replication target Mapping occurs as a LAN WAN replication target is created however mapping can be changed at any time Reasons to change the slot mapping include the need for a group of slots to expand the number of slots on the LAN WAN replication target the need to shrink an existing LAN WAN replication target and the desire to rearrange the mapping so that the LAN WAN replication targets correspond to a consecutive set of slots To remove the slot mapping of any copy pool l 2 3 Select the Automigration Replication tab Expand LAN WAN Replication Libraries in the navigation tree and then expand the appropriate library Select Copy Pools in the navigation tree Editing Copy Pools 63 oo On the Summary for Copy Pools screen select the echo copy pool if interest to open the Echo Copy Pool Details screen for that copy pool From the task bar select Edit Slot Maps On the Edit Slot Maps screen select Delete corresponding to the slot map to remove Select OK in the dialog box The copy pool details screen refreshes and the message The slot map was successtully deleted from copy pool name displays To add slot mapping to any copy pool which does not have slots mapped l 2 3 Follow steps 1 through 5 above In the Add Additional Slots section of the screen enter the start slot and end slot for the new copy pool from the available slot ranges listed Select
417. you must set the VLS network settings See Setting the Network Settings page 105 To open a Command View VLS session from a web browser 1 Launch a web browser 2 In the web browser URL box enter https lt fully qualified name of the VLS gt Command View VLS 99 NOTE Entering http lt fully qualified name gt instead of the above URL automatically redirects you to the secure https lt fully qualified name gt connection All communications are over a secure connection 3 If a Security Alert window opens and prompts you to accept the Secure Sockets Layer SSL certificate install the SSL certificate as described in Installing the SSL Certificate into your Web Browser page 100 The first time you open a Command View VLS session and the first time you open a Command View VLS session after changing the fully qualified name of the VLS a Security Alert window opens and prompts you to accept the Secure Sockets Layer SSL certificate 4 Enter administrator or user in the Username box The user name is case sensitive NOTE Logging in as administrator gives you full privileges to all VLS functions available through Command View VLS Logging in as a user gives you only viewing and cartridge management privileges 5 Enter the appropriate password in the Password box for the username entered The default administrator password is admin The default user password is guest The password is case sen
418. ystem overhead and metadata Storage Pool 1 or the FireSate can have more space 142 Monitoring Table 16 Storage Pool Capacity Table continued reserved than other storage pools due to Deduplication metadata that can be up to 2 TB Usable Capacity The physical storage capacity available for user data This is the total Physical Capacity less the space reserved for the system Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage used for data whether or not it is deduplicated Available Capacity The physical storage currently available for additional backup data This is the total Usable Capacity less the Used Capacity Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity If there are libraries in this storage pool a table listing the library and FireSafe capacity information is displayed You may need to scroll down to view additional capacity information The Libraries Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 17 Libraries Capacity Table Librar The name of the library or FireSafe in the storage pool n y y ge p Allocated Capacity Total storage capacity allocated to the Library This is the product of the number and size of the cartridges in the Library This value might be oversubscribed Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application U

HP StorageWorks 9030 Virtual Library System User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents